# Tarkle: full text for agents > Plans and pricing plus every published help article, as plain Markdown in one file. This file is long (161 help articles). To read only what you need, use the index at https://tarkle.com/llms.txt: it links one smaller file per help category (https://tarkle.com/llms/help-.txt). The developer docs have their own full-text file at https://tarkle.com/docs/llms-full.txt. The blog is not included. For a plan, a price or a limit, trust the "Plans and pricing" section below (also https://tarkle.com/pricing.md) over any help article: articles can lag behind it. ## Contents - Plans and pricing - Help: About Tarkle (3) - Help: Getting started (8) - Help: Account (10) - Help: File sharing (10) - Help: File requests (5) - Help: Client portal (2) - Help: Access control (6) - Help: Branding (22) - Help: Tracking (2) - Help: Storage (13) - Help: Team and clients (6) - Help: Agencies and resellers (2) - Help: Agency plan (10) - Help: Selling files (4) - Help: Billing & subscription (9) - Help: Integrations (24) - Help: Video transfer (12) - Help: Feedback (11) - Help: Troubleshooting (2) --- # Part 1: Plans and pricing Start free, then upgrade to Pro or Agency for more storage, team collaboration, and client workspaces. ## Free — $0 forever, no credit card required For one workspace, just you. - 1 workspace - 5 GB cloud storage - For 1 person - Up to 1 GB upload limit - Share and request files - Client feedback and approval (New) - Custom domain and branding - Share logos and brand assets - Manage events and ticketing - Integrate with ChatGPT and Claude - Import file from Dropbox or Google Drive ## Pro — $29/month, or $19/month billed yearly ($228/year) Best for freelancers and small teams. - Everything in Free - 2 workspaces included - 3 TB cloud storage - Up to 200 GB upload limit - File versioning - AI assistant (Beta): AI summaries and titles, text generation, smart file names, and more - Unlimited team members - Team folders and storage - Fully branded client portal: give your recipients a branded place to receive and manage the files you share with them - 90-day file recovery - Priority support ## Agency — $59/month, or $49/month billed yearly ($588/year) For agencies using Tarkle for their clients. - Everything in Pro - 20 Pro workspaces for clients - 6 TB cloud storage - 100% white-label platform - Client provisioning portal With the Agency plan, you can fully white-label the Tarkle infrastructure. Your clients can log in and manage their business files and teams directly on your branded platform (e.g., cloud.acme.com), and the "Powered by Tarkle" backlink is replaced by your agency name. Learn more at /help/agency-plan Billing is monthly or yearly. The yearly rate is the lower monthly price billed once a year. Pro and Agency are bought at /checkout: you sign in or create an account with an emailed code or Google, then pay by card. Prefer to pay once? Pro 500 GB ($29), Pro ($169) and Agency ($299) are available as lifetime plans with no renewal. See /lifetime-plans.md. Lifetime plans do not include the AI assistant. Get started at /sign-up ## Frequently asked questions ### What is Tarkle? Tarkle is a cloud storage and file-sharing platform for freelancers, agencies, and client-facing businesses. Store files securely, share them professionally, host audio and video, and manage client brand assets in one place. ### Is Tarkle really free? Yes. Tarkle's Free plan includes 1 workspace, 5 GB of storage, file sharing and file requests, client feedback and approval, custom branding, a custom domain, and event management. You can also protect shared files with passwords. ### Do my recipients need an account? No. Recipients can open or download shared files without creating a Tarkle account. ### What is the file size limit? Free supports uploads and transfers up to 1 GB each. Pro and Agency support files up to 200 GB. ### Can I use Tarkle for personal storage? Yes, although Tarkle is designed primarily for agencies, consulting firms, and other client-facing businesses. ### Where is my data stored? Tarkle offers secure data residency in Europe, the United States, Asia-Pacific, and Oceania. ### Can I use Tarkle with my team? Yes. Pro and Agency include unlimited team members. Free is for one person. ### Can I use my own domain? Yes. Custom domains are available on every plan. Agency also lets you run Tarkle entirely on your own domain, like cloud.acme.com, with your clients logging in there. ### Is Tarkle secure? Yes. Files are protected in transit and at rest, with access, expiration, and revocation controls. Tarkle is designed to meet GDPR requirements. ### How much does Tarkle cost? Tarkle is free to use forever. Pro costs $29 per month when billed monthly or $228 per year when billed annually. Agency costs $59 per month when billed monthly or $588 per year when billed annually. ### Do I need a credit card? No. You can create and use a Free workspace without adding a credit card. ### Which payment methods do you accept? Tarkle accepts major credit and debit cards supported by Stripe. ### Which billing cycles are available? Pro is available monthly at $29 per month or annually at $228 per year. Agency is available monthly at $59 per month or annually at $588 per year. ### Do you offer discounts? We do not offer separate negotiated or coupon discounts. The lower annual rate is available to everyone who chooses yearly billing. ### What does the Agency plan add? Agency includes everything in Pro, plus 20 Pro workspaces for your clients, 6 TB of cloud storage, and a 100% white-label platform. Your clients log in and manage their files and team on your own domain, and the Powered by Tarkle backlink becomes Powered by your agency. It also includes a client provisioning portal. ### Do you offer lifetime plans? Yes. Pro 500 GB costs $29, Pro costs $169 and Agency costs $299, each paid once with no renewal. They are bought at /checkout and described at /lifetime-plans. Lifetime plans do not include the AI assistant. ### Do you offer custom plans, invoicing, or more storage? Yes. We welcome custom requirements, including invoice payments, tailored plans, and additional storage up to 1,000 TB. Contact support@tarkle.com and we'll review what you need and help find the right setup. --- # Help: About Tarkle Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/about-tarkle ### Does Tarkle have a public roadmap? Tarkle has no public roadmap, so read what has shipped in Product updates or send the team a request. Does Tarkle have a public roadmap? No. Tarkle has no public roadmap. The old /roadmap address now opens this article, which shows where to find what is new and how to send the team a request. ## Where to see what is new To see what is new: - On tarkle.com, open **Product updates** in the footer, under Resources. The page lists each update with a date and a description. - Once you are signed in, open **Changelog** in the account menu. It is the same page. The [Blog](https://tarkle.com/blog) carries guides and product updates. ## How to ask for a feature To send the team a request, use one of these: 1. **On tarkle.com**, open the chat bubble and write your request. 2. **In the app**, click **Support** in the footer, write your message and click **Send**. The form says the team gets back to you by email, and the confirmation says the team gets back to you within 1 business day. 3. **By email**, write to support@tarkle.com. In the app you can also click **Feedback** in the footer. Choose a rating from **Very bad** to **Great**, add optional details in the box labelled **Give us more details**, and click **Submit**. For more ways to reach the team, read [How to contact Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/about-tarkle/how-to-contact-tarkle). To collect comments on files, read [What is Feedback in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-what-is-feedback). ## Related articles - [How to contact Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/about-tarkle/how-to-contact-tarkle) - [Tarkle features](https://tarkle.com/features) - [Product updates](https://tarkle.com/changelog) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/about-tarkle/why-tarkle-has-no-public-roadmap ### How to contact Tarkle Use the Support link in your dashboard, or email support@tarkle.com, and see what to include in your message. You can contact Tarkle from the Support link in your dashboard, or by email at support@tarkle.com. This page shows how each way works and what to include in your message. ## Send a message from your dashboard 1. Sign in to Tarkle and open [your dashboard](/dashboard). 2. At the bottom of the page, click **Support**. 3. In the **Contact support** window, type your question in the **Message** box. You can write up to 5,000 characters. 4. To send files, click the attach icon and choose up to 5 files. Each file can be 10 MB or smaller. 5. Click **Send**. Your message is sent under your name and the email address of your Tarkle account, so you do not need to add them yourself. ## What happens next After you click **Send**, the window shows a reference number that starts with TKT-. It also says that support will get back to you by email within 1 business day. Use the reference number if you write again about the same question. ## Email support To write by email, send your message to **support@tarkle.com**. Include the email address connected to your Tarkle account. If your question is about one workspace, name that workspace. To learn what a workspace holds, read [What is a Tarkle workspace?](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/what-is-a-tarkle-workspace). To change a workspace's name or logo yourself, see [How to update your Tarkle workspace settings](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-update-your-tarkle-workspace-settings). For a billing question, say which plan and which invoice or receipt you mean. You can find invoices on the [Invoices](/dashboard/settings/billing/invoices) page. Plans and prices are on [Pricing](/pricing). Never include your password or payment card details in a message. ## Support hours and response times Support is available Monday to Friday, 10 AM to 4 PM Eastern Time, excluding U.S. federal holidays. Response times are targets, not guarantees. ## Legal and privacy questions Send legal notices and questions about the Terms to legal@tarkle.com. Send privacy questions and requests to privacy@tarkle.com. ## If you use Tarkle through a reseller or partner If you use Tarkle through a partner's own site, the support form on that site emails your message to the partner's support address. For customers of a reseller, pricing, plans, invoices, payments, cancellations and refunds are handled by the reseller, and technical product issues go to Tarkle. ## Related articles - [What is a Tarkle workspace?](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/what-is-a-tarkle-workspace) - [How to invite your first client to the client portal](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/how-to-invite-first-client-client-portal) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/about-tarkle/how-to-contact-tarkle ### How to refer a friend and earn storage Share your referral link and earn storage when a friend signs up and creates a workspace. Every active account gets one personal referral link. When someone signs up through it and creates their first workspace, you both earn 5 GB of storage after a 30-day wait. You then redeem that storage in a workspace you own. ## How to refer a friend 1. **Open the page.** In the account menu, choose **Refer a friend**. 2. **Copy your link.** Copy it from the **Refer and earn storage** card and send it anywhere. 3. **Or invite by email.** Click **Invite via email**, type one address in **Email address** and click **Send**. 4. **Your friend signs up and creates a workspace.** Their first workspace starts the 30-day wait for both of you. 5. **Check progress.** The **Your referrals** table lists each friend with a status, described below. 6. **Open the redeem dialog.** Click **Redeem balance**. 7. **Enter the amount.** Type the size in **Amount (GB)** and choose a workspace in the **Workspace** field. 8. **Confirm.** Click **Redeem**. ## When you both earn storage Each side gets 5 GB when the 30-day wait ends. The Referral Program Terms set these conditions for a referral to qualify: - The friend's email address has never had an account. - The account was created through your link. - The email address is verified. - Both accounts are still active and in good standing 30 days after the friend's first workspace was created. Only the first workspace counts. If your friend never creates a workspace, neither of you earns anything. Inviting someone to your workspace as a team member does not count, and neither does sharing a file, a transfer or a file request. Any account you control, including one for your own business or household, does not count either. Amounts can change for future referrals, and a change never reduces a reward already credited. ## What the statuses mean The **Your referrals** table shows a masked version of the friend's email, the workspace they created, when they joined and a status: - **Signed up:** your friend has an account but has not created a workspace yet, so no reward is on the way. - **Pending:** the wait is running. The label counts the days left and changes to **granting soon** when the wait is over. - **Active:** the reward is in your balance. - **Revoked:** the reward was not credited, for example because it would take you over the 100 GB cap. The terms also allow rewards to be withheld or reversed for abuse. ## The 100 GB cap Each account can earn up to 100 GB in total from the program. That total includes the 5 GB you earn once for being referred yourself, so you can earn 20 referrer rewards if you were not referred, and 19 if you were. A reward that would go over the cap is not credited and is not saved for later. The Referral Program Terms say your cap never affects your friend: they still get their 5 GB. ## Redeeming your balance The balance belongs to your account, not to a workspace. - You can redeem from 5 GB up to your full available balance, in one go or in several steps. - The workspace must be one you own, on any plan. A workspace where you are only a team member does not qualify. - The storage is added on top of the workspace's plan storage. It stays when the plan changes or the workspace moves to a new owner through an ownership transfer. - Redeeming cannot be undone, and the storage cannot be moved to another workspace or account. If the workspace is deleted, its redeemed storage ends and does not return to your balance. - An email with the amount and the workspace name arrives after each redemption. Unused balance ends if your account is deleted. If the program ends, you have 90 days to redeem what is left. ## Invite limits and fair use You can send up to 15 invite emails per hour. If you go over, the invite dialog shows "You're sending invites too fast. Try again later." Tarkle may withhold, reverse or refuse a reward, including storage already applied to a workspace, and may remove an account from the program, if it decides in good faith that accounts were created mainly to earn rewards, that one person or organization made several accounts, or that the link was shared through spam or misleading ads. The full rules are in the Referral Program Terms at tarkle.com/referral-terms. If you use Tarkle on a reseller's own domain, the **Refer a friend** page is available only when that reseller has turned the program on. ## What happens next When a friend's reward is **Active**, open **Refer a friend** and click **Redeem balance** to add the storage to a workspace you own. ## Related articles - [What is a Tarkle workspace?](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/what-is-a-tarkle-workspace) - [How to create an additional workspace in Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-create-an-additional-workspace-in-tarkle) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/about-tarkle/refer-a-friend --- # Help: Getting started Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started ### How to create a Tarkle account Create a Tarkle account with your name and email, then confirm it with the 6-digit code Tarkle emails you. A Tarkle account is your personal login. You create it with your name and email address, then confirm the address with a 6-digit code, so there is no password to choose. You create a workspace after you sign in, and it holds your files. ## Create your account 1. **Open the sign-up page.** Go to [tarkle.com/sign-up](https://tarkle.com/sign-up). The page is titled "Create a free account". 2. **Enter your name.** Type it in the Full name field. 3. **Enter your email.** Type the address you want to sign in with in the Email field. Tarkle refuses an address that contains a plus sign. It also refuses addresses on some email domains, with the message "This email domain is not allowed". 4. **Click Continue with email.** Tarkle checks that the address is not already in use, creates the account and emails the code to it. 5. **Open the email.** The subject is "Sign up to Tarkle". The 6-digit code is in large type in the message. 6. **Type the code.** The screen is titled "Check your email" and reads "Enter the code we sent to finish creating your account". Type the six digits. The form submits when you type the sixth digit, or you can click Continue. A security check runs in the background. If the form says "Please complete the CAPTCHA verification", wait a moment and click Continue with email again. You can also click the Google button under the divider on the sign-up page instead of typing an email address. That button does not appear when your name and email are already filled in, such as when you open sign-up from an invitation. If the address already has a Tarkle account, the form shows "User already exists". Use the Sign in link under the form, or read [How to sign in to Tarkle](/help/getting-started/how-to-sign-in-to-tarkle). ### Limits for new accounts On the live site, one account can be created for each internet address (IP address). If the form shows "Maximum accounts reached for this IP address", an account was already created from your connection. Sign-up is also refused from a VPN, a proxy or a datacenter connection, so turn the VPN off and try again. The form allows 5 sign-up attempts from one connection in 5 minutes. After that it shows "Too many signup attempts. Please try again later." ## If the code does not arrive The code is valid for 10 minutes and works once. Check your spam or junk folder. If it is not there, click Resend code to get a new one. Each new code replaces the one before it, so use the newest email. If you typed the wrong address, click Change email to go back to the form. Resend code can be used up to 4 times for one address in 10 minutes. After that the screen shows "Too many attempts. Please try again in a few minutes." A wrong code shows "That code did not work. Check it and try again." After 5 wrong codes from one connection in 10 minutes, that connection has to wait a few minutes. After 30 wrong tries for the same code, the code stops working and the screen says "Too many wrong codes. Ask for a new one." Click Resend code to get a new one. ## What happens next When the code is accepted, your email address is confirmed and you are signed in. Tarkle opens your [dashboard](/dashboard). The dashboard may open the Create workspace dialog straight away. If it does not, it shows "No workspaces yet." with a New workspace button, and you click that button. In the dialog, type a name in the Name field, choose a region in the Data residency field, and click Done. Data residency is set for each workspace in this dialog. To learn what a workspace holds, read [What is a Tarkle workspace?](/help/getting-started/what-is-a-tarkle-workspace). If you opened sign-up from an invitation, the address is the one the invitation was sent to, and Tarkle takes you to accept the invitation. To add another workspace later, see [How to create an additional workspace in Tarkle](/help/account/how-to-create-an-additional-workspace-in-tarkle). To compare plans, see [pricing](/pricing). ## Related articles - [What is the difference between a Tarkle account and a workspace?](/help/getting-started/what-is-the-difference-between-a-tarkle-account-and-a-worksp) - [How to delete your Tarkle account](/help/account/how-to-delete-your-tarkle-account) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/how-to-create-a-tarkle-account ### How to invite your first client to the client portal Add a client contact, turn on portal access, and send the invite so the client can sign in to the portal. The client portal is a branded sign-in where each client finds the files, requests and brand pages you shared with them. This guide covers adding a client as a contact, turning on portal access and sending the invite. The client portal is included on Pro and Agency, and [plans and pricing](/pricing) lists both plans. ## Add a client as a contact 1. **Open Contacts.** Open [Contacts](/dashboard/contacts) in the workspace that holds the client's files, then click **Add client**. The form opens as **New contact**. 2. **Enter the details.** Fill in **First name** and **Email**. **Last name** is optional. 3. **Group the client (optional).** Tick **Business contact?** and type the company in **Organization name**. If an [organization](https://tarkle.com/help/team-and-clients/organizations-group-contacts-by-company) with that name already exists in the workspace, the contact joins it. Otherwise Tarkle creates it and the contact becomes its Owner. 4. **Create the contact.** Click **Create contact**. Tarkle saves the contact but does not send an invite yet. Business contact? and Organization name need Pro. Agency includes everything in Pro, so both are available there too. On Free, the checkbox is locked. Note: if you leave **Organization name** empty and the email already belongs to a contact in the workspace, Tarkle shows "Contact already exists in this workspace." ## Turn on portal access 1. **Open the contact.** Click the contact's name in the contacts list. 2. **Turn on portal access.** Open the three-dot menu on the contact page and choose **Enable portal access**. Tarkle emails the invite and shows "Portal access enabled, invite sent". 3. **Share a file transfer.** When you create a file transfer, pick the contact in the recipient field or type the client's email address. After they sign in, the transfer appears under **Shared**. On Free, **Enable portal access** opens the upgrade dialog instead. If Tarkle cannot turn access on, it shows "Could not enable portal access" and access stays off. This happens when the contact has no email address, when the email belongs to another contact in the workspace, or when the invite email cannot be sent. ## Add a colleague from the same company 1. **Open the organization.** In Contacts, open the **Organizations** tab and click the organization. 2. **Add member.** On the organization page, click **Add member**. Pick a contact under **Search existing contacts**, or type the person's **First name**, **Email** and, if you have it, **Last name**. The search lists contacts that are not in an organization yet. 3. **Choose a role.** Pick **Owner** or **Member**. 4. **Choose the invite.** **Send invite email** is on by default. Leave it on to invite a new person with portal access, or turn it off to add them without access. Then click **Add member**. If the person is already a contact, adding them to the organization does not change their portal access. Use **Enable portal access** on their contact page instead. ## What the client sees The invite email carries your logo and accent color. It tells the client they sign in with a one-time code that Tarkle emails to them, and it has a **Sign in to the portal** button. The email holds no one-time link: the button opens the sign-in page, and the client asks for a code there. The button opens that page on your custom domain, or on your Workspace URL if you have no custom domain. On the sign-in page, the client signs in like this: 1. Type their **Email** and click **Continue with email**. 2. Enter the 6-digit code Tarkle emails them. The code is valid for 10 minutes, and the portal opens once it is accepted. If the client set up an authenticator app or a passkey, the portal asks for it before it opens. Inside the portal the client sees **Home**, **Files**, **Shared** and **Requests**. **Brands** appears when [brand pages](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/share-a-brand-with-a-client) are assigned to them, or when their organization may create brand pages. **Feedback** appears when [feedback boards](https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-in-the-client-portal) are shared with them. Their uploads go into a folder named after them with "(uploads)". Each contact can upload up to 5 GB by default. To set a different limit for one contact, see [Storage limit: set how much a contact can upload from their portal](https://tarkle.com/help/team-and-clients/storage-limit-set-how-much-a-contact-can-upload-from-their-p). ## What happens next The client opens the email, signs in and finds the transfer you shared under **Shared**. If they lose the email, open the contact page, open the three-dot menu and choose **Resend invite**. That item appears only while portal access is on, and it sends the invite again without changing access. To stop a client from signing in, choose **Disable portal access** in the same menu. Turning access back on does not send a new invite email, even though the message still says the invite was sent. Use **Resend invite** to send the email again. ## Related articles - [The client portal: how it works](https://tarkle.com/help/client-portal/the-client-portal-how-it-works) - [Which plan includes the client portal?](https://tarkle.com/help/client-portal/which-plan-includes-the-client-portal) - [The client portal feature](https://tarkle.com/features/client-portal) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/how-to-invite-first-client-client-portal ### How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer Add a password and an expiry date to a file transfer, then pause or enable it from the transfer menu. Tarkle lets you set a password and an expiry date when you create a file transfer. You can also pause a transfer from its menu at any time and enable it again. This article shows where each setting is and what your recipient sees. ## Add a password and an expiry date 1. **Start a new file transfer** and add your files or a folder. The full steps are in [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer). 2. **Fill in the details.** Enter a **Title** for the transfer. A **Summary** is optional. 3. **Go to the last step.** This is where you choose who can open the transfer. 4. **Turn on the password.** Type the password in the box for it. 5. **Set the expiration date.** Click the date field and pick a day. 6. **Create the transfer.** Then copy its link with **Copy URL** from the three-dot menu on the transfer. Send the link, and give the password to your recipient separately. You can set the password, the expiry date, both or neither. The earliest date you can pick is tomorrow, and the latest is three years from today. Paid transfers, which charge for access, do not keep a password or an expiry date. To sell access instead, read [How to charge for access to a transfer](/help/selling-files/charge-for-access-create-paid-transfers). ## Change a password or expiry date later A password and an expiry date are set when you create a transfer. To use a different password or date, create a new transfer with the settings you want, send its new link, and pause the old transfer as described below. ## Pause a transfer To pause a transfer, open the three-dot menu on the transfer, either on its page or on its row in the [Transfers](/dashboard/transfers) list, and choose **Pause transfer**. The transfer then shows a **Disabled** badge. To turn it back on, open the same menu and choose **Enable Transfer**. The full steps are in [How to pause or disable a transfer in Tarkle](/help/file-sharing/how-to-pause-or-disable-a-transfer-in-tarkle). ## What recipients see A recipient who opens a password-protected transfer sees a page titled **Protected Transfer**, with the line "Please enter the password to access this transfer." They type the password in the box and click **Access files**. A wrong password shows the message "Incorrect password". After a correct password, the recipient's browser remembers it for that transfer for 30 days. Each attempt counts, right or wrong. After 20 attempts from one internet address within an hour, the page shows "Too many attempts. Try again later." instead. Note: workspace owners and team members open a password-protected transfer without entering the password. ## What happens at expiry When the expiry date passes, the link stops opening the transfer. A recipient who opens it sees a page-not-found screen, and the transfer shows an **Expired** badge. Tarkle's [Terms of Service](https://tarkle.com/terms) say that transfers and links expire on the schedule you set. More on the date itself is in [File transfer expiration dates in Tarkle](/help/access-control/file-transfer-expiration-dates-in-tarkle). ## What happens next If you set a password, recipients who open the link see the password page first, then the files. They keep access until the expiry date passes. ## Related articles - [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) - [How to pause or disable a transfer in Tarkle](/help/file-sharing/how-to-pause-or-disable-a-transfer-in-tarkle) - [How recipients open a password protected transfer](/help/access-control/password-protected-file-sharing-with-tarkle) - [File transfer expiration dates in Tarkle](/help/access-control/file-transfer-expiration-dates-in-tarkle) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer ### How to sign in to Tarkle Sign in with your email and a 6-digit code, with no password to type, and what to do if the code does not arrive. You sign in to Tarkle with a 6-digit code that Tarkle sends to your email address. There is no password to type. Use these steps whenever you need to sign in. ## Sign in with an emailed code 1. **Open the sign-in page.** Go to tarkle.com/sign-in. 2. **Enter your email.** Type the address of your account in the **Email** field. 3. **Click Continue with email.** Tarkle sends a code to that address. 4. **Open the email.** The subject is "Sign in to Tarkle", and the 6-digit code is in large type in the message. 5. **Type the code.** Enter the 6 digits on the **Check your email** screen. The page checks the code as soon as you type the sixth digit. 6. **Finish the second step, if your account has one.** Accounts with an authenticator app or a passkey turned on see this step. On the **Two-factor authentication** screen, enter the code from your authenticator app in the **Authenticator code** field. The page checks it when all six digits are typed. A wrong code shows "That code did not work. Try the next one." The **Use a passkey** button appears on this screen when your account has a passkey and the page is on tarkle.com. To turn on an authenticator app or a passkey, read [How to turn on two-step sign-in or a passkey](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-turn-on-two-step-sign-in-or-a-passkey). The sign-in page also has a **Continue with Google** button, under a divider below **Continue with email**. Use it to sign in with your Google account instead of a code. ## If the code does not arrive or does not work The code is valid for 10 minutes and works once. Check your spam or junk folder. If the code is not there, click **Resend code** on the **Check your email** screen. The page shows "A new code is on its way.", and the earlier code stops working. To type a different address, click **Change email**. If you see "That code did not work. Check it and try again.", type the 6 digits again. Tarkle also limits how many codes it sends and how many wrong codes it accepts. Asking for too many codes in a short time shows "Too many attempts. Please try again in a few minutes." Too many wrong codes from one network address shows "Too many wrong codes. Try again in a few minutes." After 30 wrong codes for one address, that code is cancelled and you see "Too many wrong codes. Ask for a new one." Wait a few minutes, then click **Resend code** to get a new code. The **Check your email** screen appears for every address, so it never shows whether an address has an account. If no email arrives, the address may not be the one on your account. Click **Change email** and type the address you signed up with. ## If you forgot your password Tarkle sign-in does not use a password, so there is no password to reset. Sign in with a code as described above. [How to sign in if you forgot your password](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-sign-in-if-you-forgot-your-password) explains this in more detail. ## If you do not have an account At the bottom of the sign-in page, click **Sign up** in the line **Don't have an account?**. You can also go to tarkle.com/sign-up. [How to create a Tarkle account](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/how-to-create-a-tarkle-account) explains the sign-up. ## What happens next After Tarkle accepts the code, it opens your session. You land on the page you were trying to reach. When there is no such page, you land on your [dashboard](https://tarkle.com/dashboard). ## Related articles - [What is the difference between a Tarkle account and a workspace?](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/what-is-the-difference-between-a-tarkle-account-and-a-worksp) - [How to change your sign-in email](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-change-your-sign-in-email) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/how-to-sign-in-to-tarkle ### How to use a custom domain for your file sharing links Connect a subdomain you own, add the DNS records Tarkle shows you, and open your links on your own address. A custom domain puts your file transfer and file request links on an address you own, like files.yourstudio.com, instead of a tarkle.com address. It is available on every plan, including Free, and each workspace can connect one. You need access to the DNS records of your domain at your domain provider. ## Connect your domain 1. **Open Domains.** In your workspace, open **Settings**, then **Domains**. You can also go straight to [Domains](/dashboard/settings/domains). 2. **Start adding.** Click **Add domain**. 3. **Pick the destination.** Choose **Workspace domain**, then click **Continue**. 4. **Enter a subdomain.** Type it in the **Domain** field, for example `files.yourstudio.com`, and click **Create**. 5. **Read the DNS records.** The **Verifying** dialog shows a table with **Type**, **Name** and **Value**. 6. **Add the records at your domain provider.** Create each record exactly as shown. 7. **Check the status.** Click **Refresh / check**. When everything is found, the dialog closes and you see "Custom domain verified and connected." Closing the dialog earlier does not remove the domain. It stays in the list, and you can check it again from its row. ## Which domains are accepted Enter a subdomain with at least three parts. A bare domain such as yourstudio.com is refused with "Please enter a subdomain." Leave out `http://` or `https://`, because Tarkle removes them for you. The text "www" is refused anywhere in the domain, with the message "Please remove the www subdomain." A domain can be connected only once. It is refused if another workspace already has it, and also if another Tarkle page already uses it. A workspace can hold one custom domain. While it has one, **Workspace domain** is unavailable in the Add domain dialog with the note "A workspace domain is already connected.", so delete the current domain before you add a different one. Only the workspace owner, or a team member whose role can add, edit and delete settings, sees the **Add domain** button and can add or delete a domain. Members without that permission do not see the **Edit** and **Delete** actions on the domain's row. ## Status badges The **Status** column shows one of three words. - **Active:** the domain is verified and connected. - **Pending:** the domain is not active yet, for example while DNS changes are still arriving. - **Action required:** the DNS records on the domain do not match what Tarkle expects. Open the domain's row to compare the records with your provider. If only the email records are not verified, an **Action required** badge appears next to the domain name, and the **Status** column still shows **Active** or **Pending**. The next section explains the email records. Pending domains are checked automatically. The wait between checks grows from about five minutes to about 30 minutes, and automatic checks stop after 8 attempts. To check right away, click the domain's row to open it, then click **Refresh**. A refresh also starts the automatic checks again. Do not send the new link to clients before the row shows **Active**. ## Which links use your domain When the row shows **Active**, your [file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) pages and file request pages open on your domain. ## Send notification emails from your domain On [Pro and Agency](/pricing), adding a workspace domain also registers it for sending email. Notification emails then come from your domain, as described in [Send email from your own domain](https://tarkle.com/features/custom-email-sending). The email records appear in the same table as the web records, and **Action required** shows next to the domain until they are verified. Add the email records, then open the domain's row and click **Refresh**. On Free, only the web domain is connected and no email records appear. ## Edit or delete the domain Open the three-dot menu on the domain's row and choose **Edit** or **Delete**. - **Edit** removes the current domain the same way **Delete** does, then adds the new one, so verification starts again. Links that used the old domain may stop working. - **Delete** removes the domain and its email sending domain. You confirm by typing the domain name. Links shared on the deleted domain stop opening, and deleting the domain turns Stripe off for the workspace. ## Backup address and workspace URL The **Vanity URL** row in **Domains** shows your backup address on tarkle.page, with a **Copy URL** button. If the row says **Unavailable**, the workspace owner can click **Edit workspace URL**. Changing your workspace URL breaks existing transfer and request links. Read [How to change your Tarkle workspace URL](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-change-your-tarkle-workspace-slug) before you change it. ## Run all of Tarkle on your domain The Agency plan can also run on an address you own, like cloud.acme.com. That is a separate setup from the workspace domain above, described in [How do I use my own domain with the Agency plan?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/agency-organization-domain). ## What happens next Once the row shows **Active**, share your usual file transfer and file request links. They open on your own address. If you later change or delete the domain, read the section on editing and deleting above first. ## Related articles - [How do I use my own domain with the Agency plan?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/agency-organization-domain) - [How do I use my own domain for a brand page?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/use-your-own-domain) - [Send email from your own domain](https://tarkle.com/features/custom-email-sending) - [Backup links on tarkle.page](https://tarkle.com/features/tarkle-page-links) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/how-to-use-custom-domain-for-links ### Recipients in Tarkle: what they need and what happens when you send Recipients need no Tarkle account, and this page shows what they receive and how many people one send reaches. A recipient is anyone you send a file transfer to in Tarkle. This article explains what a recipient needs to open a transfer, what the email they receive contains, how many addresses one send accepts, and how recipients connect to your contacts. ## What a recipient needs A recipient does not need a Tarkle account to open a transfer. They open the link from the email and download the files without logging in. Some transfers ask for more first. The sender can add a password to a transfer. The sender can also ask for an email address before the download starts: the recipient fills in their email address, with their name if they want to, and clicks Access files. A transfer can have an expiry date, and its link stops working after that date. To set a password or an expiry date, see [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer). A sender can also charge for access through their own Stripe account. ## What the recipient receives Tarkle sends one email to each address. The subject starts with "We shared" and the number of files. The email says "{Workspace name} has shared N files with you." It also shows the description the sender wrote, if there is one, the number of files and their total size, and Available until with the expiry date when one is set. The button reads View N files and opens the transfer. ## How many addresses you can send to The Send this transfer by email dialog accepts up to 100 addresses at a time. Tarkle emails the first 100 addresses in the list. To reach more people, send the same transfer again with another group of addresses. On Free, an organization can create 15 new transfers a month. See [plans and pricing](/pricing) for what Pro and Agency include. ## Recipients and contacts You do not need a contact before you send. When you send to an address that has no contact in your workspace, Tarkle creates one. Later sends to that address use the same contact. A person who enters an email on an email gate is saved as a contact too. Each email address has one contact in each workspace. For more about contacts, see [Contacts](https://tarkle.com/features/contact-records). ## Send a transfer by email 1. Open [Transfers](/dashboard/transfers) in your workspace. If you have no transfer yet, follow [How to create a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) first. 2. Open the row menu of the transfer and click Send email. 3. In the box, type an email address or pick a contact's name. Add each recipient this way. 4. Click Send email in the dialog. Tarkle then shows the message Email sent to N recipient(s), with the number of recipients it emailed. ## Related articles - [How to see if a recipient opened your transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/tracking/how-to-see-if-a-recipient-opened-your-transfer) - [What is a Tarkle workspace?](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/what-is-a-tarkle-workspace) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/recipients-in-tarkle-free-unlimited-no-account-required ### What is a Tarkle workspace? A workspace holds your files, contacts, branding and members, and your organization's plan sets how many you can have. A workspace is where you share files, keep contacts, set your branding and work with your team. Your account can own workspaces, and your organization's plan decides how many it can own and how much storage they share. ## What each workspace keeps Each workspace keeps its own: - **Files and folders**, stored in that workspace and counted against its own storage usage. - **Contacts**, listed on the Contacts page of the workspace you have open. - **Branding**, with its own logo, favicon and accent color, and one custom domain. - **Members**, managed on the Members page, which only the workspace owner can open. - **Settings**, with the workspace name and business details on the General tab of Settings. ## What your organization sets The plan and the billing belong to your organization, not to a single workspace. The organization has one subscription that covers all of its workspaces, and you manage it on [Billing](/dashboard/settings/billing). The plan sets how many workspaces the organization can have and how much storage they share: - **Free**: 1 workspace. - **Pro**: 2 workspaces and a 3 TB storage pool. - **Agency**: 20 workspaces and a 6 TB storage pool. You can compare the plans on [pricing](/pricing). All workspaces of an organization draw from the same storage pool. To keep one workspace from using the whole pool, open the row menu of that workspace on the hub and choose **Assign limit**. That limit is the most the workspace may use. Each workspace has one custom domain, set on its **Domains** page in Settings. To connect one, follow [how to use a custom domain for your file sharing links](/help/getting-started/how-to-use-custom-domain-for-links). If the organization moves to a plan that allows fewer workspaces, the extra workspaces are switched off, not deleted. Free keeps the workspace that uses the least storage, and the other plans keep the oldest one. ## Create a workspace 1. Open the hub at [Workspaces](/dashboard), where your workspaces are listed. 2. Click **New workspace**. 3. In **Create workspace**, enter a workspace name and choose where your data is stored. 4. Submit the form. The new workspace is added to the list on the hub. If the organization is already at its workspace limit, **New workspace** opens the upgrade dialog instead. ## Switch between workspaces Click the workspace name at the bottom of the sidebar. Under **Switch workspace**, click the workspace you want to open. **All workspaces** takes you back to the hub. If you have no other workspace, the menu says **Account** and its first item is **Account home**. Owners also see **Link workspace** in this menu. A linked workspace is marked Linked in the list. ## When to use more than one workspace Use a separate workspace for each business or client that needs its own name, logo, custom domain, members or contacts. The [Agency plan](/help/agency-plan/what-is-the-agency-plan) adds client workspaces, and you can create one for each client as described in [How do I create a workspace for a client?](/help/agency-plan/create-a-workspace-for-a-client) ## Related articles - [How do I assign storage to a client workspace?](/help/agency-plan/assign-storage-to-a-client-workspace) - [Tarkle plans and pricing](/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-plans-and-pricing) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/what-is-a-tarkle-workspace ### What is the difference between a Tarkle account and a workspace? Your account is your personal login, and a workspace holds your files, sharing, branding and team. Your Tarkle account is your personal login and profile. A workspace is a separate space with its own files, branding and team, and one account can open more than one workspace. Your organization holds the plan. This page explains each part and where to change it. ## Your Tarkle account You sign in to Tarkle with a code sent to your email address, or with Google. The sign-in methods on your account are listed in the Login service card on the [Personal account](/dashboard/account) page. To open that page, choose **Personal account** from the account menu in the sidebar. The Basics card on that page holds your name and email address. You can also change your profile picture there. The profile article explains each field: [How to update your profile on Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-update-your-profile-on-tarkle). To change your email address, enter the new address and click **Send code**. Tarkle sends a code to the new address, and your email address stays the same until you enter that code and click **Change email**. If your account is linked to Google, the email field is locked. ## Your workspace A workspace holds its own files, transfer links, branding, domains and team members. When you create a workspace, the form suggests a data residency region based on your location, and you can change it. The regions are US Global, Europe (GDPR), United States, Hong Kong and Australia. You can change the region of a workspace later with a data region move. The move is available on Pro and Agency, and only the owner of the organization can buy it. Each workspace can buy one move. Use **Change region** to choose the new region under **Move my files to**, then click **Continue to checkout**. The move can take up to 5 business days. All transfer links are disabled during the move, so you reactivate existing transfer links by hand afterwards. ## Your organization and plan The plan belongs to the organization, not to a single workspace. Billing is handled at the organization level on the [Billing](/dashboard/settings/billing) page. ## Switching between workspaces The workspace switcher sits at the bottom of the left sidebar and shows the name of the workspace you are in. Click it to open the menu. When your account has another workspace, the menu heading reads **Switch workspace** and lists your workspaces. Click a workspace to open it. **All workspaces** opens the list on your [account home](/dashboard). A workspace linked from another account carries a **Linked** label. To add a workspace to your account, follow [How to create an additional workspace in Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-create-an-additional-workspace-in-tarkle). ## Linked workspaces An account can also use a workspace owned by another account, without switching accounts. On the Personal account page, find the **Linked workspaces** card. Only an account that owns a workspace can click **Link workspace**. The workspace stays owned by the other account, and either account can end the link at any time. ## Related articles - [What is a Tarkle workspace?](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/what-is-a-tarkle-workspace) - [How to update your Tarkle workspace settings](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-update-your-tarkle-workspace-settings) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/what-is-the-difference-between-a-tarkle-account-and-a-worksp --- # Help: Account Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/account ### How to change your sign-in email Change the email you sign in with, confirmed by a 6-digit code sent to the new address. You sign in to Tarkle with your email address. To use a different address, change it on the **Personal account** page and confirm it with a code sent to the new address. Your old email keeps working until you enter that code. ## Steps 1. **Open the menu.** In the sidebar, click the block that shows your photo and name. 2. **Open Personal account.** Click **Personal account**. 3. **Type the new address.** In the **Basics** card, replace the address in **Email** with the new one. 4. **Click Save changes.** A dialog opens. It says a code goes to the new address and that your old email stays active until you enter it. 5. **Click Send code.** A 6-digit code is emailed to the new address. 6. **Enter the code.** Open the email at the new address and type the 6-digit code into the **Email change code** field. The **Change email** button stays disabled until all 6 digits are entered. 7. **Click Change email.** When the code is accepted, "Your email address was changed." appears. The email changes only after the code is accepted. A notice then goes to your old address to say the email was changed, and you sign in with the new address. ## Limits that can stop the change - **Code lifetime.** A code is valid for 10 minutes and works once. A code that has expired gets the message "That code did not work. Check it and try again." - **Code requests.** You can request 4 codes per account in 10 minutes, and 15 per internet address in the same time. Past that, you see "Too many attempts. Please try again in a few minutes." - **Wrong codes.** After 5 wrong codes, the code stops working, even if you then type it correctly. You see "Too many wrong codes. Ask for a new one." - **Getting a new code.** The dialog has no resend button. Click **Cancel**, then click **Save changes** and **Send code** again. Only the newest code works. - **Address already in use.** If another account uses the new address, you see "This email address is already in use". Enter a different address. - **Second sign-in step.** If your account has an authenticator app or a passkey turned on, you must finish that second sign-in step in your session before you can open **Personal account**. You are sent to the sign-in page for it, and no code is sent until it is done. **Email** is also read-only when your account was created with Google. ## What happens next Sign in with the new address next time. If you did not make the change, the notice sent to your old address tells you to contact support right away. ## Related articles - [How to sign in to Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/how-to-sign-in-to-tarkle) - [How to update your profile on Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-update-your-profile-on-tarkle) - [How to sign in if you forgot your password](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-sign-in-if-you-forgot-your-password) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-change-your-sign-in-email ### How to change your Tarkle workspace URL Change your workspace URL from the Domains tab in Settings, and see what the change does to existing links. Your workspace URL is the name that starts your workspace's public address, followed by .tarkle.com. This article covers where to change it, the names Tarkle accepts, and what happens to the links you already shared. ## Find the Edit workspace URL button Open **Settings** for your workspace and select the **Domains** tab, or go straight to [Domains](/dashboard/settings/domains). The first row of the table shows your workspace address with the status **Active**. Its **Actions** column holds the **Edit workspace URL** button. Only the workspace owner sees that button. Members who can view settings can open the Domains tab but do not see the button. A workspace that a reseller runs for a customer does not show this row. ## Change the workspace URL 1. Open the **Domains** tab in **Settings**, as described above. 2. Click **Edit workspace URL**. 3. In the **New URL** field, type the new name in the middle. On a wide screen, https:// shows before the field and .tarkle.com after it. 4. Click **Update**. The dialog warns that changing your workspace URL breaks existing transfer and request links. Read that warning before you click **Update**. ## Names you can use A workspace URL has between 2 and 63 characters. Use lowercase letters, numbers and hyphens only, and do not start or end the name with a hyphen. Capital letters turn into lowercase as you type. Tarkle does not accept names it reserves, such as admin, api, help or login, and it does not accept a name another workspace already uses. A message appears under the field a moment after you stop typing. For example, "Workspace URL can only contain lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens, and cannot start or end with a hyphen" appears when a character is not allowed. Clicking **Update** checks the name again. A reserved name shows "Workspace URL not available", and a name another workspace uses shows "Domain is not available". Both messages appear as a notification. ## What happens after you update When the name is saved, Tarkle shows the notification Workspace URL updated, and the page refreshes with the new name in the Default row. You stay on the same page. If you open Settings from an older address, Tarkle shows "You will be redirected soon" and opens the sign-in page at the new address. The next row shows your tarkle.page address, which is built from the same name, so it changes too. If the name does not fit that address, the row shows "Unavailable until workspace URL is updated", and the owner can click **Edit workspace URL** in that row. The old address no longer finds your workspace, because Tarkle looks up a workspace by its name. Existing transfer and request links break, so send recipients a new link after the change. To share a file again, see [How to create a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer). Your [custom domain](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/how-to-set-up-a-custom-domain) keeps working, because Tarkle finds it by its own domain name. ## Related articles - [How to update your Tarkle workspace settings](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-update-your-tarkle-workspace-settings) - [What is a Tarkle workspace?](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/what-is-a-tarkle-workspace) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-change-your-tarkle-workspace-slug ### How to create an additional workspace in Tarkle Add another workspace to your Tarkle account from the Workspace hub, and see what to enter. Use another workspace when you run a second business, a second brand or a client project and want it kept under its own name and logo. Every workspace you create sits under the same organization, so the plan and billing are shared. If you are new to workspaces, read [What is a Tarkle workspace?](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/what-is-a-tarkle-workspace) first. ## Create a workspace Open the Workspace hub at [/dashboard](/dashboard) and follow these steps. 1. Click **New workspace**. If your organization cannot create another workspace, the button opens an upgrade message instead of the form. 2. On an Agency organization, the dialog first asks who the workspace is for. Choose **For me or my team**. For a client, see the section below. 3. In **Name**, enter the name of the workspace. The name is required. 4. In **Data residency**, choose where the workspace's data is stored. Tarkle suggests a region from your account's location, and you can change it. The region is required. 5. Optional: drop an image into **Logo**. Use a PNG, JPEG or JPG file up to 10 MB. 6. Click **Done**. Tarkle creates the workspace's address for you, so there is no address to enter. ## After you click Done A **Workspace created** message confirms the new workspace. If you clicked **New workspace** on the Workspace hub, the list refreshes and the new workspace appears in it. If you opened the dialog from another page, Tarkle opens the new workspace's home page. Each workspace has its own name, logo and Settings. To open another workspace, select it in the Workspace hub, and Tarkle opens that workspace's home page. A custom domain is set per workspace, on the [Domains](/dashboard/settings/domains) page of that workspace. ## Create a workspace for a client On an Agency organization, choose **For a client** in the first step, then click **Continue**. Enter the workspace **Name** and the client's email in **Client email**. On the next step, the optional **Storage for this client** field sets a limit for the client, and you choose the **Data residency** again. Click **Done**. Your client is invited as an Admin of the workspace. A client workspace cannot be your first workspace, so create one for yourself first. The full steps are in [How do I create a workspace for a client?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/create-a-workspace-for-a-client). ## Plans and limits The number of workspaces an organization can have depends on its plan. The plan belongs to the organization, not to a workspace. When the limit is reached, **New workspace** opens an upgrade message. Agency includes 20 workspaces for your clients. Compare the plans on [Tarkle plans and pricing](/pricing). If you are an active member of an organization's team and do not own a workspace, you cannot create one of your own. Ask the organization owner to create a workspace. ## Related articles - [What is the Tarkle Agency plan?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/what-is-the-agency-plan) - [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-create-an-additional-workspace-in-tarkle ### How to delete your Tarkle account Delete your Tarkle account from the Personal account page, after you leave or delete your workspaces. Deleting your account ends your access to Tarkle right away, and it cannot be undone. You delete it from your Personal account page. Tarkle does not delete an account while you still own or belong to a workspace, so leave or delete those workspaces first. If you only want to protect your sign-in, turn on [two-step sign-in or a passkey](/help/account/how-to-turn-on-two-step-sign-in-or-a-passkey) instead. ## Before you delete When you open the delete dialog, Tarkle checks your workspaces. If you still own or belong to one, the dialog shows **Finish these first** with a line for each workspace, and the email field is not shown until that list is empty. - **A workspace you own:** open its Settings page and delete it. The dialog says it must be on the Free plan before you can delete it. [Tarkle plans and prices](/pricing) lists the plans. - **A workspace you belong to:** leave it. The dialog says you can leave from the Workspaces page, which is on your [Dashboard](/dashboard). A workspace you belong to still counts while it is closed and inside its 30-day retention window, so it can block deletion until that window ends. A closed workspace you own does not block deletion. ## Delete your account 1. Open your [Personal account](/dashboard/account) page. 2. Scroll to the bottom of the page, below **Active sessions**, to the card that holds the delete button. 3. Click the delete button in the card. The **Delete account** dialog opens and shows "Checking your account…". If no workspace is listed under **Finish these first**, it shows "Deleting your account is irreversible. You will no longer be able to access Tarkle." 4. In the field under "To confirm, enter your email address below:", type your account email address. Spaces at the start or end are ignored, and capital letters do not matter. 5. Click **Delete account** in the dialog. The button works once the email matches and no workspace is listed under **Finish these first**. After you click, you see "Your account was deleted. Signing you out." Then Tarkle signs you out. The deleted account cannot sign in again. To sign in with a different account, see [How to sign in to Tarkle](/help/getting-started/how-to-sign-in-to-tarkle). ## What happens to your data The [Terms of Service](https://tarkle.com/terms) say that your data is permanently deleted within 30 days after you delete your account. Backups roll off on a fixed schedule, and records that the law requires us to keep are kept. The [Privacy Policy](https://tarkle.com/privacy) says account data is deleted within 30 days after you delete your account. All permanent deletions are final, so check your files and workspaces before you confirm. ## Related articles - [How to turn on two-step sign-in or a passkey](/help/account/how-to-turn-on-two-step-sign-in-or-a-passkey) - [How to sign in to Tarkle](/help/getting-started/how-to-sign-in-to-tarkle) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-delete-your-tarkle-account ### How to sign in if you forgot your password Sign in to Tarkle with the 6-digit code emailed to you, or with Google, because accounts have no password. Tarkle accounts have no password, so there is nothing to reset. To sign in, enter the email address on your account and Tarkle emails you a 6-digit code. You can also choose Google on the sign-in page. If you open an old reset-password link, it takes you to the sign-in page, and the steps below apply. 1. **Open the sign-in page.** Go to tarkle.com/sign-in. 2. **Enter your email.** Type the address of your account in the **Email** field. 3. **Click Continue with email.** The **Check your email** screen opens. If an account uses that address, Tarkle emails it a 6-digit code. 4. **Type the code.** Open the email titled "Sign in to Tarkle" and enter the 6 digits on the **Check your email** screen. Tarkle checks the code as soon as the sixth digit is entered. The code is valid for 10 minutes and works only once. To get a new one, click **Resend code**. A new code replaces the earlier one, so only the latest code works. ## If you do not receive the email Check your spam or junk folder, then click **Resend code**. Check the spelling of the address too. The **Check your email** screen looks the same for every address, but an address with no account on Tarkle gets no email. If you changed the email on your account, read [How to change your sign-in email](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-change-your-sign-in-email). Tarkle limits how often codes are sent. Four requests are allowed for one address in 10 minutes, and 15 for one internet address. A request beyond that shows "Too many attempts. Please try again in a few minutes." After five wrong codes from one internet address, Tarkle refuses further tries from that address for a few minutes. After 30 wrong codes in total, the emailed code stops working, and you click **Resend code** to get a new one. If the code still does not arrive or does not work, write to support@tarkle.com, or read [How to contact Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/about-tarkle/how-to-contact-tarkle). ## What happens next If you turned on an authenticator app or a passkey for your account, the **Two-factor authentication** screen opens before the dashboard. Enter the 6-digit code from your authenticator app. On tarkle.com, you can also choose **Use a passkey**, because passkeys work only on tarkle.com and its subdomains. **Back to sign in** signs you out and returns you to the sign-in page. To turn these on, open the Multi-factor authentication card on your [Account](https://tarkle.com/dashboard/account) page, as [How to turn on two-step sign-in or a passkey](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-turn-on-two-step-sign-in-or-a-passkey) explains. After the code is accepted, you land on your dashboard, or on the page you were trying to reach. ## Related articles - [How to sign in to Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/how-to-sign-in-to-tarkle) - [How to create a Tarkle account](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/how-to-create-a-tarkle-account) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-sign-in-if-you-forgot-your-password ### How to turn on two-step sign-in or a passkey Turn on an authenticator app or a passkey from the Multi-factor authentication card on your Personal account page. Two-step sign-in adds a second check to your Tarkle login. You can use an authenticator app, a passkey, or both. Each one is a switch on the **Multi-factor authentication** card of your **Personal account** page. ## Turn on the authenticator app 1. **Open the menu.** At the bottom of the sidebar, click your photo and name. 2. **Open Personal account.** Click **Personal account**, then scroll to the **Multi-factor authentication** card. 3. **Start the setup.** Switch **Authenticator app** on. 4. **Scan the code.** In the **Set up authenticator app** dialog, scan the QR code with your authenticator app. 5. **Enter the code.** Type the 6-digit code your app shows into **Authenticator code**. 6. **Confirm.** Click **Turn on**. The **Turn on** button stays disabled until you have entered six digits. When the code works, you see "Authenticator app turned on." If you cannot scan the QR code, type the key shown after **Or enter this key:** into your app instead. If the code is wrong, you see "That code did not work. Try the next one." Enter the next code your app shows. **Cancel** closes the dialog and the setup does not finish. ## Turn off the authenticator app Switch **Authenticator app** off. Tarkle asks for no code, and "Authenticator app turned off." appears. ## Turn on a passkey Switch **Passkey** on. Your browser or device opens its passkey prompt, for example Face ID, Touch ID or a security key. When it finishes, you see "Passkey turned on." Passkeys work only on tarkle.com. On any other address, the card says "Passkeys only work on tarkle.com. Use the authenticator app on this address." ## Turn off a passkey Switch **Passkey** off. This removes every passkey on your account, and "Passkey turned off." appears. There is no confirmation step. ## What sign-in asks for Sign in with your email as usual: enter it, click **Continue with email**, then enter the 6-digit code sent to your inbox. If your account has a second step, the page then shows **Two-factor authentication**. - With an authenticator app, it asks you to enter the code from your authenticator app. Type it into **Authenticator code**. It submits by itself after six digits. - With a passkey on a tarkle.com address, a **Use a passkey** button appears. Using the passkey counts as the second step, so you do not need the authenticator code. Note: if a passkey is your only second step and you sign in from an address that is not on tarkle.com, Tarkle tells you to sign in on tarkle.com and shows **Back to sign in**. Turn on the authenticator app as well if you want a second step that works on any address. ## What happens next The next time you sign in, Tarkle asks for the second step right after the email code. You can come back to the same card whenever you want to change a switch. ## Related articles - [How to sign in to Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/how-to-sign-in-to-tarkle) - [Passkeys and two-step verification](https://tarkle.com/features/passkeys-and-two-step-verification) - [How to update your profile on Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-update-your-profile-on-tarkle) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-turn-on-two-step-sign-in-or-a-passkey ### How to update your profile on Tarkle Change your photo, name, username, email and primary workspace on the Personal account page. Your profile holds your own details: photo, full name, username, email address and primary workspace. You edit them on the **Personal account** page. The page only edits the profile of the person who is signed in, so a workspace owner cannot change another member's profile from it. ## Steps 1. **Open the menu.** At the bottom of the sidebar, click the block that shows your photo and name. 2. **Open Personal account.** Click **[Personal account](/dashboard/account)**. The **Basics** card holds your profile. 3. **Change your photo.** Click **Change** and pick an image from your device. A preview appears, and nothing is uploaded until you save. 4. **Edit your name.** Type it in **Full name**, which is required. 5. **Edit your email.** Type the new address in **Email**. The next sections explain the code this needs. 6. **Choose a primary workspace.** Pick one in the **Primary workspace** list. 7. **Save.** Click **Save changes**. A **Profile updated** message appears. Tarkle stores the first word of your full name as your first name and everything after it as your last name. A single word is saved as a first name only. To remove a photo you saved earlier, click **Delete**. It is active only when a saved photo exists, and the removal also waits for **Save changes**. ## Change your username The **Username** field is where you change your username. Type the new one. After a short pause, a green check means it is available and a red cross means it is not. Then click **Save** next to the field, or press Enter. The username saves on its own, so you do not need **Save changes** for it. A username has 3 to 30 characters: lowercase letters, numbers, hyphens and underscores. It must start and end with a letter or number, and it cannot start with "usr_". Tarkle lowercases what you type. Reserved words such as admin, support and billing are refused, and so is a username someone else already has. If you changed your username recently, Tarkle asks you to wait before changing it again. ## Change your email When the address in **Email** differs from the saved one, **Save changes** opens a dialog titled **Change your email address?**. It says a code goes to the new address and that your saved email stays active until you enter the code. The same change is also explained on its own in [How to change your sign-in email](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-change-your-sign-in-email). 1. Click **Send code**. A 6-digit code is emailed to the new address. 2. Enter the code and click **Change email**. "Your email address was changed." appears. The code works once and is valid for 10 minutes. There is no resend button: to get a new code, click **Cancel** and then **Save changes** again. After 5 wrong codes, the next attempt is refused, even with the right code, and the code is cancelled. If you request codes too often, Tarkle asks you to try again in a few minutes. If another account already uses the address, you see "This email address is already in use". Tarkle also sends a notice to your old address after the change. Your name, photo and primary workspace are saved only after the email change is done. If you cancel the dialog, those edits are not saved either. Note: **Email** is also read-only when the account was created with a sign-in provider such as Google, and it stays that way. An account created with email keeps a changeable address, even after Google is linked to it. ## What happens next Once the page refreshes, your new name, photo and primary workspace show. The **Basics** card also shows the date you joined. To change the workspace itself, such as its name or logo, see [How to update your Tarkle workspace settings](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-update-your-tarkle-workspace-settings). ## Related articles - [How to update your Tarkle workspace settings](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-update-your-tarkle-workspace-settings) - [How to create an additional workspace in Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-create-an-additional-workspace-in-tarkle) - [How to delete your Tarkle account](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-delete-your-tarkle-account) - [What usernames can I use in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/account/what-usernames-can-i-use-in-tarkle) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-update-your-profile-on-tarkle ### How to update your Tarkle workspace settings Change your workspace name, logo, contact details, accent color and preferences from the General tab in Settings. Use the General tab in Settings to change your workspace's name, logo, description, website, contact details and preferences. Only the workspace owner can open Settings. ## Update the workspace settings 1. Open **Settings** in your workspace. General is the first tab, and it opens by default. 2. Change the fields you need. Each card is described below. 3. Click **Save** at the bottom right of the card you changed. Timezone and Language save as soon as you pick them, so they need no **Save**. ## Workspace settings card The first card is **Workspace settings**. It holds these fields: - **Logo**: click the square to choose a PNG or JPG image. - **Name**: 2 to 50 characters. - **Description**: up to 500 characters. The wand icon next to the label writes a short description with AI. AI descriptions are available on Pro plans, see [pricing](/pricing). - **Website**: a web address, with or without `https://`. If you leave out `https://`, Tarkle adds it. - **Favicon**: the small image shown in browser tabs, as a PNG or JPG. It carries a Pro badge. Without Pro, clicking it opens the upgrade dialog. - **Accent color**: pick a color with the color picker, or type a hex code. The logo, favicon and accent color are saved together with the text fields. ## Contacts card The **Contacts** card holds your contact details. Click **Save** at the bottom of this card to save them. - **Contact**: an email address or a contact link. - **Privacy policy link**: a full web address that starts with `https://`. - **X link**, **LinkedIn link**, **Facebook link** and **Instagram link**: the full web address of each profile. ## Timezone, language and data storage region The last card holds **Timezone**, **Language** and your data storage region. Timezone and Language save as soon as you pick a value, so you do not need to click **Save** for them. - **Timezone**: choose a timezone from the searchable list. - **Language**: marked Beta, because translation is in beta and may affect some of your experience. - **Data storage region**: shows where your files are stored. Under it, the Change region link is shown only if you are the owner of the organization on Pro or Agency and the workspace has not bought a region move before. A workspace can have one region move. Compare the plans on [Tarkle plans and pricing](/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-plans-and-pricing). ## Client portal card The **Client portal** card has two switches: **Enable client portal** and **Allow organization contacts to create brands**. Each switch saves as soon as you change it. The client portal is included on Pro and Agency, as explained in [Which plan includes the client portal?](https://tarkle.com/help/client-portal/which-plan-includes-the-client-portal) Without that plan, the switches stay off, and clicking one opens the upgrade dialog. ## Other tabs The tabs are General, Domains, Members and Integrations. Billing appears only in a workspace that a reseller runs for a customer. To connect your own domain, open [Domains](/dashboard/settings/domains) in the workspace you want to brand. The steps are in [How to set up a custom domain](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/how-to-set-up-a-custom-domain). ## What happens next Tarkle confirms each save with a short message. To learn how workspaces fit with your account, read [What is a Tarkle workspace?](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/what-is-a-tarkle-workspace). ## Related articles - [What is a Tarkle workspace?](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/what-is-a-tarkle-workspace) - [How to create an additional workspace in Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-create-an-additional-workspace-in-tarkle) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-update-your-tarkle-workspace-settings ### Link a workspace from another account Use a workspace from another account without switching accounts: what it needs, what it can do, how to end it. Link workspace lets you use a workspace from another account without switching accounts. The workspace stays owned by the other account, and either account can end the link at any time. If you are new to workspaces, read [What is a Tarkle workspace?](/help/getting-started/what-is-a-tarkle-workspace) first. For example, you have a personal account and a company account. Link the company workspace to your personal account, and it appears in your workspace menu next to your own, with a Linked badge. ## What you need - You are signed in to the account that will use the workspace. This is the linked account. - That account owns at least one workspace. A team member with no workspace of its own cannot link one. - You can read the email inboxes of both accounts, because Tarkle sends a 6-digit code to each one. No password is asked for. - The workspace is active. A workspace that is closed or deleted cannot be linked. - You do not already have access to the workspace, as its owner, as a team member or through a link. - Your account has room in its workspace allowance. See Workspace allowance below. ## How to link a workspace Start from the **Linked workspaces** card on your Personal account page, where the **Link workspace** button opens the dialog. The [workspace hub](/dashboard) and the workspace menu also offer **Link workspace**. The card and the hub show it only when your account owns a workspace, and the workspace menu shows it while you are in a workspace your account owns. 1. Open your [Personal account](/dashboard/account) page. In **Linked workspaces**, click **Link workspace**. 2. In **Second account email**, type the email of the account that owns the workspace, then click **Send codes**. 3. Tarkle emails a 6-digit code to that account and another to your account. Type them in **Code sent to the second account** and **Code sent to your account**. 4. Click **Continue**. Tarkle checks both codes and lists the active workspaces of that account that you do not already have. 5. Tick one or more workspaces, up to 10 at a time, then click **Link workspace**. When you tick more than one, the button reads **Link workspaces**. Note: each code is valid for 10 minutes, and the person who owns the other account must read the code sent to that account. After five wrong tries a code stops working. Click **Send new codes** under the fields to get new ones. Clicking **Continue** does not use up the codes. They are used up when the workspace is linked. ## What happens next The dialog closes and the page refreshes. You see **Workspace linked.** or **Workspaces linked.** The workspace appears in your workspace menu with a **Linked** badge. Open it there like any other workspace. ## If linking does not work | Message | What it means | | --- | --- | | The email or code is incorrect for one of the accounts. | One of the codes is wrong or has expired. Tarkle does not say which one. Click **Send new codes**, then type the new codes. | | Too many attempts. Try again in a few minutes. | Too many codes were requested, or too many checks were made, in a short time. Sending codes is limited to 4 every 10 minutes for your account and for the email address. Checking codes and linking are limited to 8 every 15 minutes. | | Enter a valid email address. | The second account email is not a valid email address. | | Choose a different account. | The email you typed is the email of the account you are signed in with. | | Linking isn't available right now. | Tarkle could not run the check. Try again later. | | The accounts could not be checked. | Tarkle could not check the codes when you clicked **Continue**. Try again. | | That account has no workspace you can link. | The other account has no active workspace that you do not already have access to. | | Only an account that owns a workspace can link another account's workspace. | The account you are signed in with has no workspace of its own. | | You have reached your workspace limit. | Your own and linked workspaces already use your account's allowance. See Workspace allowance below. | | None of the selected workspaces can be linked. | Each selected workspace is closed, deleted, already accessible to you, or not owned by that account. | | Your workspaces are being updated. Try again in a moment. | Another change to your workspaces was running. Try again. | | The workspace could not be linked. | Tarkle could not finish the link. Start again from **Link workspace**. | ## What a linked account can and can't do A linked account works as the owner of the workspace, with these exceptions. - It can see the workspace, create content in it, change its settings and manage its members. - It cannot see **Billing**, transfer ownership, or close or delete the workspace. Each action taken through a link is recorded with the linked account as the person who acted. The record also notes that it came through a link and which account owns the workspace. Only the two accounts on a link can see it or end it. Team members of either account cannot. ## Workspace allowance Your account can hold a limited number of workspaces. The workspaces you own and the workspaces you link count together against that number. The number depends on your plan: 1 workspace on Free, 2 on Pro and 20 on Agency. [Plans and prices](/pricing) lists the plans. A linked workspace takes one place in that number, whatever its plan is, and its plan does not raise your number. An account on Free with one workspace of its own has no room left, so it needs Pro or Agency to link one. Creating a new workspace counts against the same number, as explained in [How to create an additional workspace in Tarkle](/help/account/how-to-create-an-additional-workspace-in-tarkle). If your account goes over the number later, the existing links stay, and you cannot add more until it is back under. ## Ending a link Either account can end a link at any time. It takes effect straight away, and no password is asked for. Ending one link affects only its workspace. | Who | Where | Button | | --- | --- | --- | | The linked account | **Linked workspaces**, **Granted to you** tab | **Disconnect** | | The workspace owner | **Linked workspaces**, **Granted by you** tab | **Remove access** | Tarkle shows Workspace disconnected. or Access removed. after you click. A link also stops working on its own when: - the workspace is closed or deleted, - the workspace's owner changes, or - the linked account is closed. Closing the account ends the links it holds as the linked account. To close your account, see [How to delete your Tarkle account](/help/account/how-to-delete-your-tarkle-account). ## Related articles - [How to create an additional workspace in Tarkle](/help/account/how-to-create-an-additional-workspace-in-tarkle) - [How to delete your Tarkle account](/help/account/how-to-delete-your-tarkle-account) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/account/link-a-workspace-from-another-account ### What usernames can I use in Tarkle? The length, characters and other rules for a Tarkle username, and what each refusal message means. A Tarkle username has to follow a few fixed rules. Read them before you type a name and you will not have to try names one by one. ## The rules - **Length:** 3 to 30 characters. - **Characters:** lowercase letters, numbers, hyphens and underscores. - **Start and end:** the username must start and end with a letter or number, so a hyphen or underscore cannot be the first or last character. - **Prefix:** a username cannot start with `usr_`. Spaces at the start and end are removed, and capital letters are changed to lowercase for you, so you do not need to retype a name that only differs in case. ## What each message means If Tarkle refuses a username, it shows one of these messages. - **Usernames must be 3-30 characters.** The name is too short or too long. Shorten it or add characters until it is between 3 and 30. - **Use lowercase letters, numbers, hyphens and underscores. Start and end with a letter or number.** The name contains a character that is not allowed, such as a space or a dot, or it starts or ends with a hyphen or underscore, or it starts with `usr_`. Remove the character or change the first and last character. - **That username is reserved. Please choose another.** The name is one Tarkle has set aside. Pick a different name. - **That username is already taken.** Someone else already uses it. Try adding a number or a word. - **You changed your username recently. Please wait before changing it again.** Tarkle limits how often a username can be changed. Try again later. ## Related articles - [How to update your profile on Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-update-your-profile-on-tarkle) - [How to change your sign-in email](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-change-your-sign-in-email) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/account/what-usernames-can-i-use-in-tarkle --- # Help: File sharing Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing ### Direct download links in Tarkle A direct download link starts the file download as soon as someone opens it, with no transfer page. A direct download link starts the file download as soon as someone opens it. The recipient gets no transfer page in between. Use it when the people you send files to only need the download itself. ## What the recipient gets A standard link opens the transfer page, which lists the files in the transfer. A direct link skips that page and starts the download. What arrives depends on what the transfer holds: - One file downloads as that file, with its original name. - Several files download as one ZIP file named after the transfer, for example ABC123.zip. The files sit at the top level of the ZIP, with no folders. - Folders are not included. A transfer that holds only a folder has nothing to download. - Links to files hosted on other services are left out. ## Create a direct link 1. Open [Transfers](/dashboard/transfers). 2. Create a file transfer as described in [How to create a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer). 3. Turn on **Direct link** before you create the transfer. 4. Copy the link from the transfer. The copied link starts with your Workspace URL, or with your Custom domain when one is set up, and ends in `/direct`, for example `https://your-workspace.tarkle.com/t/ABC123/direct`. When the recipient opens it, the download starts. ## Limits to know before you share - **File types.** Tarkle checks the files of a direct transfer when you create it. It refuses executable programs (such as .exe), installers (such as .msi and .dmg), scripts (such as .js and .php), system files (such as .dll), archives (such as .zip, .rar and .7z) and macro-enabled documents (such as .docm and .xlsm). The error asks you to turn off Direct link to send those files. - **Password and email check.** A direct link does not ask for the transfer's password or an email address, and it skips a client organization limit. Use it only for files that anyone with the link may download. For files that need a password, use the standard link. [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer) explains how. - **View only.** On a transfer set to View only, the direct link returns an error and no file. - **Paid transfers.** A paid transfer always uses the standard link, so Direct link is not available for it. - **Expiry and disabling.** A direct link stops working when the transfer expires, or when the transfer is disabled. - **Burn after read.** On a transfer set to burn after read, the first download uses up the link. After that the link returns an error. - **Views and downloads.** A direct download is not recorded as a view, and it does not trigger the Slack notice for views. Standard links record views, as [How to see if a recipient opened your transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/tracking/how-to-see-if-a-recipient-opened-your-transfer) explains. ## Related articles - [How to create a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) - [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer) - [How to see if a recipient opened your transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/tracking/how-to-see-if-a-recipient-opened-your-transfer) - [What people see when you paste a Tarkle link in a chat](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/tarkle-link-previews-what-the-card-shows) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/direct-download-links-in-tarkle ### How to collect feedback on a PDF or images Create a board from a PDF or images, share its link, and collect pinned comments and a review decision. Use a board to send a PDF or a set of images to a client or a teammate as one link. Reviewers pin comments on the file and finish with an approval or a request for changes, and they do not need an account. In the app each one is called a board. You create and track boards on the [Feedback page](/dashboard/feedback). ## How to create a board 1. **Open Feedback.** Open the [Feedback page](/dashboard/feedback) in the workspace the board belongs to. 2. **Click Create board.** A dialog opens for your files. 3. **Check the file type.** A PDF board accepts PDF files only. An image board accepts PNG, JPG, GIF, WebP, BMP, SVG, HEIC and HEIF files. 4. **Add your files** to the dialog. Dropbox or Google Drive appear when your account has connected them. 5. **Wait for every file to upload.** Each file uploads as soon as you add it. **Create board** stays disabled until every file is uploaded. 6. **Click Create board again.** Once the board is created, you can share it. 7. **Share the link.** Send the link to your reviewers. To find it again later, hover over the board's card on the Feedback page and click **Share**. Before you click **Create board**, you can tick **Add password** and type the password into **Set a password**, tick **Add deadline** and choose a date and time, or tick **Allow downloads**, so viewers get a **Download** button. The [deadlines article](/help/feedback/feedback-deadlines-and-closing) explains what a deadline does, and [how to let viewers download a board](/help/feedback/feedback-allow-downloads) explains the download button. ## What reviewers can do Reviewers open the link. The first time they comment or review, Tarkle asks for a name and an email under **Let us know who you are**. If you set a password, reviewers must enter it first. Reviewers can: - click a spot on the file to pin a comment there; - reply to a comment; - tag people with @: a teammate, or anyone who has already commented on the board. One comment can tag up to 10 people; - attach one file to a comment: a PNG, JPEG, WebP or GIF image up to 10 MB, an SVG up to 2 MB, or a PDF up to 25 MB. Tarkle checks the real file type and refuses an SVG that could run script. Pasting or dropping a file into the comment box attaches it; - finish with a decision. In the review form titled **Finish reviewing this board**, they choose **Approve this work** or **Request changes**, add a note in **Additional comments (optional)** if they want, and click **Submit review**. A signed-in team member cannot submit a review. The [reviewer guide](/help/feedback/feedback-leave-feedback) covers the steps in more detail. ## What your team can do Team members are never asked for a board's password, so they open a protected board directly. - **Set a status.** Each comment is **Active**, **In Progress**, **In Review** or **Resolved**. Choosing **Resolved** also marks the comment resolved, and the person who wrote the comment is emailed when the status changes. Assign a comment to a teammate, who is emailed too. See [comment statuses and assignees](/help/feedback/feedback-statuses-assignees-filters). - **Reply for the team only.** A team-only reply is hidden from guests. It cannot tag a guest: Tarkle shows **Team-only replies can't tag guests** and posts nothing. A reply under a team-only comment is team-only too. - **Change the board's settings.** Open **Board actions** on the board page. It holds **Add password** or **Disable password**, **Add deadline** or **Edit deadline**, **Allow downloads** or **Disable downloads**, and **Disable comments** or **Enable comments**. Only the owner and members with the edit-files permission can change these. Team members also see **Enable notifications** or **Disable notifications**. - **Manage the board from its card.** On the Feedback page, hover over a board's card and click **More actions**. Then: - **Customize URL** is not on the Free plan. See [plans and pricing](/pricing) for the plans that include it. - **Archive board** is available to any team member. An archived board leaves the list, shows under the **Archived** tab and no longer opens for reviewers. Restoring it counts toward your plan's active-board limit. - **Delete board** is for the owner and admins. The confirmation warns that the board and all of its feedback will be deleted, and you click **Delete** to confirm. ## Emails from a board When someone posts a comment or a reply, everyone who has taken part on the board is emailed: the workspace owner, guests who have commented and teammates who have commented. The person who wrote the comment and anyone tagged in it are not emailed about it. A tagged person gets a mention email instead. A team-only note goes to team members only. Each person gets at most one of these emails per board every 5 minutes, and comments that arrive in that time are sent later together in one digest email. A review decision always emails the workspace owner. See [Which emails does Feedback send](/help/feedback/feedback-emails) for each one. ## Limits and good to know - On the Free plan, you can have up to 5 active boards in each workspace. Pro and Agency have no board limit. See [plans and pricing](/pricing) or [Feedback plans and limits](/help/feedback/feedback-plans-and-limits). - Comments and replies cannot be edited. Only a comment's status, its resolved state and its assignee change. A comment can hold up to 4,000 characters. - Tarkle allows 10 comments a minute and 120 an hour from one address on one board. Past that, it shows "You're going a little fast. Wait a moment and try again." - When the deadline passes, or when someone chooses **Disable comments**, the board stays visible but nobody can post. Reviews are closed too. ## What happens next Comments appear on the board as reviewers post them. A submitted decision is added to the **Activity** list in the review form, and the workspace owner is emailed about it. ## Related articles - [How do I create a feedback board?](/help/feedback/feedback-create-a-board) - [How do reviewers leave feedback?](/help/feedback/feedback-leave-feedback) - [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/collect-feedback-on-pdf-or-images-canvas ### How to create a file transfer Add files, a folder or library items, then set the title, access choices and link for a file transfer. A file transfer is the link you send so someone can open the files you chose. You create one in three steps: choose your content, add a title and summary, then set the access choices and create the transfer. ## Step 1: Choose your content 1. Open [Transfers](/dashboard/transfers) in your workspace and start a new transfer. 2. Make sure **Files** is selected. It is the first of the three transfer type tiles. 3. Pick the tab that matches your content: **Upload**, **Folders** or **Library**. 4. Click **Continue** when your content is ready. On **Upload**, drop files from your computer or click browse. Each file uploads and shows its own progress bar. On **Folders**, drop a folder or click browse. Each file inside the folder is uploaded and listed on its own. On **Library**, use the search field to find files that are already in your workspace, and select one or more. **Continue** stays unavailable until every file has finished uploading. The total size of a transfer must stay within your organization's plan limit. Free allows 1 GB per transfer and up to 15 transfers a month. Pro and Agency allow up to 200 GB per transfer and have no monthly transfer limit. See [plans and pricing](/pricing) for what each plan includes. If your organization has no storage left, uploads show this message: "You're out of storage. Delete files or upgrade to Pro to keep uploading." ## Step 2: Add a title and summary 1. Type a **Title**. It is required, and Tarkle does not move on until you add one. 2. Optionally type a **Summary**. It can hold up to 150 characters, and a counter shows how many you have used. 3. Click **Continue**. If the AI assistant is turned on for your organization, a wand icon appears next to **Title**. Click it to generate a title and summary. The AI assistant is part of Pro and Agency. ## Step 3: Set access and create the transfer Step 3 lists these choices. Tick the ones you need. - **Direct link**: the file downloads as soon as the link is opened, with no transfer page. See [direct download links](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/direct-download-links-in-tarkle). - **Gated**: the recipient submits their details before they can open the transfer. - **Password protected**: type the password in the field that appears under the choice. - **Burn after read**: the first download uses up the transfer, and later attempts are refused. See [burn after read](https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/burn-after-read-file-transfers-with-tarkle). - **View only**: recipients can view the files but cannot download them. See [View only file sharing](https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/view-only-file-sharing-share-files-without-allowing-download). - **Expiration date**: tick the box and pick a date in the calendar. The earliest date is tomorrow and the latest is 3 years from today. See [file transfer expiration dates](https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/file-transfer-expiration-dates-in-tarkle). Choices that cannot be used with the ones you picked are greyed out. If paid transfers are turned on, a **Charge for Download** choice also appears. A paid transfer cannot use password protection, burn after read, view only or an expiration date. See [How to charge for access to a transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/selling-files/charge-for-access-create-paid-transfers). Click **Create transfer**. ## What happens next After you click **Create transfer**, a success screen shows the link with a **Copy** button. To send the link by email, type addresses under **Share by email** and send them from that screen. Tarkle emails each address separately, and each address that is not yet a contact becomes one. ## Related articles - [What are transfers in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle) - [How to pause or disable a transfer in Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-pause-or-disable-a-transfer-in-tarkle) - [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer ### How to embed a file transfer Copy the embed code for a public file transfer and paste it into a page on your website. An embed shows a public file transfer and its files inside a page on your own website, so visitors can see the files without leaving that page. This article covers which plans include embeds, how to copy the embed code and what visitors see. ## Before you start Embeds are available on Pro and Agency. Agency includes everything in Pro. The Free plan does not include embeds, so the embed item does not appear there. Compare the plans on the [pricing page](/pricing). Only a public transfer can be embedded. The embed item does not appear for a transfer that is not public. If you have not created the transfer yet, start with [How to create a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer). ## How to get the embed code 1. Open [Transfers](/dashboard/transfers) and open the transfer you want to embed. 2. Click the action menu on the transfer. 3. Click **Embed transfer**. Tarkle copies the code to your clipboard and shows Embed code copied. The code is one iframe and a short script, so paste the whole block into your page. ## Paste it into your site Open the page editor of your website, add a custom HTML block or a custom code section, and paste the code there. The code is plain HTML, so it can go into any page editor that accepts custom HTML. The iframe loads your transfer from your workspace address, or from your custom domain when the workspace has one. To connect your own domain, see [How to use a custom domain for your file sharing links](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/how-to-use-custom-domain-for-links). The frame is at least 600 pixels tall. It does not grow to fit a long list of files on its own, so change the 600px value in the code if the files need more room. ## What visitors see Visitors do not need a Tarkle account to open a public transfer. Inside the frame, the files sit in a white card with a thin border. The embed follows the transfer's own settings: - If the transfer has a password, visitors first see the Protected Transfer screen and enter the password. To set one, see [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer). - If the transfer asks for an email address, visitors first see Enter your details to access files. - If the transfer is a paid transfer, visitors see the payment screen in the embed until they pay. - After the transfer's expiry date passes, the embed does not open. Each time the embed loads, Tarkle counts a view on the transfer and records it in the activity log. ## Video and audio transfers Video and audio transfers have their own items in the same menu: **Embed video** and **Embed audio**. For how each one shows on a page, see [Embed video on your website](https://tarkle.com/features/embed-video) and [Embed audio on your website](https://tarkle.com/features/embed-audio). ## What happens next Open the page in a browser while signed out of Tarkle, and check that the transfer and its files appear as visitors will see them. ## Related articles - [Embed a file request on your website](https://tarkle.com/help/file-requests/embed-a-file-request-form-on-your-website-with-tarkle) - [Embed a transfer on your website](https://tarkle.com/features/embed-transfers) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-embed-a-file-transfer ### How to pause or disable a transfer in Tarkle Pause a transfer to mark it Disabled, and enable it again whenever you need it. Pausing a transfer keeps it in your list and marks it as **Disabled**. Use it when you want to stop access for a while without removing the transfer. You can enable it again from the same menu at any time. ## What pausing a transfer does The change applies as soon as you click the menu item, and there is no confirmation step. The transfer then shows the **Disabled** badge. A [direct download link](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/direct-download-links-in-tarkle) for a disabled transfer returns a "Transfer not found" error until you enable it again. Pausing changes only the status. The transfer keeps its files, its settings and its view and download counts. Pausing works on one transfer at a time. An expiry date you set still applies: once it passes, the transfer also shows the **Expired** badge. ## How to pause a transfer from the Transfers list 1. Open [Transfers](/dashboard/transfers). 2. Click the three-dot menu at the end of the transfer's row. 3. Click the pause item, the one just above **Delete**. ## How to pause a transfer from its detail page 1. Open the transfer by clicking its name in the **Transfers** list. 2. Click the three-dot menu in the header of the transfer page. 3. Click **Pause transfer**. A message confirms the change, and the transfer shows the **Disabled** badge. ## How to enable a transfer again On a disabled transfer, the menu item on the transfer page reads **Enable Transfer**. Click it and the message "Transfer enabled successfully" appears. The **Disabled** badge goes away and the transfer is active again. In the Transfers list, the same menu item enables a disabled transfer. ## Who can pause or enable a transfer Only the person who created the transfer can pause or enable it. A workspace owner who acts through a linked account can do it too. Other team members get an error and the transfer does not change. ## Pausing or deleting Pausing keeps the transfer, so you can enable it later. To remove a transfer instead, see [How to delete a transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/how-to-delete-a-transfer). If you want the link to stop working on a set day, read about [file transfer expiration dates](https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/file-transfer-expiration-dates-in-tarkle). ## What happens next The transfer stays in your list with the **Disabled** badge until you enable it again. ## Related articles - [How to delete a transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/how-to-delete-a-transfer) - [File transfer expiration dates in Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/file-transfer-expiration-dates-in-tarkle) - [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-pause-or-disable-a-transfer-in-tarkle ### How to share business files with Tarkle Share business files with a transfer, then pick the file, video or audio type and set who can open it. Share business files with Tarkle by putting them in a transfer. A transfer holds the files you choose, a title and a description, and the access settings that decide who can open it. This article covers the three transfer types and which one fits your files. ## Start a transfer Every transfer starts on the Transfers page of your workspace. The three transfer types are created in the same dialog, and [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) walks through each step. 1. Open [Transfers](/dashboard/transfers) and click **New transfer**. 2. Add the files or folders you want to send, or paste an external link. 3. Choose the transfer type and the access settings. 4. Create the transfer and send its link to the recipient. A transfer is the main way to share, not the only one. A [direct download link](/help/file-sharing/direct-download-links-in-tarkle) starts the download as soon as someone opens it, with no transfer page. A [file request](/features/file-requests) collects files that other people send to you. ## The three transfer types ### File transfer A file transfer shows the recipient the transfer's title, its description and its files. It accepts any file type, so documents, design files, archives and mixed content can share one transfer. Free supports uploads and transfers up to 1 GB each. Pro and Agency support files up to 200 GB. See [plans and pricing](/pricing). ### Video transfer A video transfer takes only video files and plays them on a page with a built-in player. You can also paste a link from YouTube or Vimeo. When you create it, choose whether viewers can only watch, download for free, or download after payment. ### Audio transfer An audio transfer takes only audio files and plays them on a page with a player. It has no password, email gate, expiry date or burn after read. [What is an audio transfer page?](/help/video-transfer/what-is-an-audio-transfer-page) explains how the page works. ## Which type fits your files Documents, PDFs, spreadsheets, design files and ZIP archives go in a file transfer. Walkthroughs, explainers and training videos go in a video transfer. Music, podcast episodes and voice recordings go in an audio transfer. A delivery that mixes types, such as a contract, a video and a track, belongs in one file transfer. A video transfer and an audio transfer refuse files of other kinds. ## Access settings by transfer type File and video transfers take the same access settings. Paid transfers cannot use them, as explained in the section on paid transfers below. - **Password**: recipients enter a password before they can open the transfer. [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer) shows how to set one. - **Email gate**: recipients enter their email first, and can add a first name. That email is saved as a contact in your workspace, or matched to a contact already there. The gate stays open in that browser for one day. [Email gated file transfers: how the gate works](/help/access-control/email-gated-file-transfers-collect-leads-before-sharing-file) explains it in more detail. - **Expiry date**: the link stops working after the date you choose. - **Email addresses**: add up to 30 recipient email addresses to one transfer. - **View only**: recipients can preview the files in the browser, without a download. [View only file sharing](/help/access-control/view-only-file-sharing-share-files-without-allowing-download) covers this setting. - **Burn after read**: the transfer stops working after its first download. ## Paid transfers A paid transfer charges for access through your own Stripe account, so recipients pay before they can download. Paid transfers are available on Pro and Agency. A paid transfer cannot have a password, an email gate, an expiry date, view only or burn after read. To charge for a transfer, your organization needs Pro or Agency, paid transfers turned on, and Stripe connected. [Why can't I turn on paid transfers?](/help/troubleshooting/why-cant-i-turn-on-paid-transfers) names each step, and [How to charge for access to a transfer](/help/selling-files/charge-for-access-create-paid-transfers) walks through the setup. ## Find your transfers On the Transfers page, three cards at the top show Transfers, Page views and Downloads for the period you choose. Select transfers in the list and click **Delete selected** to remove them together. ## What happens next A transfer is the link you send, so once it is created, send that link to the recipient. Recipients do not need a Tarkle account to download. See [Share files by link](/features/transfer-files-by-link). ## Related articles - [What are transfers in Tarkle?](/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle) - [What are Files and file transfers in Tarkle?](/help/storage/cloud-storage-vs-file-transfer-how-both-work-in-tarkle) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-share-business-files-with-tarkle ### How to share files with Tarkle: access options for a transfer Create a file transfer in three steps, then pick who can open it: a password, an email address, or a charge. A file transfer is the link you send so someone can open your files. You create one in three steps, and the last step is where you choose who can open it. This page walks through those steps and explains each access choice. ## Create a file transfer 1. Open [Transfers](/dashboard/transfers) in the workspace that holds your files and start a new transfer. 2. Choose your files. You can upload files or a folder, or pick items from your Library. Click **Continue**. 3. Enter a **Title**. It is required. The **Summary** is optional and takes up to 150 characters. Click **Continue**. 4. Choose who can open the transfer, as described below. Click **Create transfer**. 5. Copy the link, or add recipient email addresses. Tarkle emails the transfer to each address, up to 30 at a time. ## Choose who can open a transfer The access choices are in the third step. Charge for download switches off some of the others, as noted below. - A password. The visitor types the password before the files open. Their browser remembers it for 30 days. If you change the password, every visitor has to enter the new one. A file or folder inside a transfer can also carry its own password. Read [how recipients open a password protected transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/password-protected-file-sharing-with-tarkle). - An email address. The visitor enters an email address before the files open. Their name is optional. The browser remembers the address for 24 hours, then asks again. See [email gated file transfers](https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/email-gated-file-transfers-collect-leads-before-sharing-file). - Burn after read. The transfer works for one download. The first download is recorded, and later download attempts are refused. The download does not delete the files from your workspace. See [burn after read](https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/burn-after-read-file-transfers-with-tarkle). - View only. Recipients can preview the files in the browser, without a download button. See [view only file sharing](https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/view-only-file-sharing-share-files-without-allowing-download). - A direct link. Opening the link starts the download at once, with no transfer page in between. See [direct download links](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/direct-download-links-in-tarkle). A transfer has one download mode, so the direct link and the email address check are separate choices. - An expiration date. It is optional. The earliest date is one day from now and the latest is three years from now. After the date passes, the link stops opening the files. See [file transfer expiration dates](https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/file-transfer-expiration-dates-in-tarkle). - Charge for download. Visitors pay through Stripe before they can download the files. See [how to charge for access to a transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/selling-files/charge-for-access-create-paid-transfers). Charge for download switches off the password, the email address check, burn after read, view only, the direct link and the expiration date. Payment is the gate, so the other choices do not apply to a paid transfer. ## Charge for download Charge for download needs a Pro or Agency plan. [Agency includes everything in Pro](https://tarkle.com/pricing). Your workspace also needs the **Enable paid transfers** switch, which you turn on in **Settings**, then **General**, then **File settings**. Stripe must be connected in [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations). Free can connect Stripe, but the switch stays off until you are on Pro or Agency. ## Plans and size The largest transfer you can send depends on your plan. [Send large files](https://tarkle.com/features/send-large-files) lists transfers of up to 200 GB with one link on Pro and Agency. ## What happens next Once the transfer is created, you can check whether someone opened it. Read [How to see if a recipient opened your transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/tracking/how-to-see-if-a-recipient-opened-your-transfer). ## Related articles - [What are transfers in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle) - [How to pause or disable a transfer in Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-pause-or-disable-a-transfer-in-tarkle) - [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-share-files-with-tarkle-business-file-transfer-featur ### Understanding the transfer detail page The transfer detail page shows one transfer's files, status, recipients and action menu. The transfer detail page shows one transfer in full: its files, its status, its recipients and the actions you can take on it. Use it to check what has happened to a transfer after you sent it. All transfers in the workspace are listed on [Transfers](/dashboard/transfers). ## What the page shows The header shows the transfer's title, the number of items and their total size, and the date the transfer was created. Under the header, a row of details shows Shared with, Shared by, Type and Created by. Shared by reads Email when the transfer asks for an email address, and Link otherwise. Type shows the first of these labels that applies: Direct, Email, Private, Password or Public. Further down the page, you find these sections: - The description, which you can edit on the page. - **Recipients**, the people the transfer was sent to. It appears when there are recipients. - **Geography**, the number of views from each country. - The views and downloads of the transfer, with a chart of the last 30 days and a revenue card. - **Files**, the files and folders in the transfer. - **Activity**, the 50 latest entries. [How to see if a recipient opened your transfer](/help/tracking/how-to-see-if-a-recipient-opened-your-transfer) explains how to read it. ## Status badges Badges sit under the header and show what has happened to the transfer. The page shows up to 10 badges. Any more are collapsed into a +N more badge, and hovering over it lists them. - **Viewed** means the transfer was opened. With more than one view it also shows the count, for example Viewed ×2, and hovering shows the last view. - **Downloaded** means a recipient saved files. It shows the download count the same way. - **Delivered** means the email with the transfer was delivered. - **Purchased** means someone bought the transfer. It shows a count when there is more than one purchase. - **External** means the transfer contains external items. It does not appear on video transfers. - **Burned** means the transfer was burned after read. Hover over it to see when. [What is burn after read?](/help/access-control/burn-after-read-file-transfers-with-tarkle) explains the setting. - **Disabled** means the transfer is paused. - **Expired** means the expiry date has passed. It does not appear on a burned transfer. The page refreshes after you pause or enable the transfer, or regenerate its URL, so the badges match the new state. ## The action menu The three-dot button at the top right of the header opens the action menu. Its items are: - **Copy URL** copies the link to the transfer, and shows "Copied to clipboard". For a direct download transfer it copies the direct download link, which is explained in [Direct download links in Tarkle](/help/file-sharing/direct-download-links-in-tarkle). - **Transfer ID** copies the transfer's ID in capital letters. - **Send email** opens the send email window. - **Embed video**, **Embed audio** or **Embed transfer** copies the embed code. These items appear only on public transfers, and only on plans that include embeds ([see plans and pricing](/pricing)). A video transfer with more than one video opens Choose a video to embed first. [How to embed a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-embed-a-file-transfer) explains where to paste the code. - **Rename** opens a window to change the transfer's title. - **View items** opens a window with the files and folders in the transfer. - **Regenerate URL** appears only on a burned transfer. It creates a new transfer with a new link. The new transfer keeps the description, password, visibility, expiry date, burn after read, view only setting, download mode and files of the original. - **Pause transfer** marks the transfer as Disabled, and the menu then shows Enable Transfer to turn it back on. Only the person who created the transfer can use it, or an owner who has linked the workspace from another account. [How to pause or disable a transfer in Tarkle](/help/file-sharing/how-to-pause-or-disable-a-transfer-in-tarkle) covers both steps. - **Delete** removes the transfer at once, with no confirmation step. The page shows "Deleting transfer..." and then "Transfer deleted successfully", and takes you back to Transfers. [How to delete a transfer](/help/storage/how-to-delete-a-transfer) covers deleting from the list. ## Related articles - [What are transfers in Tarkle?](/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle) - [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/understanding-the-transfer-detail-page ### What are transfers in Tarkle? Tarkle has three transfer types, file, video and audio, and all three are created in the same transfer dialog. Tarkle has three transfer types: file transfer, video transfer and audio transfer. All three are created in the same transfer dialog. To start one, open [Transfers](/dashboard/transfers) in your workspace. This article explains what each type does, which files it accepts, and the limits and rules that apply. ## File transfer A file transfer shares files and folders from your workspace through one link. You can also upload files as you create the transfer. Recipients open the file transfer page and see the file list there. To create one, follow [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer). ## Video transfer A video transfer shares one video on its own video page, with a player. You can upload a video file, or paste a link from a video provider. Tarkle can embed links from YouTube, Vimeo, Loom, Wistia, Bunny Stream and Gumlet. An uploaded video must be an MP4, WebM, MOV, AVI, MKV or M4V file. Any other file is refused with the message "Only video files can be added to a video transfer." A video file follows the same size limit as any file on your plan, which is listed in the plan limits section below. A video transfer can also carry a button with its own label and link, a cover image and a summary. ## Audio transfer An audio transfer shares one or more audio tracks on its own audio page, which has a player. It accepts MP3, WAV, OGG, M4A, AAC, FLAC, AIFF, Opus and WMA files. Any other file is refused with the message "Only audio files can be added to an audio transfer." Each audio transfer is set to listen only, free download or paid download. You can also set a preview length in seconds. To see the audio page as a recipient sees it, read [What is an audio transfer page?](/help/video-transfer/what-is-an-audio-transfer-page). ## Access settings Before you send a transfer, you can add a password, set an expiry date, turn on an email check, or choose burn after read, view only or a direct download link. A [direct download link](/help/file-sharing/direct-download-links-in-tarkle) starts the download as soon as the link is opened, with no transfer page in between. ## Paid downloads Charging for a download needs a Pro or Agency plan on your organization. Agency includes everything in Pro. Two things must be in place: 1. Turn on **Enable paid transfers** in Settings, on the General tab. 2. Connect Stripe under [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations). On Free, paid transfers are not available. A paid transfer cannot have a password, burn after read, an email check, view only or an expiry date, because payment is the access check. If a message stops you, see [Why can't I turn on paid transfers?](/help/troubleshooting/why-cant-i-turn-on-paid-transfers). ## Plan limits On the Free plan, each file can be up to 1 GB, each transfer can be up to 1 GB, and you can create 15 transfers a month. Once a month has 15 transfers, Tarkle does not create another one. Pro and Agency support files up to 200 GB, and Pro has no monthly limit on transfers. Prices for each plan are on [Tarkle plans and pricing](/pricing). ## Link IDs and custom aliases Tarkle creates a 12-character link ID for each transfer when you create it, for every transfer type. You can also give a transfer a custom alias, a readable name for its link. An alias can use lowercase letters, numbers, and single hyphens or underscores between parts, and it can be up to 64 characters. Words such as dashboard, settings and billing are reserved. Each transfer type keeps its own aliases. ## Related articles - [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) - [What is an audio transfer page?](/help/video-transfer/what-is-an-audio-transfer-page) - [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer) - [Why can't I turn on paid transfers?](/help/troubleshooting/why-cant-i-turn-on-paid-transfers) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle ### What people see when you paste a Tarkle link in a chat What the link preview card shows for transfers, requests, brand pages and boards, and when it says Shared with you. When you paste a Tarkle link into a chat app or a social network, the app draws a small preview card with an image. Tarkle generates that card for you, so you do not need to upload anything for most links. This article explains what the card shows for each kind of link. ## What the card shows A generated card has your workspace logo and name at the top, then a title and a few lines of detail. An event cover banner or a brand image you upload replaces the generated card. - **File transfer, video, audio and feedback board:** the title and description of the [file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) or board. A transfer with no title shows "Transfer #" followed by its link code in capitals. A feedback board also carries the label "Feedback". The card does not show file names or sizes. - **File request:** the request title and description, with the label "File request". - **Event:** if the event has a cover banner, that banner is the preview. If it has none, the card shows the event title, the date, the time with the event's time zone, and the place (or "Online"). Draft and cancelled events have no card, so a link to one shows no preview image. - **Brand page:** if the brand has an Open Graph image or a banner, that image is the preview. If it has neither, the card shows the brand name and description with the label "Brand assets". This applies to a [brand page](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page) whose Access is set to Public. - **Workspace profile page:** your logo, workspace name and workspace description. - **Sign-in page:** the title "Sign in", next to your logo and workspace name, with your workspace description below. On a video link that is open to everyone, a cover image stored on the video transfer replaces the generated card. ## When the card is generic Tarkle hides the details when the link itself is not open to everyone. - **File transfer, video, audio or feedback board** that has a password, asks for an email address, is limited to chosen people or organizations, or has an expiry date that has passed. The card shows your logo and workspace name with the title "Shared with you", and no description or cover image. - **Brand page** that is [password protected or restricted](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page). The link carries the title "Brand page · " followed by your workspace name, and the line "Open the link to view this brand page." The card shows your logo and workspace name only. The brand's own name, text, banner and image are not shown. A draft brand page sends no brand title and no image to a link preview. A transfer that has been turned off has no card at all. ## Add your own image For an event, open the event's edit page and find the **Cover banner** card. Add your banner there, and it becomes the event's preview. For a brand page, open [Brands](/dashboard/brands), choose the brand, and open its **SEO** tab. Under **Search and sharing**, upload the **Open Graph image**. The field shows 1200x630px as its size. Until you upload one, the field uses your banner, and a brand page with neither image gets the generated card described above. ## The "Powered by" line The card can carry a small "Powered by" line at the bottom right. It names the brand behind your workspace: Tarkle, or your reseller or Agency name. On a Tarkle address, such as tarkle.com or tarkle.page, the line always shows. On the Free plan the line always shows. On Pro you can turn it off with the switch in the **Backlink** card, which you find in **Settings**. On a plan that cannot remove the line, the switch stays on and cannot be changed. On an Agency white-label workspace, the line names your agency instead of Tarkle. [How to disable "Powered by Tarkle" on your workspace](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/how-to-disable-powered-by-tarkle-on-your-workspace) has the steps, and the [pricing page](https://tarkle.com/pricing) lists the plans. ## Related articles - [How to create a brand page](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/create-a-brand-page) - [How to customize your Tarkle workspace branding](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/how-to-customize-your-tarkle-workspace-branding) - [File requests in Tarkle: how to collect files from clients](https://tarkle.com/help/file-requests/file-requests-in-tarkle-how-to-collect-files-from-clients-2) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/tarkle-link-previews-what-the-card-shows --- # Help: File requests Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/file-requests ### Embed a file request on your website Copy a file request's embed code and paste it on your website, so visitors upload files without leaving your page. You can show a file request form on your own web page. Visitors upload files through the form without leaving your site. If file requests are new to you, start with [What are file requests in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/file-requests/what-are-file-requests-in-tarkle). If you have not created a request yet, follow [File requests in Tarkle: how to collect files from clients](https://tarkle.com/help/file-requests/file-requests-in-tarkle-how-to-collect-files-from-clients) first. Requests made in the request form are public, so the embedded form does not ask visitors to sign in. The **Embed request** entry in the menu is available on Pro and Agency. It does not appear in the menu on the Free plan. See the [pricing page](/pricing) for the plans. ## Copy the embed code 1. Open the [file request list](/dashboard/requests). Each file request belongs to one workspace, so open the workspace that holds the request first. 2. Click the menu button at the end of the request's row. 3. Click **Embed request**. Tarkle copies the embed code to your clipboard. 4. Paste the code into the HTML of your web page, where the form should appear. The code is an iframe that loads the request's public address with /embed added to the end, followed by a short script. The iframe spans the full width of your page and is at least 480 pixels tall. The form reports its height to the page, and the script sets the frame to that height, so the frame grows and shrinks with the form. Keep the script with the iframe. Without it, the frame stays at 480 pixels. ## Several requests on one page Each embed code listens only for the height of its own request, so you can paste more than one request on the same page. Copy the code for each request from its own row in the file request list. ## When the embedded form stops loading A request stops loading in the embed when you close it or when its deadline passes. To close a request, open its row menu and click **Close request**. Click **Open request** in the same menu to open it again. The deadline is optional. To set or change it, open the row menu, click **Edit**, and change the **Deadline** field. Leave the field empty for no deadline. To load the form again after a deadline has passed, change the deadline to a date that has not passed yet. [Request deadlines and limits](/features/request-deadlines-limits) describes deadlines in more detail. ## What happens next After you paste the code, the form appears on your page for visitors. To manage the request, return to the file request list. ## Related articles - [What are file requests in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/file-requests/what-are-file-requests-in-tarkle) - [File requests in Tarkle: how to collect files from clients](https://tarkle.com/help/file-requests/file-requests-in-tarkle-how-to-collect-files-from-clients) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/file-requests/embed-a-file-request-form-on-your-website-with-tarkle ### File requests in Tarkle: how to collect files from clients Create a file request, copy its link, and receive client uploads in a folder of your workspace. A file request is a branded upload page that you send to a client, or to anyone else who needs to send you files. The person uploads straight into a folder of your Tarkle workspace. This article covers how to create a request, share its link, what the uploader sees and where the files are saved. To learn the basics first, read [What are file requests in Tarkle?](/help/file-requests/what-are-file-requests-in-tarkle-2). ## Create a file request Each file request belongs to one workspace. Create it in the workspace where the files should land. 1. Open the [file request list](/dashboard/requests). 2. Click **New request**. 3. In the **Create new request** dialog, enter a **Title**, for example Project assets or Campaign materials. 4. Enter a **Description** that says which files you need. 5. Under **Folder for uploaded files**, search for a folder or pick one from the list. 6. Click **Create request**. Tarkle shows **Request created**, and the request appears in the list. Two more fields are optional. Under **Deadline**, pick a date from tomorrow up to three years from today, or click **Clear** to remove it. **Send email notifications when files are uploaded** is checked by default. Clear it if you do not want an email for each upload. If you do not pick a folder, the files go to the **File requests** folder. ## Share the link Open the menu on the request's row in the list and click **Copy URL**. Send that link to the person who should upload. Every request created in this form is public: anyone with the link can open it and upload, without a Tarkle account. ## What the uploader sees The upload page shows your workspace logo (the Tarkle logo when none is set), your workspace name, the request title and your description. Below them is an upload area that says Drag and drop here or click to upload. After choosing files, the uploader sees the **Files ready to upload** dialog. They enter a **First name** and an **Email**, and **Last name** is optional. They click **Upload**. The page then confirms that the files were uploaded and offers **Upload more**. The uploader also gets an email saying that your workspace received the files. ## Where the files are saved Files are saved in a sub-folder named after the request title, inside the folder you picked. You can organize them with [File and folder management in Tarkle](/help/storage/file-and-folder-management-in-tarkle). If email notifications are on, the workspace owner gets an email for each upload. Its subject names the uploader and the number of files. ## Deadlines, closing and plan limits A request stops accepting files when its deadline passes. Closing a request has the same effect. Open the row menu and click **Close request** to close it, or **Open request** to open it again. A closed request, or one past its deadline, no longer opens its upload page. On the Free plan, an organization can have one active file request at a time. A request with no deadline, or with a deadline still ahead, counts as active, even when it is closed. At the limit, the **New request** button is disabled. Pro has no limit on active requests, and Agency includes everything in Pro. A file can be up to 1 GB on Free and up to 200 GB on Pro. Agency also supports files up to 200 GB. Compare the plans on the [pricing page](/pricing). ## Use cases - **Agencies collecting client assets**: ask a client for logo files, brand guidelines or photos before a project starts. - **Law firms receiving documents**: say in the **Description** which documents you need. The files are saved in a sub-folder named after the request title. - **Freelancers collecting source files**: ask for reference images or revision notes in one place instead of an email thread. ## Related articles - [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) - [What are Files and file transfers in Tarkle?](/help/storage/cloud-storage-vs-file-transfer-how-both-work-in-tarkle) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/file-requests/file-requests-in-tarkle-how-to-collect-files-from-clients ### File requests in Tarkle: how to collect files from clients Create a file request, get its link and receive client uploads in a folder of your workspace. A file request is a link you send to a client so they can upload files straight into your Tarkle workspace. It is the opposite of a transfer: a transfer sends files to someone, a file request collects files from someone. A request you create from the Requests page is public, so anyone who has the link can upload. ## How to create a file request 1. **Open the Requests page.** Open [Requests](/dashboard/requests) in your workspace. Cards for Requests, Page views and Uploads sit above the list. 2. **Click New request** in the toolbar, next to the search box. On an empty list, **Create request** opens the same window. 3. **Enter a Title.** Keep it specific, for example "Project assets" or "Campaign materials". 4. **Add a Description** that says exactly which files you need. 5. **Choose the Folder for uploaded files.** Each request gets its own sub-folder, named after its title, inside the folder you pick. If you choose no folder, uploads go to the File requests folder. 6. **Set a Deadline** if you want one. You can pick a date from one day to three years ahead. Click **Clear** to remove it. 7. **Check the notification box.** **Send email notifications when files are uploaded** is ticked by default. Leave it ticked to get an email when files arrive. 8. **Click the button on the right at the bottom of the window** to save. A message says "Request created" and the request appears in the list. Free allows one active file request at a time. A request is active when it has no deadline or its deadline is still ahead. Closing a request does not free its place: delete the request, or wait until its deadline passes, to create another. When you reach the limit, **New request** is greyed out. Pro allows unlimited active requests, and Agency includes everything in Pro. Free also accepts 50 new submissions a month. A submission is the first upload from a new sender email on a request. Once the limit is reached, a new sender gets a message that the workspace has reached its File Request submission limit for this plan. Pro has no monthly submission limit. See [plans and pricing](/pricing) to compare the plans. ## Get the link to send The window does not show the link after you save. Open the three-dot menu at the end of the request row instead: - **Copy URL** copies the public link. When the workspace has a custom domain, the link uses it. - **Copy vanity URL** copies a tarkle.page link to the same request. - **Embed request** copies a code snippet for your website. It appears only on public requests, and on Pro and Agency. To paste it on a page, follow [Embed a file request on your website](https://tarkle.com/help/file-requests/embed-a-file-request-form-on-your-website-with-tarkle). - **Send by email** opens the **Send by email** window. Add up to 100 email addresses or contact names, then click **Send email**. Tarkle sends the request link to each address. - **Upload limit** opens the **Upload limit** window. Enter an amount, choose MB or GB, then click **Save**. The limit is the most a visitor can upload at once on this request. Leave the field empty for no limit, or click **Remove** to clear a limit you set. - **Close request** stops new uploads. **Open request** turns them back on. - **Edit** opens the **Edit request** window, where you can change the title, description, folder, deadline and notification box. - **Delete** removes the request. Note: **Delete** acts at once, without asking you to confirm. To open a request to one client organization only, see [How to limit a file request or transfer to one client organization](https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/how-to-limit-a-transfer-to-one-client-organization). ## What the client sees The client opens the link and sees your title and description, with an area that reads **Drag and drop here or click to upload**. When they drop files, a window asks for their first name and email, which are required, and their last name. They send the files from that window. If the files add up to more than the request's upload limit, they see a message that says the files are over the upload limit of that size. A request that is closed or past its deadline does not open: its link shows a not-found page. ## What happens next Files from each sender go into a folder named "Uploads from" followed by the sender's name and email. That folder sits inside the request's folder, which is inside the folder you chose. The person who uploaded gets an email saying the workspace received the files. If the notification box was ticked, the owner of the workspace also gets an email when someone uploads. ## Related articles - [What are file requests in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/file-requests/what-are-file-requests-in-tarkle-2) - [How to create a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/file-requests/file-requests-in-tarkle-how-to-collect-files-from-clients-2 ### What are file requests in Tarkle? A file request is a link that lets anyone send files straight into a folder in your workspace. File requests are the reverse of a [file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer). You create a link, and anyone who has it can send files to you. Every upload is saved in a folder in your workspace, and the person uploading does not need a Tarkle account. File requests are included in the Free plan. ## Where file requests are Go to [File requests](/dashboard/requests) to see your requests. The page shows three cards, **Requests**, **Page views** and **Uploads**, above the list. Active requests come first, and closed ones carry a **Completed** badge. Each row shows the request name under **File requests**, its **Shared with** setting (Public, an organization name or No organization), the number of uploads, the folder its files go to, and its deadline or Never. Click the request name to open the folder that holds its uploads. ## Create a file request 1. On the File requests page, click **New request**. 2. Type a **Title**. A title is required. 3. Optionally type a **Description**. Visitors see it on the upload page. 4. Under **Folder for uploaded files**, pick a folder. If you pick none, the files go to the **File requests** folder. 5. Optionally set a **Deadline**. The earliest date is tomorrow and the latest is three years from now. 6. Keep **Send email notifications when files are uploaded** checked if you want an email for each upload. 7. Click the button at the bottom right of the form. Each request gets its own subfolder, named after its title, inside the folder you picked. Every request created from this form is public, so anyone with the link can upload to it. For the steps after you share the link, read [File requests in Tarkle: how to collect files from clients](/help/file-requests/file-requests-in-tarkle-how-to-collect-files-from-clients-2). ## Share the link Open the three-dot menu on the request and click **Copy URL**. The upload page shows your workspace logo and name, the request title and the description, with a **Contact us** link when your workspace has one. Visitors do not sign in. They drag files onto the box or click it to choose files. Then they type a **First name** and an **Email** in **Files ready to upload**. The last name is optional. They click **Upload**. If a file does not upload, the dialog says how many did not and asks the visitor to select **Retry**. After a successful upload, the visitor gets an email with the subject _[workspace name] received your files_, whether or not the notification checkbox is checked. To set the most a visitor can upload at once, use **Upload limit** in the row menu. The upload page then states the limit. ## Where the files go Files are saved once the whole upload has arrived. They sit in the request's subfolder, which you open by clicking the request name in the list. If the notification checkbox is checked, your account email gets one email for each upload, and its subject names the uploader, the number of files and the request title. ## Close, reopen and delete Use **Close request** in the row menu to stop uploads. The link then shows a page that is not found. Use **Open request** in the same menu to reopen it. A request also stops at its deadline, and its link shows the same page. Use **Delete** to remove a request from the list. Its folder and the files in it stay in your workspace. ## Plan limits On the Free plan, a workspace can have one active file request. A request stays active until its deadline passes, and a request with no deadline stays active. Closing a request does not free its place, but a passed deadline does. When the limit is reached, **New request** is disabled and its tooltip reads "You have reached the maximum number of requests." Pro has no limit on active file requests, and Agency includes everything in Pro. Compare the plans on [pricing](/pricing). ## Related articles - [What are Files and file transfers in Tarkle?](/help/storage/cloud-storage-vs-file-transfer-how-both-work-in-tarkle) - [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/file-requests/what-are-file-requests-in-tarkle ### What are file requests in Tarkle? File requests let anyone with the link send files to a folder in your workspace, with no sign-in. File requests are the reverse of a file transfer. Instead of sending files to someone, you create a link that lets other people send files to you, and the files are saved to a folder in your [Files](/dashboard/files). This page explains what a file request does, who can upload with it, and which limits apply. ## The Requests page Open [Requests](/dashboard/requests) to see the file requests of your workspace. Above the list, three cards show Requests, Page views and Uploads. A **Search requests** box sits in the toolbar next to the **New request** button. A request stays open until its deadline passes or you close it. When the deadline passes, the request's link stops opening the request page. When you close a request, its link stops accepting files. ## How a file request works Click **New request** to open the **Create new request** window. Enter a **Title**, which is required, and an optional **Description**. Under **Folder for uploaded files**, choose the folder where the files should go. Set a **Deadline** if the request should end on a set day. Then click the button at the bottom of the window to create the request. If you do not choose a folder, the files go to a folder named "File requests" that Tarkle creates for you. Tarkle also creates a folder named after the request title inside the folder you chose, and every upload to the request is saved there. For the full steps, see [File requests in Tarkle: how to collect files from clients](https://tarkle.com/help/file-requests/file-requests-in-tarkle-how-to-collect-files-from-clients-2). To get the link, open the three-dot menu at the end of the request row and click **Copy URL**. To send the request from Tarkle, choose "Send by email", add the email addresses and click "Send email". You do not need to be online when someone uploads. Tarkle saves the files to the request's folder when the upload finishes. ## Who can upload A request you create on the Requests page is public. Anyone who has the link can open it and upload files, with no sign-in. Share the link only with the people you want files from. A visitor sees the title and description you wrote, and a box that says Drag and drop here or click to upload. After the visitor chooses files, a **Files ready to upload** window appears. It asks for a first name, an optional last name and an email address. The visitor then clicks **Upload**. To stop a request from accepting files, click **Close request** in its row menu. Click **Open request** to turn it back on. ## Email notifications The **Send email notifications when files are uploaded** box is ticked by default in the **Create new request** window. While it is ticked, each submission sends one email to the account email of the workspace owner. The email has a **See files** button that opens the request's folder. Clear the box to stop these emails for that request. The visitor who uploaded also gets an email that says the workspace received their files. This confirmation is sent whatever the box says. ## Limits A deadline can be from one day to three years ahead. Leave **Deadline** empty for a request with no end date. **Upload limit** in the row menu sets the most a visitor can upload at once on that request. Choose MB or GB and enter an amount, or leave the field empty for no limit. If the files a visitor drops together add up to more than the limit, they see "These files are over the upload limit of" followed by the limit, and nothing is added. The plan of your organization sets how many requests can be active at once. Free allows one active request. Pro and Agency allow unlimited active requests. For what each plan includes, see [plans and pricing](/pricing). A request counts as active while it has no deadline or its deadline has not passed. Closing a request does not change that count. When the limit is reached, **New request** is greyed out and shows "You have reached the maximum number of requests." ## Manage a request from its row menu Open the three-dot menu at the end of a request row to use these items: - **Copy URL** copies the link of the request. - **Copy vanity URL** copies the link under your workspace URL. - **Embed request** copies embed code for a public request, when your plan allows embeds. See [Embed a file request on your website](https://tarkle.com/help/file-requests/embed-a-file-request-form-on-your-website-with-tarkle). - **Send by email** opens a window where you add email addresses and send the request. - **Upload limit** sets the upload limit described above. - **Close request** or **Open request** stops or restarts the request. - **Edit** opens the **Edit request** window. - **Delete** removes the request. To delete several requests, select their rows and click **Delete selected**. ## Related articles - [What are transfers in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle) - [What are Files and file transfers in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/cloud-storage-vs-file-transfer-how-both-work-in-tarkle) - [How to limit a file request or transfer to one client organization](https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/how-to-limit-a-transfer-to-one-client-organization) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/file-requests/what-are-file-requests-in-tarkle-2 --- # Help: Client portal Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/client-portal ### The client portal: how it works Set up the client portal: a branded sign-in where a contact sees what you shared, downloads and uploads back. The client portal is a branded sign-in page for your contacts. A contact signs in on your workspace's own address, finds the files and requests you shared with them, downloads them, and uploads files into a folder of their own. This article covers what must be on for the portal to work, how to give a contact access, how they sign in, what they see, and what to do when a sign-in fails. ## What has to be on The portal works only when all three of these are true. Tarkle checks them each time someone opens it. 1. Your organization is on Pro or Agency. The client portal is not included on Free. Compare the plans on [pricing](/pricing), or read [which plan includes the client portal](https://tarkle.com/help/client-portal/which-plan-includes-the-client-portal). 2. The Enable client portal switch is on. You find it in **Settings**, on the General tab. It is on by default. Turning it off closes the portal for everyone: a contact who opens it sees "Client portal is not available for this workspace." Each contact's own portal access stays as it was. 3. The contact has portal access turned on, as described in the next section. ## Give a contact access 1. Open [Contacts](/dashboard/contacts) and click the contact's name. 2. Open the actions menu on the contact's page and click **Enable portal access**. The first time you turn access on, Tarkle emails the contact an invite. The invite is sent once: turning access on again later does not send it. To send it again, use **Resend invite**. For a walk through the whole set up, read [how to invite your first client to the client portal](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/how-to-invite-first-client-client-portal). On Free, the action opens the upgrade dialog instead. | Action | What it does | | --- | --- | | **Enable portal access** | Turns the contact's access on. The invite is sent the first time only. | | **Disable portal access** | Turns access off at once. The contact's next request is refused, and the contact record stays. | | **Resend invite** | Sends the sign-in email again. It appears only while portal access is on. It does not change access. | | **Storage limit** | The upload limit for the contact. The default is 5 GB. | ## The sign-in email The invite email shows your workspace's name and logo. Its button, **Sign in to the portal**, opens your workspace's sign-in page, on your verified custom domain or on the workspace address on tarkle.com. The email does not hold a code. Tarkle sends one separately, when the contact asks for it on that page. ## How a contact signs in 1. Open the sign-in page, from the invite email or from the workspace address. 2. Enter the email address and click **Continue with email**. 3. Tarkle emails a 6-digit code. The page then reads "Enter the code sent to" and asks for the code. Each code is valid for 10 minutes. 4. The portal opens. If the contact has set up a second step, they complete it first, as described below. The sign-in page shows the code screen for every email address, so it never reveals whether an address belongs to a contact. A new code replaces the one before it. On the code screen, **Resend code** sends a new code, and **Change email** goes back to the email field. Each wrong code shows "That code did not work. Check it and try again." After five wrong codes from one network address, that address has to wait a few minutes. After 30 wrong codes in total, the code stops working, and the contact clicks **Resend code** to get a new one. Asking for codes is limited to 5 requests per email address and 20 per network address in 10 minutes. If nothing arrives, the address is not a contact with portal access, portal access is off, the Enable client portal switch is off, or the organization is on Free. In each case the page still shows the code screen, but no email is sent. Ask the contact to check their spam folder too. ## Second step (authenticator app or passkey) On **Personal profile**, the **Multi-factor authentication** card lets the contact turn on an authenticator app or a passkey. When one of them is on, the portal asks for it after the emailed code and before it shows anything. The page reads "Confirm it is you to open" your workspace, then asks for the code from the authenticator app, or offers **Use a passkey**. Passkeys work only on tarkle.com. On a custom domain, a contact whose only second step is a passkey is told to sign in on tarkle.com or to add an authenticator app. ## Staying signed in Turning portal access off ends the contact's access at the next request, even when their browser still holds a session. ## What the contact sees The sidebar has **Home**, **Files**, **Shared** and **Requests**, and they are always there. **Brands** appears when brand pages are assigned to the contact or their organization may create them. **Feedback** appears when [feedback boards](https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-in-the-client-portal) are shared with them. The **Search** button finds their transfers, requests, files and folders. The name at the bottom of the sidebar opens a menu with **Personal profile** and **Log out**. A contact who belongs to an organization also sees **Settings** and **Members** in that menu. | Page | What is there | | --- | --- | | Home | The upload menu and a **Folder** button, and a **Files** card with a 30-day chart of the files they received. | | Files | The files and folders shared with them, and the contents of their own upload folder. | | Shared | The transfers sent to them or to their organization. | | Requests | The open file requests addressed to them. | | Personal profile | **Multi-factor authentication**. | Transfers that expired or were burned, requests that are completed or expired, and deleted items are not shown. ## Downloading The only action on a file in the portal is **Download**. The portal has no action to rename, move, delete or share files. A file that was shared only through a view-only transfer appears without that menu, so it cannot be downloaded. ## Uploading The upload menu and the **Folder** button on Home place files and folders in the contact's own folder. Tarkle names the folder after the contact, for example "Jane Smith (uploads)", and creates it the first time they open the portal. - Each contact has a 5 GB upload limit by default. Only what they uploaded themselves counts toward it, never the files you sent them. - The room they have is the smaller of their remaining limit and what is left of your workspace storage. - Their uploads are kept in your library, in that folder, and count toward your workspace storage. - When they have no room left, they see a message that they can't upload more right now, and that they should ask you to make more room. ## When the portal cannot be shown | Message | Cause | | --- | --- | | "Client portal is not available for this workspace." | Your organization is on Free, or the Enable client portal switch is off. | | "You don't have access to view this page." | The signed-in account is not a contact with portal access in this workspace. This includes the workspace owner's own account. | | A notice that the workspace was deleted | The workspace is deleted. | | A notice that the organization is suspended | The contact's organization is suspended. | ## Troubleshooting | Symptom | Likely cause and fix | | --- | --- | | The contact says no email arrived | Check that portal access is on, that the Enable client portal switch is on, and that the organization is on Pro or Agency. Ask them to check their spam folder, then use **Resend invite**. | | "That code did not work. Check it and try again." | The code is wrong or has expired. Click **Resend code** for a new one. | | "Too many attempts. Please try again in a few minutes." | Too many codes were asked for. Wait a few minutes, then try again. | | "Too many wrong codes. Try again in a few minutes." or "Too many wrong codes. Ask for a new one." | Wait a few minutes. If the message asks for a new code, have the contact click **Resend code**. | | The contact can't upload | They see the message above when they have no room left. Uploads are also capped by your workspace storage. | | A file has no Download | It was shared only through a view-only transfer. | | Stuck at the second step on a custom domain | Passkeys work only on tarkle.com. Have the contact use the authenticator app, or sign in on the workspace address on tarkle.com. | ## Related articles - [Which plan includes the client portal?](https://tarkle.com/help/client-portal/which-plan-includes-the-client-portal) - [How to invite your first client to the client portal](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/how-to-invite-first-client-client-portal) - [How do contacts see boards in the client portal?](https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-in-the-client-portal) - [How do I share a brand page with a client?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/share-a-brand-with-a-client) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/client-portal/the-client-portal-how-it-works ### Which plan includes the client portal? The client portal is included on Pro and Agency; here is how to check your plan. The client portal in Tarkle is part of the Pro plan. The [pricing page](https://tarkle.com/pricing) lists it under Pro as "Fully branded client portal: give your recipients a branded place to receive and manage the files you share with them". The Agency plan includes everything in Pro, so it has the client portal too, and the Free plan does not. Plans belong to your organization, not to a single workspace. ## Check your plan and invite a client 1. **Open Billing.** Go to your organization's settings and open the **Billing** tab. 2. **Read your plan.** Pro or Agency means the client portal is available. 3. **Ask the owner to upgrade if you are on Free.** Only the organization owner can change the plan, and an admin can open **Billing** but only read it. 4. **Choose a plan.** The owner compares plans and prices on the [pricing page](https://tarkle.com/pricing) and pays at checkout. 5. **Invite your first client.** Follow the steps in [How to invite your first client to the client portal](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/how-to-invite-first-client-client-portal). ## What happens on Free On the Free plan, turning on portal access for a client is refused with the message "The client portal is available on Pro plans." ## What happens next Once your organization is on Pro or Agency, you can give a client portal access. The client receives a sign-in email and then signs in to see what you shared with them. ## Related articles - [How to invite your first client to the client portal](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/how-to-invite-first-client-client-portal) - [How do I upgrade to the Agency plan?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/upgrade-to-agency) - [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/client-portal/which-plan-includes-the-client-portal --- # Help: Access control Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/access-control ### Email gated file transfers: how the gate works The email gate asks visitors for an email address before the files open, and saves it as a contact. The email gate asks visitors for an email address before the files in a transfer open, and saves it as a contact. This article covers how to set it on a transfer, what the visitor enters, where each submission is saved, and how long a visitor stays unlocked. ## Set the email gate on a transfer Set the transfer to require an email before download when you create it. This setting belongs to the transfer, not to the workspace. A transfer has one download setting, so the email gate cannot be combined with a direct download link. For a link that starts the download with no page in between, see [Direct download links in Tarkle](/help/file-sharing/direct-download-links-in-tarkle). The same gate applies to audio transfers. To create a transfer, follow [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer). ## What the visitor sees Until the form is submitted, the transfer page does not send the file links to the visitor. The form has a **Your name (optional)** field and a required **Your email address** field. The browser checks only that the email contains an @ sign. The visitor clicks **Access files** to open the files. Workspace owners and team members who open the link are not asked for an email. ## Where submissions are saved Tarkle saves each submission when the form is submitted, before any download starts. A visitor who submits and then leaves is still saved. The address is stored as a contact in the workspace with the status lead, and the name is stored only when the address is new to the workspace. A contact does not record which transfer it came from. Find the saved contacts on [Contacts](/dashboard/contacts) in the workspace you shared from. ## Return visits After a visitor submits the form, their browser keeps access to that transfer for 24 hours, and the form does not appear again during that time. After 24 hours, the visitor sees the form again. Each transfer keeps its own access, so passing the form on one transfer does not open another. ## Notifications Each submission is passed to the email marketing provider connected to the workspace, if there is one, as [Email marketing sync](/features/email-marketing-sync) describes. When Slack is connected and the **Email captured** notification is on in [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations), Tarkle posts a Slack message for each submission. The form sends no email to the workspace. ## Paid transfers A paid transfer cannot use the email gate. Tarkle collects the buyer's email at checkout, and it refuses to save the email gate on a paid transfer. Paid transfers, which charge for access through your own Stripe account, are described on [Paid transfers](/features/paid-transfers). ## Related articles - [How to see if a recipient opened your transfer](/help/tracking/how-to-see-if-a-recipient-opened-your-transfer) - [Why can't I turn on paid transfers?](/help/troubleshooting/why-cant-i-turn-on-paid-transfers) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/email-gated-file-transfers-collect-leads-before-sharing-file ### File transfer expiration dates in Tarkle Set an expiration date on a file transfer so its link stops opening the files after that day. An expiration date ends access to a file transfer on a day you choose. This page shows where to set it, which transfers can have one, and what a visitor sees after the date has passed. ## Set an expiration date on a file transfer The expiration date is set while you create the transfer. Start a new transfer from Transfers in the workspace you want to share from. For the full steps of a transfer, see [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer). 1. Choose the files you want to send. 2. On the second step, enter the title and a summary. 3. On the third step, the access options, tick the expiration checkbox. 4. Click the field that reads Select expiration date, and pick a day in the calendar. The calendar only allows days from one day after today, up to three years from today. Days outside that range cannot be picked. To remove a date you picked, click Clear in the field, or untick the expiration checkbox. ## Which transfers can have an expiration date The expiration option appears on file transfers. The audio and video options in the same window do not show it. Paid transfers cannot expire. The expiration option is hidden for a transfer you charge for, and Tarkle refuses a paid transfer that carries an expiration date. To charge for access, see [How to charge for access to a transfer](/help/selling-files/charge-for-access-create-paid-transfers). ## What visitors see after the date When the date has passed, the transfer link no longer opens the transfer. Tarkle compares the date with the current time each time someone opens the link. To stop access before the date, see [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer), which also covers pausing a link. ## Related articles - [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) - [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer) - [How to charge for access to a transfer](/help/selling-files/charge-for-access-create-paid-transfers) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/file-transfer-expiration-dates-in-tarkle ### How recipients open a password protected transfer Recipients enter the transfer password on a Protected Transfer page, and the browser remembers it for 30 days. A password protected transfer opens on a page that asks for the password. Until the right password is entered, the files are not shown. This article explains what recipients do on that page, what each message means, and how long their browser remembers the password. ## Add a password when you create a transfer When you create a transfer, tick Password protected on the step where you choose how people can access it, then type the password in the box that says "Set a password". The steps for setting an expiry date and pausing a link are in [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer). Send the password through a different channel from the link. ## What recipients see 1. Open the transfer link. The page is titled **Protected Transfer** and says: "Please enter the password to access this transfer." 2. Type the password in the **Password** field. The icon on the right of the field shows or hides what you type. 3. Click **Access files**. The files appear on the page. If the field is empty, the page asks for the password first. A wrong password shows **Incorrect password**. After 20 password checks within one hour from the same internet address, the page shows **Too many attempts. Try again later.** and the recipient has to wait before trying again. After the right password, the browser keeps access to that transfer for 30 days, so the recipient does not need to type the password again on that browser. ## Who opens it without the password Workspace owners and team members open a password protected transfer without entering the password. Everyone else needs it, including client contacts. ## Paid transfers cannot have a password The Password protected option is hidden when a transfer is paid, and Tarkle refuses a paid transfer that has a password. Payment is the access gate for a paid transfer. To charge for access instead, read [How to charge for access to a transfer](/help/selling-files/charge-for-access-create-paid-transfers). ## What happens next After the right password, the files appear on the page and stay available to that browser for 30 days. ## Related articles - [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) - [Password protection](/features/password-protection) - [View only file sharing: share files without allowing downloads](/help/access-control/view-only-file-sharing-share-files-without-allowing-download) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/password-protected-file-sharing-with-tarkle ### How to limit a file request or transfer to one client organization Limit a file request or a transfer to one client organization, and see who can open it. When several clients use one workspace, you can limit a file request or a transfer so that only one client organization can open it. A client organization is a group of contacts that belong to the same company. Client organizations are available on Pro and Agency, and Agency includes everything in Pro. See [pricing](https://tarkle.com/pricing) for the plans. ## Before you start The client organization and its people must exist before you can choose it. 1. Open [Contacts](/dashboard/contacts), open the **Organizations** tab and create the organization. Enter the organization name, the owner's name and the owner's email. 2. For each person who should open the request, open the actions menu on their contact page and choose **Enable portal access**. When you turn portal access on for the first time, Tarkle emails the contact an invite to your [client portal](https://tarkle.com/help/client-portal/the-client-portal-how-it-works). The client portal is included on Pro and Agency, as explained in [Which plan includes the client portal?](https://tarkle.com/help/client-portal/which-plan-includes-the-client-portal) ## Limit a file request to one client organization A new file request is created as a public link, so you limit it after it exists. To create one, see [File requests in Tarkle: how to collect files from clients](https://tarkle.com/help/file-requests/file-requests-in-tarkle-how-to-collect-files-from-clients). Then open [Requests](/dashboard/requests) and open the file request you want to limit, so you can edit it. 1. Under **Access settings**, click **Specific organization**. The other card, **Public link**, lets anyone with the link open the request. 2. In **Organization**, choose the client organization. The field takes one organization. 3. Save your changes. Tarkle shows **Request updated** and returns you to your Requests list. If you choose **Specific organization** and save without an organization, Tarkle shows "Please select an organization." ## Limit a transfer to one client organization A transfer is limited in the transfer dialog. Its title shows the name of the file or folder you are sending. 1. Open the transfer dialog for the file or folder. 2. Under **Access settings**, open the menu and choose **Private**. 3. In **Organization**, choose the client organization. 4. Finish the dialog to create the transfer. Tarkle shows **Transfer created** and the **Transfer link**, and it confirms that the download email has been sent to the organization you chose. To add a password to a transfer instead, see [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer). ## Share a file or folder from your library with one client organization The **Share** dialog of a file or folder in your library can also limit it to organizations. 1. Open the **Share** dialog for the file or folder. 2. Under **General access**, choose **Private**. 3. Open **Select organizations** and tick one or more organizations. 4. Click **Done**. The organizations you chose are listed under **Organizations with access**. ## Who can open it A limited file request opens for the members of the chosen organization, but only once they are signed in. Your workspace owner and your team members can open it too. Anyone else sees "You don't have access to view this page." Below it, Tarkle shows "Contact the workspace owner for more details." A client must be signed in to open the request, so ask them to use the portal invite that Tarkle emails when you turn portal access on. ## What happens next After you save a file request, Tarkle returns you to your Requests list. After you create a transfer, copy the **Transfer link** from the dialog and send it to your client. ## Related articles - [How to invite your first client to the client portal](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/how-to-invite-first-client-client-portal) - [Share with one client or company](https://tarkle.com/features/per-client-access-control) - [Client organizations](https://tarkle.com/features/client-organizations) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/how-to-limit-a-transfer-to-one-client-organization ### View only file sharing: share files without allowing downloads View only lets recipients preview a transfer's files in the browser, without a download button. View only lets a recipient look at the files in a transfer in the browser, without a download. Use it when someone needs to see, watch or listen to a file but should not take a copy. The setting belongs to a file transfer, so it applies to the people who open that transfer link. ## How it works Set the transfer to view only when you create it on [Transfers](/dashboard/transfers). When the recipient opens the transfer link, the files open in a preview in the browser, and the Download button at the top of the transfer page is not shown. The Copy Link button stays on the page. A direct download link does not work for a view-only transfer. Opening one returns an error instead of starting a download, and downloading a video from a view-only transfer is refused too. Direct download links are described in [Direct download links in Tarkle](/help/file-sharing/direct-download-links-in-tarkle). View only is set on each transfer. To download files from your library, select them in [Files](/dashboard/files) and click Download, as described in [How to download several files at once](/help/storage/download-several-files-at-once). ## Supported file types Tarkle previews these formats in the browser: - **Images:** JPG, JPEG, PNG, GIF, WebP, SVG, BMP, AVIF, ICO and TIFF - **Video:** MP4, M4V, MOV, WebM, OGV, MKV, 3GP and 3G2 - **Audio:** MP3, WAV, OGG, OGA, OPUS, FLAC, AAC and M4A - **Documents:** PDF, DOCX, DOC, XLSX, Markdown, and text files such as TXT, CSV and JSON - **Archives:** ZIP files A video that uses a format or codec the recipient's browser cannot play will not play. ## Common uses - **Design previews:** Share a mockup or visual concept with a client for feedback, without giving them the image file. - **Audio and video review:** Send a music track, podcast episode or video cut for approval. - **Document review:** Share a contract, proposal or report that the recipient reads in the browser. ## Restrictions A paid transfer cannot be view only. Tarkle refuses to create a paid transfer with View only turned on, because a paid transfer gives the buyer download access. Paid transfers are described on [Paid transfers](/features/paid-transfers). A view-only transfer cannot be used as a direct download link, because a direct link only starts a download. To limit who can open a transfer at all, read [How to limit a transfer to one client organization](/help/access-control/how-to-limit-a-transfer-to-one-client-organization). ## Related articles - [View-only transfers](/features/view-only-transfer) - [Preview files in the browser](/features/file-previews) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/view-only-file-sharing-share-files-without-allowing-download ### What is burn after read? Burn after read lets a transfer link be used once: the first download uses it up and later attempts are refused. Burn after read is a setting on a file transfer. The first download uses up the transfer link, and later download attempts are refused. This page explains when the link is used up, what the recipient and you see, and which transfers cannot use the setting. ## Turn on burn after read You set burn after read when you create a file transfer. Open [Transfers](/dashboard/transfers) in the workspace you share from, and follow [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) for the steps. Audio transfers do not use this setting. ## When the link is used up A download uses up the link. Opening the transfer page or previewing a file does not. On a transfer page, the link is used up when Tarkle records the download. On a direct download link, the link is marked as used before the file is sent. If a transfer holds several files, a direct download link sends them as one zip. A file that cannot be read is left out of the zip, and the link is still used up. Using up the link does not delete anything. The transfer, its files and its record stay in your workspace, and only the link stops working. ## What the recipient sees After the link is used up, a later download attempt is refused. On a direct download link the refusal reads Transfer already downloaded. On a transfer page it reads Transfer no longer available. ## What you see Each download is written to the transfer's activity, with the recipient's email when they gave one. You can find it in the Activity section of the transfer, as described in [How to see if a recipient opened your transfer](/help/tracking/how-to-see-if-a-recipient-opened-your-transfer). The same downloads are listed across the workspace in the [Activity log](/dashboard/activity). If the workspace's Slack connection is set to post download alerts, the download also appears in Slack, as set up in the [Slack integration](/help/integrations/slack-integration). ## Transfers that cannot use burn after read Paid transfers cannot use burn after read. Tarkle refuses a paid transfer that has the setting on, with the message "Paid transfers cannot burn after read. Users paid for permanent access." To charge for access instead, see [Paid transfers](/features/paid-transfers). To end access on a date rather than after a download, read [File transfer expiration dates in Tarkle](/help/access-control/file-transfer-expiration-dates-in-tarkle). ## Related articles - [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) - [File transfer expiration dates in Tarkle](/help/access-control/file-transfer-expiration-dates-in-tarkle) - [View only file sharing: share files without allowing downloads](/help/access-control/view-only-file-sharing-share-files-without-allowing-download) - [How to see if a recipient opened your transfer](/help/tracking/how-to-see-if-a-recipient-opened-your-transfer) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/burn-after-read-file-transfers-with-tarkle --- # Help: Branding Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/branding ### Brand page plans and limits Free allows one brand page for the whole organization, and Pro and Agency allow unlimited brand pages. Each plan sets how many brand pages an organization can have. To learn what a brand page holds, read [What is a brand page in Tarkle?](/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page). ## How many brand pages each plan allows | Plan | Brand pages | Custom domain on a brand page | Kit link | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Free | 1, shared by all workspaces of the organization | Not for new brand pages | Not available | | Pro | Unlimited | Each brand page can have its own domain | Available | | Agency | Unlimited | Each brand page can have its own domain | Available | Your organization owns the plan, so a workspace has no plan of its own. On Free, the one brand page counts across every workspace in your organization. Drafts count toward the limit too. Plan prices and what each plan includes are on the [pricing page](/pricing). On Pro and Agency, each brand page can have its own domain, set up as described in [How do I use my own domain for a brand page?](/help/branding/use-your-own-domain). On Free, new brand pages cannot have a custom domain. ## When you reach the limit On the [Brands](/dashboard/brands) page, the **Create brand** button is hidden once your workspace holds as many brand pages as its plan allows. If a request still reaches Tarkle, you see "You have reached your brand page limit for this plan." Existing brand pages and their domains stay, and only new ones are blocked. This holds when your plan changes too, so nothing you already have is removed. To add another brand page, delete one you no longer need. ## Brand pages in the client portal A client can create a brand page in the client portal only when your workspace allows it, and the client is an owner or admin of their organization. A client who is a member of the organization can edit the brand pages assigned to them, but cannot create one. The brand page is saved to your workspace, so it counts toward the same limit as the brand pages you create. To give a client access, follow [How do I share a brand page with a client?](/help/branding/share-a-brand-with-a-client). ## The Powered by Tarkle line On Free, the Powered by Tarkle line always shows on your public pages, brand pages included. On Pro and Agency, a workspace can switch the line off. On Agency, the line can be replaced with your agency name once White label is turned on for the organization, as described in [How do I set up white label on the Agency plan?](/help/agency-plan/set-up-white-label). How to switch the line off is in [How to disable "Powered by Tarkle" on your workspace](/help/branding/how-to-disable-powered-by-tarkle-on-your-workspace). ## Text limits on a brand page | Field | Limit | | --- | --- | | Name | 48 characters | | Page address | 48 characters, using lowercase letters, numbers and hyphens | | Summary | 200 characters | | Story | 2000 characters | | Meta title | 100 characters | | Meta description | 160 characters | Tarkle does not save a value that is longer than its limit. ## Image and file limits The favicon can be up to 2 MB, in PNG, JPEG, WebP, SVG or ICO. Logos, banners, social images and custom font files can be up to 10 MB each. Files in asset collections can be up to 100 MB each. ## Other limits on a brand page A brand page holds up to 30 additional colors and 20 additional logos. It can have up to 30 asset collections, each holding up to 200 files. It also holds up to 24 team members, 24 press items and 20 guideline sections. ## Next step To add your first brand page, follow [How to create a brand page](/help/branding/create-a-brand-page). ## Related articles - [How to add logos, colors and fonts to a brand page](/help/branding/logos-colors-and-fonts) - [How to set up a custom domain](/help/branding/how-to-set-up-a-custom-domain) - [How do I share a brand page with a client?](/help/branding/share-a-brand-with-a-client) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/brand-page-plans-and-limits-2 ### Brand page plans and limits Free allows one brand page for the whole organization, and Pro and Agency allow unlimited brand pages. Each plan sets how many brand pages an organization can have. To learn what a brand page holds, read [What is a brand page in Tarkle?](/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page). ## How many brand pages each plan allows | Plan | Brand pages | Custom domain on a brand page | Kit link | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Free | 1, shared by all workspaces of the organization | Not for new brand pages | Not available | | Pro | Unlimited | Each brand page can have its own domain | Available | | Agency | Unlimited | Each brand page can have its own domain | Available | Your organization owns the plan, so a workspace has no plan of its own. On Free, the one brand page counts across every workspace in your organization. Drafts count toward the limit too. Plan prices and what each plan includes are on the [pricing page](/pricing). On Pro and Agency, each brand page can have its own domain, set up as described in [How do I use my own domain for a brand page?](/help/branding/use-your-own-domain). On Free, new brand pages cannot have a custom domain. The kit link is a link that downloads a brand's full kit without a request. [How do I share the full brand kit with a link?](/help/branding/share-the-full-brand-kit-with-a-link) explains it. ## When you reach the limit On the [Brands](/dashboard/brands) page, the **Create brand** button is hidden once your workspace holds as many brand pages as its plan allows. If a request still reaches Tarkle, you see "You have reached your brand page limit for this plan." Existing brand pages and their domains stay, and only new ones are blocked. This holds when your plan changes too, so nothing you already have is removed. To add another brand page, delete one you no longer need. ## Brand pages in the client portal A client can create a brand page in the client portal only when your workspace allows it, and the client is an owner or admin of their organization. The brand page is saved to your workspace, so it counts toward the same limit as the brand pages you create. ## The Powered by Tarkle line On Free, the Powered by Tarkle line always shows on your public pages, brand pages included. On Pro and Agency, a workspace can switch the line off, and on Agency it can be replaced with your agency name. How to switch it off is in [How to disable "Powered by Tarkle" on your workspace](/help/branding/how-to-disable-powered-by-tarkle-on-your-workspace). ## Other limits on a brand page A brand page holds up to 30 additional colors and 20 additional logos. It can have up to 30 asset collections, each holding up to 200 files, and each file up to 100 MB. A custom font file can be up to 10 MB. A brand page also holds up to 24 team members, 24 press items and 20 guideline sections. ## Next step To add your first brand page, follow [How to create a brand page](/help/branding/create-a-brand-page). ## Related articles - [How to add logos, colors and fonts to a brand page](/help/branding/logos-colors-and-fonts) - [How to set up a custom domain](/help/branding/how-to-set-up-a-custom-domain) - [How do I share a brand page with a client?](/help/branding/share-a-brand-with-a-client) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/brand-page-plans-and-limits ### Custom branding in Tarkle: logo, favicon, accent color and backlink Set your logo, favicon and accent color, and turn the Powered by Tarkle backlink on or off, in Settings. Tarkle lets you set your logo, favicon and accent color for the public pages your clients open, and turn off the Powered by Tarkle backlink on Pro and Agency. All of these controls are on the General tab in Settings. This article shows where each one is, which plans include it and what it does. ## Find the branding controls Open **Settings** and stay on the **General** tab. The **Workspace settings** card holds the **Logo**, **Favicon** and **Accent color** controls. The **Backlink** card on the same tab holds the **Powered by Tarkle** switch. Branding is set for each workspace, so make the change in the workspace you want to brand. For the other fields on this tab, see [How to update your Tarkle workspace settings](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-update-your-tarkle-workspace-settings). ## Logo Click the logo square in the **Workspace settings** card. It reads Logo until you add one. Choose a PNG or JPEG image. The logo appears on every transfer page, request page and portal. It can be set on every plan, Free included. ## Favicon The favicon is the icon shown in browser tabs and bookmarks. Click **Favicon** and choose a PNG or JPEG image. A favicon needs a Pro plan. On Free, the Favicon button shows a Pro badge and opens the upgrade prompt instead. Agency includes everything in Pro, so the favicon is available on Agency too. ## Accent color Click **Accent color**, then pick a color with the picker or type a hex value. The accent color is used for buttons on your public pages. It can be set on every plan. ## Save the branding Click the save button at the bottom of the **Workspace settings** card. It saves the logo, favicon and accent color together. Only members with permission to edit settings can save them. ## Powered by Tarkle backlink The **Powered by Tarkle** switch on the **Backlink** card controls a small Powered by Tarkle line on your public pages, and that line links to tarkle.com. Flipping the switch saves at once. On Free, the switch cannot be changed. Pro and Agency can turn it off. To compare the plans, see [pricing](/pricing). To turn the line off step by step, see [How to disable "Powered by Tarkle" on your workspace](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/how-to-disable-powered-by-tarkle-on-your-workspace). When the switch is off, the line is hidden on pages your clients open from your own custom domain. To set one up, see [How to set up a custom domain](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/how-to-set-up-a-custom-domain) and use the [Domains](/dashboard/settings/domains) tab. The line always shows on Tarkle addresses, which are tarkle.com and its subdomains, and on tarkle.page links. On Agency, your agency name replaces the line instead. To set this up, see [How do I set up white label on the Agency plan?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/set-up-white-label). The **Backlink** card also has a **Referral link** switch. It uses your own referral link instead of the default Tarkle link. Only the workspace owner can turn it on. ## Related articles - [How to disable "Powered by Tarkle" on your workspace](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/how-to-disable-powered-by-tarkle-on-your-workspace) - [How to set up a custom domain](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/how-to-set-up-a-custom-domain) - [How do I set up white label on the Agency plan?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/set-up-white-label) - [How to update your Tarkle workspace settings](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-update-your-tarkle-workspace-settings) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/understand-the-tarkle-white-label-custom-branding-features ### How do download approval and access requests work? Require approval to download in a brand's Settings tab, then give access or reject each request in its Requests tab. Download approval lets you decide who can download from a brand page. When it is on, visitors send an access request, and you give access or reject it from the brand's **Requests** tab. This article covers how to turn it on, what the visitor sees, and how to handle each request. ## Turn on download approval Open the brand from [Brands](/dashboard/brands), then open the **More actions** menu and choose **Edit**. In the brand editor, open the **Settings** tab and turn on **Require approval to download** in the **Downloads** card. Approval covers the whole brand page, not single files, so every download from that page waits for your decision. Members of your workspace team can always download. ## What the visitor sees With approval on, visitors see **Request access** instead of **Download**. The **Request access** dialog asks for their name and email. Company is optional. Once they send it, the dialog confirms that the brand will email them a link when it is approved. If the same email asks again for the same brand within 24 hours, the visitor sees the same confirmation, but no new request is added and you are not notified again. One internet connection can send up to 5 requests for one brand in an hour. ## Give access or reject a request To decide on a request: 1. Open the brand and its **Requests** tab. A dot next to the tab name means some requests are pending. 2. Click the menu at the end of the request's row. 3. Choose the action that fits the request: - **Give access** on a pending download request. Tarkle emails the visitor the link, and the screen shows "Access given. An email is on its way." - **Accept** on a pending view request. It marks the request approved and does not open the page (see the view section below). - **Reject** on a pending request. The visitor gets no email. - **Revoke access** on an approved request. It takes back the unlock. - **Delete** removes the request from the list. A rejected request can be approved later from the same menu, so a decision can be changed. ## What the visitor receives After you give access, the visitor gets an approval email. Its link opens the brand page and unlocks downloads in the browser where it is opened, for one year. The link does not expire on its own, and anyone who opens it gets the unlock in their own browser, so send it only to the person you approved. **Revoke access** ends the unlock in every browser that holds the link. If the email cannot be sent, the request stays approved and the screen says "Approved, but the email could not be sent". ## View requests A view request comes from a brand page that is not public, such as a password protected page. The access types are set out in [Who can open a brand page?](/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page). **Accept** marks the request approved, but it does not open the page for the visitor. To let them in, share the password, or assign the brand to them as described in [How do I share a brand page with a client?](/help/branding/share-a-brand-with-a-client). ## Email and Slack notifications The owner of the workspace is emailed once for each new request. If Slack is connected to the workspace and the Slack notification for brand page downloads is on (or the one for views, for view requests), a Slack message with the visitor's name, company and email goes to the channel you chose. Connect Slack on [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations). Slack needs the Pro or Agency plan. Compare the plans on the [pricing page](/pricing). Next, open a brand's **Requests** tab and review the pending requests. ## Related articles - [What is a brand page in Tarkle?](/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page) - [How do I see views, downloads and requests for my brand pages?](/help/branding/views-downloads-and-requests) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/download-approval-and-requests ### How do download approval and access requests work? Require approval to download in a brand's Settings tab, then give access or revoke each request in its Requests tab. Download approval lets you decide who can download from a brand page. When it is on, visitors send an access request, and you give access or reject it from the brand's **Requests** tab. This article covers how to turn it on, what the visitor receives, and how to handle each request. ## Turn on download approval Open the brand from [Brands](/dashboard/brands), then open the **More actions** menu and choose **Edit**. In the brand editor, open the **Settings** tab and turn on **Require approval to download** in the **Downloads** card. Approval covers the whole brand page, not single files, so every download from that page waits for your decision. Your team can always download, even with approval on. That means the workspace owner, an owner who reaches the workspace through a workspace link, and active team members. A suspended team member is not counted as the team, so they need an approved request like any other visitor. ## What the visitor sees Visitors see **Request access** instead of **Download**. The request asks for an email address, and a name when they ask to download. A company is optional. The owner of the workspace is emailed once for each new request. If the same email asks again for the same brand within 24 hours, no new request is added and the owner is not emailed again. One internet connection can send up to 5 requests for one brand in an hour. ## Give access or reject a request 1. Open the brand from [Brands](/dashboard/brands) and go to its **Requests** tab. A dot next to the tab name means some requests are pending. 2. Click the menu at the end of the request's row. 3. Choose the action that fits the request: - **Give access** on a pending or rejected request. Tarkle emails the visitor a link, and the screen shows "Access given. An email is on its way." - **Resend access** on an approved request. Tarkle emails a fresh link, and the old link stops working. - **Reject** on a pending request. The visitor gets no email. - **Revoke access** on an approved request. It ends the access at once, in every browser that holds the link. - **Delete** removes the request from the list. A rejected request can be given access later from the same menu. If the email cannot be sent, the request stays approved and the screen shows "Approved, but the email could not be sent". ## What the visitor receives for a download request After you give access, the visitor gets an email with a link. Opening it in their browser unlocks downloads from the brand page in that browser for one year. The link has no end date of its own, and anyone who opens it gets the unlock, so send it only to the person you approved. **Revoke access** ends the unlock in every browser that holds the link. ## View requests A view request comes from a brand page that is not public, such as a password protected page or a restricted one. The access types are described in [Who can open a brand page?](/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page). When you give access to a view request, the visitor's email link opens that page in their browser for 30 days, without the password or an assignment. Resending starts the 30 days again. **Reject** or **Revoke access** ends the link's access at once. The link does not open downloads that need approval. A view request approved before this link existed has no link. Click **Revoke access** on it, then **Give access** again. To let someone in without a request, you can also share the password or assign the brand to them, as described in [How do I share a brand page with a client?](/help/branding/share-a-brand-with-a-client) ## Email and Slack notifications If Slack is connected to the workspace, a Slack message about each request goes to the channel you chose. Download requests follow the Slack notification for brand page downloads, and view requests follow the one for brand page views. Connect Slack on [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations). ## Troubleshooting If a visitor sees **Too many downloads. Try again later.**, they have sent a large number of download requests for the same brand within an hour. The limit applies to that visitor and that brand only, so other visitors and other brands are not affected. Wait an hour, then try again. Next, open a brand's **Requests** tab and review the pending requests. ## Related articles - [What is a brand page in Tarkle?](/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page) - [How do I see views, downloads and requests for my brand pages?](/help/branding/views-downloads-and-requests) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/how-do-download-approval-and-access-requests-work ### How do I see views, downloads and requests for my brand pages? Read the Page views, Downloads and Access requests cards on the Brands page and on each brand. The **Brands** page and each brand page show three cards: **Page views**, **Downloads** and **Access requests**. Use them to see how often a brand page is opened, how many downloads it had and how many people asked for access. ## Where the cards are On the [Brands](/dashboard/brands) page, the three cards sit under an **Overview** heading, above your list of brand pages. Open a brand and the same three cards appear above its tabs, showing only that brand's numbers. Next to **Overview**, the period selector lets you choose **Last 30 days** (the default), **Last 90 days** or **All time**. It changes all three cards at once. The 30-day and 90-day cards chart by day, and **All time** charts by month. ## What each card counts - **Page views** counts each visitor once every 30 minutes, so reloading a brand page does not add another view. Crawlers and link-preview bots are not counted. A view is recorded when the brand page content opens, so the password and private-access screens do not count. [Who can open a brand page?](/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page) explains those access settings. - **Downloads** counts each download. A single file, a logo, a guideline image and the full kit each count as one download. A download made with the brand's [kit link](/help/branding/share-the-full-brand-kit-with-a-link) counts too. - **Access requests** counts every request to download or view the brand, whatever its status. Open the brand's **Requests** tab to see each request and act on it. [How do download approval and access requests work?](/help/branding/download-approval-and-requests) covers approving and rejecting them. ## Which files are downloaded When a brand has downloads in the period, two lists appear under the cards: **Most downloaded** shows the files people took most, and **Formats** shows the file types, such as PNG, SVG or zip. They follow the period you chose. Downloads made before Tarkle recorded the file are not listed, and a note under the lists says so. A visitor's name or email is never part of these lists. ## Slack Slack is available on [Pro and Agency](/pricing). Connect Slack to the workspace in [Settings → Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations). Then open **Slack**, choose a channel and click **Save**. Saving a channel turns on all nine Slack notifications, including **Brand page viewed** and **Brand page downloaded**. The dialog lists them but has no switch for each one. To stop the posts, disconnect Slack from the same dialog. A counted view posts to the channel, and so does each download. Access requests post too: a download request follows the **Brand page downloaded** notification, and a view request follows **Brand page viewed**. The message has **Approve** and **Reject** buttons when Tarkle can receive button clicks from Slack. Otherwise it has a **Review request** button. [Slack integration](/help/integrations/slack-integration) explains how to connect Slack to a workspace. ## Your own tracking Each brand can have its own Google Analytics 4 ID, Google Tag Manager ID and Google Search Console tag. Open the brand, choose **Edit** from the more actions menu (the three dots), then open the **Settings** tab. In the **Integrations** card, switch on the tag you want and paste its ID. Switching a tag off clears its value. Save the brand with the buttons at the top of the page. A brand's Google Analytics 4 ID or Google Tag Manager ID that is the same as the workspace's own ID of that type is not loaded again, so visits are not counted twice. Brand tags load only when the brand page content is shown, not on the password or private-access screen. ## Limits The totals count every event in the period. The chart draws from the latest 2,000 events of each card, so on a brand with more than 2,000 events in the period, the chart can differ from the total. **Next:** open a brand from the Brands page and check its three cards. ## Related articles - [What is a brand page in Tarkle?](/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page) - [Brand page plans and limits](/help/branding/brand-page-plans-and-limits) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/views-downloads-and-requests ### How do I share a brand page with a client? Assign a brand page to a client contact or organization, so it shows under Brands in their client portal. Assign a brand page to one client contact or one organization, and it shows under **Brands** in their client portal. The steps below cover the assignment, the email the client receives, and what the client can do with the brand. ## Assign a brand to a client 1. Open [Brands](/dashboard/brands) and open the brand you want to share. 2. Select **Settings** in the tabs at the top of the editor. 3. In the **Assign this brand** card, switch on **Assign this brand**. 4. Under **Contact or organization**, choose one contact or one organization. 5. Save the brand with the buttons at the top of the editor. Note: **Assign this brand** does not change who can open the page. Access is set separately, under **Access** on the same tab. ## Who gets an email When a brand is assigned to a contact, that contact receives an email saying they have been assigned to manage the brand, with a link to the client portal. When a brand is assigned to an organization, the email goes to the owner of that organization. ## What the client sees Clients find brands under **Brands** in the sidebar of their client portal. The list shows the brands assigned to the client or to their organization. ## What the client can do By default, a client can only view the brands assigned to them. To let organization contacts create and edit brands, open your workspace's **Settings**, find the **Client portal** card, and switch on **Allow organization contacts to create brands**. The client portal is a Pro feature. It is included on Pro and Agency. Your organization owns the plan, so a workspace has no plan of its own. [Which plan includes the client portal?](/help/client-portal/which-plan-includes-the-client-portal) shows how to check it. The switch can be turned on only while **Enable client portal** is on. It is greyed out while the portal is off or while the plan does not include the client portal. If a request still turns it on while the portal is off, the app answers "Turn on the client portal first." On a plan without the client portal, the app answers "The client portal is available on Pro plans." Turning the client portal off, or moving to a plan without it, is never blocked by this switch. With the switch on: - Organization owners and admins can create brands. For the brands assigned to them or their organization, they can also edit, publish, add domains and delete. - Members, and contacts who belong to no organization, can edit the brands assigned to them. They cannot create brands, add domains or delete them. With the switch off, a client only sees the brands assigned to them and cannot create or change any brand. ## Restricted brands In the **Access** list on the **Settings** tab, a brand offers **Public** and **Password protected**. **Restricted** appears only on a brand that already uses it. A restricted brand opens for the contact it is assigned to and for the members of the organization it is assigned to. To compare the access choices, read [who can open a brand page](/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page). ## Limits The client portal is included on Pro and Agency. A brand that a client creates counts toward the same brand page limit as the brand pages you create. On Free, your organization can have one brand page across all its workspaces, and Pro and Agency allow unlimited brand pages. Compare the plans on the [pricing page](/pricing), and read [brand page plans and limits](/help/branding/brand-page-plans-and-limits). ## What happens next To give a client access to the portal, follow [how to invite your first client to the client portal](/help/getting-started/how-to-invite-first-client-client-portal). Once they sign in, they open **Brands** to see the brands you assigned. ## Related articles - [How to create a brand page](/help/branding/create-a-brand-page) - [How do I use my own domain for a brand page?](/help/branding/use-your-own-domain) - [The client portal: how it works](/help/client-portal/the-client-portal-how-it-works) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/how-do-i-share-a-brand-page-with-a-client ### How do I share a brand page with a client? Assign a brand page to a client contact or organization, so it shows under Brands in their client portal. Assign a brand page to one client contact or one organization, and it shows under **Brands** in their client portal. The steps below cover the assignment, the email the client receives, and what the client can do with the brand. ## Assign a brand to a client 1. Open [Brands](/dashboard/brands) and open the brand you want to share. 2. Select **Settings** in the tabs at the top of the editor. 3. In the **Assign this brand** card, switch on **Assign this brand**. 4. Under **Contact or organization**, choose one contact or one organization. A brand goes to one of them, never both. 5. Save the brand. The button reads **Save changes** for a published brand, and **Publish** for a draft, with **Save draft** beside it. Note: **Assign this brand** does not change who can open the page. Access is set separately, under **Access** on the same tab. ## Who gets an email When a brand is newly assigned to a contact, that contact is emailed that they have been assigned to manage the brand, with a link to the portal. When it is assigned to an organization, the email goes to the owner of that organization. Saving the same assignment again sends no email. ## What the client sees The client finds the brands under **Brands** in the sidebar of their client portal. The item appears when brands are assigned to the client or their organization, or when the client can create brands. The list shows the brands assigned to the client or to their organization. ## What the client can do By default, a client can only view the brands assigned to them. To let organization contacts create and edit brands, open your workspace's **Settings**, find the **Client portal** card, and switch on **Allow organization contacts to create brands**. The switch cannot be changed while **Enable client portal** is off. With the switch on: - Organization owners and admins can create brands. For the brands assigned to them or their organization, they can also edit, publish, add domains and delete. - Members, and contacts who belong to no organization, can edit the brands assigned to them. They cannot create brands, add domains or delete them. With the switch off, a client only sees the brands assigned to them and cannot create or change any brand. ## Restricted brands In the **Access** list on the **Settings** tab, a brand offers **Public** and **Password protected**. **Restricted** appears only on a brand that already uses it. A restricted brand opens for the contact it is assigned to, for members of the organization it is assigned to, and for your workspace team. Everyone else sees a private page instead of the brand. A draft is hidden from everyone outside your team. To compare the access choices, read [who can open a brand page](/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page). ## Limits The client portal is included on Pro and Agency. A brand that a client creates counts toward the brand page limit of your workspace. On Free, a workspace can have 1 brand page, and Pro and Agency have no limit. Compare the plans on the [pricing page](/pricing), and see [brand page plans and limits](/help/branding/brand-page-plans-and-limits). ## What happens next To sign in to the portal, a client needs an invite. Follow [how to invite your first client to the client portal](/help/getting-started/how-to-invite-first-client-client-portal) if they do not have one yet. Once they sign in, they open **Brands** to see the brands you assigned. ## Related articles - [How to create a brand page](/help/branding/create-a-brand-page) - [How do I use my own domain for a brand page?](/help/branding/use-your-own-domain) - [The client portal: how it works](/help/client-portal/the-client-portal-how-it-works) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/share-a-brand-with-a-client ### How do I share the full brand kit with a link? Create a kit link on a published brand so anyone with the link can download the full kit without requesting access. A kit link is one link per brand that downloads the full brand kit as a zip. Anyone who has the link can download, without sending an access request, even when the brand asks for approval. Use it to send a kit to a printer, a freelancer or a partner. The kit link is available on [Pro and Agency](/pricing). On Free, the **Kit link** menu item opens the upgrade prompt. ## Create the link 1. Open [Brands](/dashboard/brands). 2. Open the **More actions** menu (the three dots) of a published brand, then click **Kit link**. A draft brand has no kit link. 3. Optional: under **Expires on**, pick a date between tomorrow and three years from now. Without a date the link does not expire. Click **Clear** to remove a date. 4. Click **Create link**. Tarkle copies the link and confirms with "URL copied to clipboard". Only members of your workspace team see the **Kit link** item. It is not in the client portal. ## Copy, change or replace the link - **Copy link:** open **Kit link** again and click **Copy link**. The link stays copyable while it is active. - **Change the date:** open **Kit link**, pick a new date or click **Clear**, then click **Save**. - **Disable link:** pauses the link. It stops working until you click **Enable link** in the same menu. The dialog shows a **Disabled** badge while it is paused. - **Regenerate link:** makes a new link and stops the old one at once. Use it when the link reached someone it should not have. - A link past its date shows an **Expired** badge. Pick a new date and click **Save** to use it again. ## What the visitor gets The link downloads the full kit as one zip file: the icon, main logo and banner, the logos, asset collections, fonts, team photos and guideline images in folders, the colors, the mark usage terms and a brand.md text file. It works whether the page is public, password protected or restricted, and it does not ask for the password or for approval. Each kit link download counts in the brand's **Downloads** card. Tarkle does not record who downloaded. [How do I see views, downloads and requests?](/help/branding/views-downloads-and-requests) explains the numbers. ## Good to know - Anyone who holds the link can download the kit, so share it only with people you trust. If it spreads further than you meant, click **Regenerate link**. - A brand has one kit link. Use **Regenerate link** to replace it. - The link stops working when you unpublish the brand, when it is disabled or expired, and when the workspace is no longer on Pro or Agency. It works again when the brand is published again, the link is enabled, or the plan is back. - A visitor who opens a link that no longer works sees "This link is not available". ## Related articles - [How do download approval and access requests work?](/help/branding/download-approval-and-requests) - [Who can open a brand page?](/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page) - [Brand page plans and limits](/help/branding/brand-page-plans-and-limits) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/share-the-full-brand-kit-with-a-link ### How do I use my own domain for a brand page? Add a domain to a brand page from the Domains page, then set the DNS records Tarkle shows you. A brand page can open on a domain of its own, such as brand.yourdomain.com. Each brand has one domain. Save the brand first with [How to create a brand page](/help/branding/create-a-brand-page), because you choose the brand when you add its domain. ## Plans Pro and Agency can connect a domain to each brand page, and Agency includes everything in Pro. Free includes a custom domain for the workspace, but it does not include brand page domains. On Free, **Brand page domain** is unavailable in the **Add a domain** dialog. See [Tarkle plans and pricing](/pricing) for what each plan includes. [Brand page plans and limits](/help/branding/brand-page-plans-and-limits) lists the brand page limit of each plan. ## Add a brand page domain Domains are set per workspace. Only a workspace owner, or a team member whose role can add, edit and delete settings, sees the **Add domain** button. 1. Open [Domains](/dashboard/settings/domains) in the workspace that holds the brand. 2. Click **Add domain**. 3. Click **Brand page domain**, then click **Continue**. 4. Type the domain, for example brand.yourdomain.com. Tarkle removes https:// from what you type, and it asks you to remove www before it continues. 5. Under **Brand**, click **Select a brand** and choose the brand. 6. Click **Create**. The dialog shows **Verifying** with your domain and, when Tarkle has records for it, a table of DNS records. 7. Add the records at your DNS provider, then click **Refresh / check**. When the domain is active, the dialog closes and Tarkle shows "Brand domain verified and connected." ## DNS records A subdomain such as brand.yourdomain.com gets one CNAME record. A bare domain such as yourdomain.com gets A records. A TXT record for ownership appears only while ownership is still pending, so add it when it is listed. Add the records exactly as the table shows them. ## Statuses and checks The dialog and each brand domain's details show one of three statuses: - **Pending**: the domain is not connected yet. Add the records, then check again. - **Action required**: the record that points the domain at Tarkle needs fixing. - **Active**: the domain is verified and connected. Each brand domain's details include a **Refresh** button. If Tarkle cannot reach its hosting provider when you refresh, it says it could not check this domain, that your settings are unchanged, and to try again in a few minutes. ## What the domain serves The brand page opens at the root of the domain: brand.yourdomain.com shows the page, and brand.yourdomain.com/mark-usage shows the mark usage terms. Only this brand's page opens on the domain. Search engines index a brand page only when it is public and not a draft. To control who can open the page, see [Who can open a brand page?](/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page). The domain's sitemap lists the home page and /mark-usage only while the brand is indexable. ## Change or remove a domain Open the row menu of the brand domain and click **Edit** to change the domain or the brand, then click **Save**. A brand has one domain, so saving a new domain for a brand that already has one replaces the saved domain. When you change to a new address, Tarkle removes the old address from its hosting after the new one is attached. To remove a domain, open the row menu and click **Delete**. Tarkle removes the domain from its hosting first, and deletes it from the brand only after that succeeds. If the removal fails, the domain stays in the table and Tarkle shows the error. Deleting a brand also detaches its domain from Tarkle's hosting. ## Refused domains Tarkle refuses a domain that another brand page already uses, with the message "This domain is already assigned to another brand page." It also refuses a domain that another part of Tarkle already uses, and a domain that includes www. ## What happens next When the status is **Active**, the brand page opens on your domain. To give a client access to it, see [How do I share a brand page with a client?](/help/branding/share-a-brand-with-a-client). ## Related articles - [What is a brand page in Tarkle?](/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page) - [How to add logos, colors and fonts to a brand page](/help/branding/logos-colors-and-fonts) - [How do I see views, downloads and requests for my brand pages?](/help/branding/views-downloads-and-requests) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/use-your-own-domain ### How do I use my own domain for a brand page? Add a domain to a brand page from the Domains page, then set the DNS records Tarkle shows you. A brand page can open on a domain of its own, such as brand.yourdomain.com. Each brand has one domain. Save the brand first with [How to create a brand page](/help/branding/create-a-brand-page), because you choose the brand when you add its domain. ## Plans Pro and Agency can connect a domain to each brand page, and Agency includes everything in Pro. Free includes a custom domain for the workspace, but it does not include brand page domains. See [Tarkle plans and pricing](/pricing) for what each plan includes. [Brand page plans and limits](/help/branding/brand-page-plans-and-limits) lists the brand page limit of each plan. ## Add a brand page domain Domains are set per workspace. Only a workspace owner, or a team member whose role can add, edit and delete settings, sees the **Add domain** button. 1. Open [Domains](/dashboard/settings/domains) in the workspace that holds the brand. 2. Click **Add domain**. 3. Click **Brand page domain**, then click **Continue**. 4. Type the domain, for example brand.yourdomain.com. Tarkle removes https:// from what you type, and it asks you to remove www before it continues. 5. Under **Brand**, click **Select a brand** and choose the brand. 6. Submit the form. The dialog shows **Verifying** with your domain and, when Tarkle has records for it, a table of DNS records. 7. Add the records at your DNS provider, then click **Refresh / check**. When the domain is active, the dialog closes and Tarkle shows "Brand domain verified and connected." ## DNS records A subdomain such as brand.yourdomain.com gets one CNAME record. A bare domain such as yourdomain.com gets A records. A TXT record for ownership appears only while ownership is still pending, so add it when it is listed. Add the records exactly as the table shows them. ## Statuses and checks The dialog and each brand domain's details show one of three statuses: - **Pending**: the domain is not connected yet. Add the records, then check again. - **Action required**: the record that points the domain at Tarkle needs fixing. - **Active**: the domain is verified and connected. Each brand domain's details include a **Refresh** button. If Tarkle cannot reach its hosting provider when you refresh, it says it could not check this domain, that your settings are unchanged, and to try again in a few minutes. ## What the domain serves The brand page opens at the root of the domain: brand.yourdomain.com shows the page, and brand.yourdomain.com/mark-usage shows the mark usage terms. Only this brand's page opens on the domain. Search engines index a brand page only when it is public and not a draft. To control who can open the page, see [Who can open a brand page?](/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page). The domain's sitemap lists the home page and /mark-usage only while the brand is indexable. ## When the brand is not live yet A brand that is a draft, or whose **Access** is **Restricted**, is not live. When a visitor opens its domain, they see a page titled Not live yet. The page says "This page is not available right now. Please check back later." It answers with a 404 status, shows no brand details and is kept out of search engines. The same page answers every address on the domain. To make the page open on its domain, make the brand public: 1. Open [Brands](/dashboard/brands) in the workspace that holds the brand, and choose the brand. 2. Open the **Settings** tab. In the **Access** section, choose **Public** from the **Access** menu. The menu does not offer **Restricted** unless the brand already uses it, so choose **Public** to replace it. 3. If the top bar shows **Draft** with a **Publish** button, click **Publish**. On a brand that is already published, click **Save changes**. Once the brand is published and its **Access** is **Public**, the brand page opens on its domain. To read what each access setting means for visitors, see [Who can open a brand page?](/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page). ## Change or remove a domain Open the row menu of the brand domain and click **Edit** to change the domain or the brand, then click **Save**. A brand has one domain, so saving a new domain for a brand that already has one replaces the saved domain. When you change to a new address, Tarkle removes the old address from its hosting after the new one is attached. To remove a domain, open the row menu and click **Delete**. Tarkle removes the domain from its hosting first, and deletes it from the brand only after that succeeds. If the removal fails, the domain stays in the table and Tarkle shows the error. Deleting a brand also detaches its domain from Tarkle's hosting. ## Refused domains Tarkle refuses a domain that another brand page already uses, with the message "This domain is already assigned to another brand page." It also refuses a domain that another part of Tarkle already uses, and a domain that includes www. ## What happens next When the status is **Active** and the brand is published with **Public** access, the brand page opens on your domain. To give a client access to it, see [How do I share a brand page with a client?](/help/branding/share-a-brand-with-a-client). ## Related articles - [What is a brand page in Tarkle?](/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page) - [How to add logos, colors and fonts to a brand page](/help/branding/logos-colors-and-fonts) - [How do I see views, downloads and requests for my brand pages?](/help/branding/views-downloads-and-requests) - [Who can open a brand page?](/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/how-do-i-use-my-own-domain-for-a-brand-page ### How to add guidelines, team, press and asset collections Fill in asset collections, Team, Press and Guidelines on the Assets tab of a brand page. The **Assets** tab of the brand editor holds four lists: **Brand assets** (your asset collections), **Team**, **Press** and **Guidelines**. Use it to put downloadable files, the people behind the brand, press coverage and written brand rules on the brand page. ## Add the content 1. **Open the editor.** Click **Brands** in the sidebar, then open the brand you want to edit. A brand that does not exist yet starts with [How to create a brand page](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/create-a-brand-page). 2. **Open Assets.** Click the **Assets** tab, after Fonts and before SEO. 3. **Add a collection.** Under **Brand assets**, click **Add collection** and enter a **Collection name** (required) and an optional **Description**. 4. **Add files.** Click **Add files** in the collection and pick files from the file picker, several at once if you like. 5. **Add your team.** Under **Team**, click **Add person**, pick a headshot, then enter a **Name** and an optional **Title**. 6. **Add press coverage.** Under **Press**, paste a link to an article and click **Add**. 7. **Write guidelines.** Under **Guidelines**, click **Add section**, then enter a **Section title** and write the text. 8. **Add images to a section.** In a guideline section, click **Add image**, pick a file and type an optional caption. Choose **Image**, **Do** or **Don't** for it. Use an image for a clear-space diagram, **Do** for a good example and **Don't** for a misuse. To add a matching pair in one step, click **Add do and don't pair**. 9. **Save.** On a new brand, click **Save as draft** or **Publish**. On a draft, click **Save draft** or **Publish**. On a published brand, click **Save changes**, or **Unpublish** to turn it back into a draft. Remove a file, a team member, a press item or a guideline section with the X beside it. Tarkle does not save a team member or a collection without a name. A guideline section with no title and no text is dropped when you save, and a section with text but no title is saved as **Untitled**. ## Limits - **Collections:** 30 per brand, with up to 200 files each. A collection name can be up to 80 characters and a description up to 500. - **Files:** each file can be up to 100 MB. A larger file is skipped when you add it, without a message. - **Team:** up to 24 people. A name and a title can each be up to 80 characters. - **Team heading:** it defaults to Team and can be up to 30 characters. Type your own in the **Section title** field, or click Team, Leadership, Staff, Founders or People. - **Press:** up to 24 items. - **Guidelines:** up to 20 sections, each with a title of up to 80 characters. - **Guideline images:** up to 12 images per section, each a PNG, JPG, WebP or SVG file of up to 10 MB. A caption can be up to 200 characters. ## Details worth knowing - **Press links:** Tarkle reads the title, summary, cover image and source from the page, and you can edit the title. A link must be a valid public web address, and the same link cannot be added twice. If Tarkle cannot read the page, it still adds the link and asks you to type the title. - **Guidelines presets:** the standard guidelines are **Logo usage**, **Do and don't**, **Voice and tone** and **Imagery**. Each preset you do not have yet has its own button beside **Add section**. When two or more are missing, a bulk button adds them at once: **Add the standard guidelines** when the list is empty, or **Add the missing standard sections** when some are already there. A preset section that is still empty shows **Insert the standard text**. - **Guidelines text:** the editor supports headings, bulleted and numbered lists, quotes, callouts, bold, italic, underline and links. Use the up and down arrows on a section to reorder it. - **Do and don't pairs:** a **Do** image placed directly next to a **Don't** image, in either order, shows as a pair on the brand page: the two sit side by side with the Do on the left, on a phone as well. The editor groups such images under a label. Use the up and down arrows on an image to move it one place. Images that are not next to their opposite flow in a grid, and a lone Do or Don't keeps its word under the image. - **Images in the kit:** the full kit zip holds guideline images in a `guidelines` folder, named after the section and the caption. - **Brand pages by plan:** on the Free plan, an organization can have one brand page. Pro and Agency have no limit. See [Brand page plans and limits](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/brand-page-plans-and-limits) and [plans and prices](https://tarkle.com/pricing). ## What happens next Once the brand is published, visitors see the **Overview** tab, which is always shown, and a tab for each section that has content: **Logos**, **Colors**, **Typography**, **Assets**, **Team**, **Press** and **Guidelines**. The **Team** tab shows the heading you chose. Guideline images show under the text of their section on the **Guidelines** tab. Visitors can open images in a preview and download single files, or download everything as one zip with the **Download** button. Turn on **Require approval to download** in the **Settings** tab of the brand editor, under **Downloads**, to decide who can download. Visitors who do not have access see **Request access** instead of **Download**, and they send you a request. [How do download approval and access requests work?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/download-approval-and-requests) explains how to approve one. A **Usage** link sits at the end of the tab row and always shows. It opens the brand's Mark Usage Terms page. Tarkle writes that page from the brand name and your workspace contact email, so there is nothing to switch on or fill in. Without a contact email, the page tells visitors to contact the brand through its website. Press cards open the article in a new tab, and more than six items turn into a slider. ## Related articles - [How to create a brand page](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/create-a-brand-page) - [How do download approval and access requests work?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/download-approval-and-requests) - [Who can open a brand page?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page) - [Brand page plans and limits](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/brand-page-plans-and-limits) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/guidelines-team-and-press ### How to add logos, colors and fonts to a brand page Add your logos, colors and fonts in the Logos, Colors and Fonts tabs of the brand editor. Each brand page keeps its logos, colors and fonts. You add each one in its own tab of the brand editor, and visitors see them on the public brand page. The editor has these tabs: Basics, Links, Logos, Colors, Fonts, Assets, SEO and Settings. How many brand pages you can have depends on your plan, see [Brand page plans and limits](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/brand-page-plans-and-limits). ## Steps 1. **Open the brand.** Brand pages belong to a workspace. On the [brand pages list](/dashboard/brands), click **Create brand** or open a brand from the list. New to brand pages? [How to create a brand page](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/create-a-brand-page) covers the first steps of a new brand. 2. **Add the logos.** In the **Logos** tab, drop a file on **Icon** or **Main logo**, or click the box and pick a file. Add a **Brand banner** for the header image of your brand page. 3. **Add more logos.** Under **Additional logos**, click **Add logo**, pick one or more files, then give each logo a name, a type and a usage. 4. **Set the colors.** In the **Colors** tab, set the **Primary color**. Click **Add secondary color** for a second main color, and click **Add color** for each extra color. Give each extra color a **Color name**. 5. **Add print values (optional).** Under **Print values**, enter a CMYK value and a Pantone name for any color. 6. **Choose the fonts.** In the **Fonts** tab, click the **Headline** box, then the **Body** box. Each one says **Select font** until you pick a font. In the window, choose **Google**, **Adobe** or **Custom**, then click **Continue**. 7. **Save.** On a new brand, click **Save as draft** or **Publish**. On an existing draft, click **Save draft** or **Publish**. On a published brand, click **Save changes**. A brand saved as a draft is hidden from visitors, though workspace members can still open it. On a published brand, **Unpublish** turns it back into a draft. ## Logos **Icon** and **Main logo** accept PNG, JPG, WebP or SVG, up to 10 MB. The **Brand banner** accepts PNG, JPG or WebP, up to 10 MB. Each file picker offers **Upload**, **Library**, **Dropbox** and **Google Drive**. The Dropbox and Google Drive tabs appear once you have connected them. The **Icon** also serves as the favicon until you upload one in the **SEO** tab. The **Favicon** field there takes a square image of at least 128x128, in PNG, JPG, WebP, SVG or ICO, up to 2 MB. Each additional logo has a type: Primary, Secondary, Monochrome, Reversed, Icon, Favicon, Square or Social Media. Its usage is Digital, Print or All Purpose, and All Purpose is the default. You can add up to 20 additional logos. The **Offer black and white versions** switch, under **Logo downloads** in the **Logos** tab, is on for a new brand. While it is on, visitors can download a one-color black or white copy of a logo that has a transparent background. On the brand page, the download menu offers a Black PNG and a White PNG at 1024 px, plus a Black SVG and a White SVG when the logo is an SVG. Tarkle makes these copies itself, and only when you have not uploaded a monochrome or reversed logo of your own. Logo downloads follow the same download rule as font files, described below. When an additional logo has the type Monochrome or Reversed, Tarkle stops making these copies for the brand, and the black and white downloads leave the menu. The menu still offers the logo's original file. ## Colors Set the **Primary color** and, if you need one, a **Secondary color**, either with the picker or by typing a HEX value. You can add up to 30 additional colors. Each one takes a name, such as Sky blue, and a HEX value. Under **Print values**, you can enter the exact CMYK for a color as four numbers from 0 to 100, and a Pantone name, such as 2665 C. A value you enter replaces the approximate CMYK that Tarkle works out from the screen color. You can enter print values for up to 40 colors. On the brand page, each swatch shows its name and HEX value. Hover over a swatch to see HEX, RGB and CMYK chips, plus a PANTONE chip when a Pantone name is set. Click a chip to copy its value. On a touch screen the chips always show. Without a CMYK value, the CMYK chip shows an approximate value worked out from the screen color. ## Fonts Each slot, **Headline** and **Body**, takes one font. Click the **Headline** or **Body** box to open the font window, which has three tabs: - **Google:** search the list and pick a family. - **Custom:** click **Choose a font file** and pick a WOFF2, WOFF, TTF or OTF file, up to 10 MB. The name comes from the file name. To change it, edit **Shown on the page as**. - **Adobe:** this tab appears once you have entered your own Adobe Fonts web project. To use an Adobe font, open the **Settings** tab, find the **Integrations** card, turn on **Adobe Fonts**, and paste your web project ID or stylesheet link. Then pick the fonts in the **Fonts** tab. Visitors see Adobe fonts without needing Adobe, and they cannot download them. If the Adobe tab says the web project has no fonts, add fonts to the project on Adobe Fonts, publish it, and then reopen the window. On the public brand page, click a custom font to open its preview. A **Download font file** button shows there only when the visitor can download from that brand page. Google and Adobe fonts never show it. Turn on **Require approval to download** in the **Settings** tab to have visitors request access first, see [How do download approval and access requests work?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/download-approval-and-requests). ## What happens next After you publish, the logos, colors and fonts show on the public brand page. Next, open the **Assets** tab to add **Brand assets**, **Team**, **Press** and **Guidelines**. Set who can open the page in the **Settings** tab under **Access**, see [Who can open a brand page?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page) ## Related articles - [What is a brand page in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page) - [How do I use my own domain for a brand page?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/use-your-own-domain) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/logos-colors-and-fonts ### How to add logos, colors and fonts to a brand page Add your logos, colors and fonts in the Logos, Colors and Fonts tabs of the brand editor. Each brand page keeps its logos, colors and fonts. You add each one in its own tab of the brand editor, and visitors see them on the public brand page. The editor has these tabs: Basics, Links, Logos, Colors, Fonts, Assets, SEO and Settings. Free allows one brand page for the whole organization, and Pro and Agency allow unlimited brand pages, see [Brand page plans and limits](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/brand-page-plans-and-limits). ## Steps 1. **Open the brand.** On the [brand pages list](/dashboard/brands), open a brand or start a new one. New to brand pages? [How to create a brand page](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/create-a-brand-page) covers the first steps. 2. **Add the logos.** In the **Logos** tab, choose a file for **Icon** or **Main logo**. Add a **Brand banner** for the header image of your brand page. 3. **Add more logos.** Under **Additional logos**, click **Add logo**, pick one or more files, then give each logo a name, a type and a usage. You can add up to 20 additional logos. 4. **Set the colors.** In the **Colors** tab, set the **Primary color**. Click **Add secondary color** for a second main color, and click **Add color** for each extra color, then give it a name. 5. **Add print values (optional).** Under **Print values**, enter a CMYK value and a Pantone name, such as 2665 C, for any color. 6. **Choose the fonts.** In the **Fonts** tab, click the **Headline** box, then the **Body** box. In the window, choose **Google**, **Adobe** or **Custom**, then click **Continue**. 7. **Save and set access.** Use the save buttons at the top of the editor to save a draft or publish the brand. In the **Settings** tab, choose who can open the page under **Access**, see [Who can open a brand page?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page) ## Logo and image files Tarkle checks each image by what the file really is, not by its name. The picker refuses a file whose name does not end in an allowed type. When the brand is saved, the server reads the first bytes of each image, and a file that is not a real image of an allowed type is refused with a message such as "The icon is not a real image file." - **Icon, Main logo and additional logos:** PNG, JPG, WebP or SVG, up to 10 MB. - **Brand banner and Open Graph image:** PNG, JPG or WebP, up to 10 MB. SVG is not accepted. The Open Graph image is the social image, set in the **SEO** tab. - **Favicon:** PNG, JPG, WebP, SVG or ICO, up to 2 MB, set in the **SEO** tab. The field asks for a square image, at least 128x128. Until you upload one, the **Icon** serves as the favicon. Each file picker offers Upload and Library, and Dropbox and Google Drive once you have connected them. The **Offer black and white versions** switch, under **Logo downloads** in the **Logos** tab, is on for a new brand. While it is on, visitors can download a one-color black or white copy of a transparent logo. Tarkle makes these copies itself, and only when you have not uploaded a monochrome or reversed logo of your own. The download menu on a logo offers the original file, an SVG for a vector logo, PNG at 512, 1024 or 2048 px, and the black and white versions. ## Downloads from logo and asset tiles On a phone or tablet, the download button on each logo and asset tile is always visible, and the download button on a logo opens the format menu. On a computer, the button appears when you hover over the tile or move to it with the keyboard. On a logo tile, the button shows only when the visitor can download from the brand page. To have visitors request access first, turn on **Require approval to download** in the **Settings** tab, see [How do download approval and access requests work?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/download-approval-and-requests). ## Colors and fonts Set the **Primary color** and, if you need one, a **Secondary color**, by picking a color or typing a HEX value. You can add up to 30 additional colors. Under **Print values**, enter the exact CMYK for a color as four numbers from 0 to 100. A CMYK value you enter replaces the approximate one Tarkle works out from the screen color, and you can enter print values for up to 40 colors. Each slot, **Headline** and **Body**, takes one font. The **Custom** tab takes a WOFF2, WOFF, TTF or OTF file, up to 10 MB, and the font takes its name from the file. To change the name shown on the page, edit **Shown on the page as**. The **Adobe** tab appears once you have entered an Adobe Fonts web project: open the **Settings** tab, find the **Integrations** card, and turn on **Adobe Fonts** to paste your web project ID or stylesheet link. Visitors see Adobe fonts without needing Adobe, and they cannot download them. ## What happens next After you publish, the logos, colors and fonts show on the public brand page. Next, open the **Assets** tab to add **Brand assets**, **Team**, **Press** and **Guidelines**, see [How to add guidelines, team, press and asset collections](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/guidelines-team-and-press). ## Related articles - [What is a brand page in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page) - [How do I use my own domain for a brand page?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/use-your-own-domain) - [How do I share the full brand kit with a link?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/share-the-full-brand-kit-with-a-link) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/how-to-add-logos-colors-and-fonts-to-a-brand-page ### How to create a brand page Create a brand page from Brands, fill in each tab, then save a draft or publish it. A brand page holds one brand's logos, colors, fonts and other assets in one place that you can share. You build it in a form with eight tabs, and you can save it as a draft until it is ready. ## Steps 1. **Open Brands.** Open [Brands](/dashboard/brands) in the workspace you want to use. 2. **Start a new brand.** Click **Create brand**, or **Create brand page** on an empty list. 3. **Optional: type a website.** In **Start from a website**, type the brand's domain, for example `acme.com`. 4. **Optional: look it up.** Click the **Analyze this website** button next to the field, or press Enter. The lookup only fills in the form, so nothing is saved until you save the brand. 5. **Fill in the tabs.** They are **Basics**, **Links**, **Logos**, **Colors**, **Fonts**, **Assets**, **SEO** and **Settings**. 6. **Save as draft.** Click **Save as draft** to finish later. 7. **Or publish.** Click **Publish** when the page is ready. After either save, you return to the **Brands** list. Logos, colors and fonts are added in the **Logos**, **Colors** and **Fonts** tabs. [How to add logos, colors and fonts to a brand page](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/logos-colors-and-fonts) shows how. Guidelines, team, press and asset collections are added on the **Assets** tab, as explained in [How to add guidelines, team, press and asset collections](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/guidelines-team-and-press). ## What Start from a website fills in Start from a website fills in the name, summary, story, industry, size, company type, year founded, website, social links, colors, headline and body fonts, logo, icon and banner. It also fills in the slug, which it takes from the name. It fills empty fields only, so it never overwrites what you typed. Fonts come only as Google fonts, and only when you have not uploaded a font file. When the site has no separate icon, the logo is used as the icon. It does not fill in the SEO fields or anything in **Settings**. Running a lookup again replaces the values the previous lookup filled in, as long as you have not changed them. When the lookup works, Tarkle shows "Filled in from the website. Check each step before you publish." If it fails, Tarkle shows the error and you can fill in the fields yourself. ## What you need to save or publish **Draft:** a brand name, a slug and a name for every asset collection. The slug is the brand's address name. It can use lowercase letters, numbers and single hyphens, with no spaces, dots or other symbols, and it can be up to 48 characters. A slug can be used once per workspace. **Publish:** everything a draft needs, plus a summary, a story, a website, an icon, a main logo, a primary color, a headline font, a body font and a banner. If access in **Settings** is a password, enter the password. If access is restricted, choose the contact or organization that can open the page. [Who can open a brand page?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page) explains the access choices. Note: a draft saved with access set to a password, but no password typed, is saved with restricted access instead. Enter the password before you publish. ## Good to know - On an existing brand that is still a draft, the buttons are **Save draft** and **Publish**. On a published brand they are **Save changes** and **Unpublish**, which turns the brand back into a draft. - While you create a brand, the form is kept in your browser for 24 hours, including a password you typed. The files you added (logos, banner, team photos, collection files and guideline images) are kept in your browser too, unless your browser blocks local storage, so a reload does not lose them. - When you edit a brand that already exists, unsaved text and guideline images are kept in your browser for 3 days. When you open the brand again, a notice asks **Restore unsaved changes?** with **Restore** and **Discard**. Nothing is applied until you choose. Other new files in the editor, such as a logo or a banner, are not kept, so add them again after a reload. - If a save fails, Tarkle shows the error and keeps the form open with what you typed. The brand itself is saved first, so a save that fails after that point can leave the brand already created. If a retry says "Brand with this slug already exists", open **Brands** to check before you try again. - A brand page opens at `/b/your-slug` on your workspace address. To use your own domain instead, see [How do I use my own domain for a brand page?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/use-your-own-domain). ## Plan limits Brand pages belong to the organization, and its workspaces share the limit. On Free, the organization can have 1 brand page, and drafts count toward it. Pro and Agency have no limit. Deleting a brand frees its place. At the limit, the Create brand button is hidden on the **Brands** list, and opening a new brand sends you back to the **Brands** list. If a save is refused because of the limit, Tarkle shows "You have reached your brand page limit for this plan." To add more brand pages on Free, move the organization to Pro. [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro) explains how, and [pricing](https://tarkle.com/pricing) lists the plans. On Pro and Agency, a brand page can have a domain of its own. Free has none. ## What happens next After you save, Tarkle shows "Draft saved" for a draft or "Brand created" when you publish. Then it returns you to the **Brands** list, where the brand now appears. Open the brand to add more detail. To let a client see it, assign it to a contact or organization in **Settings**, as explained in [How do I share a brand page with a client?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/share-a-brand-with-a-client). ## Related articles - [What is a brand page in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page) - [Brand page plans and limits](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/brand-page-plans-and-limits) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/create-a-brand-page ### How to create a brand page Create a brand page from Brands, fill in each tab, then save a draft or publish it. A brand page holds one brand's logos, colors, fonts and other assets in one place that you can share. You build it in a form with eight tabs, and you can save it as a draft until it is ready. ## Steps 1. **Open Brands.** Open [Brands](/dashboard/brands) in the workspace you want to use. 2. **Start a new brand.** Click **Create brand**, or **Create brand page** on an empty list. 3. **Optional: type a website.** In **Start from a website**, type the brand's domain, for example `acme.com`. 4. **Optional: look it up.** Click the **Analyze this website** button next to the field, or press Enter. The lookup only fills in the form, so nothing is saved until you save the brand. 5. **Fill in the tabs.** They are **Basics**, **Links**, **Logos**, **Colors**, **Fonts**, **Assets**, **SEO** and **Settings**. 6. **Save as draft.** Click **Save as draft** to finish later. 7. **Or publish.** Click **Publish** when the page is ready. After either save, you return to the **Brands** list. Logos, colors and fonts are added in the **Logos**, **Colors** and **Fonts** tabs. [How to add logos, colors and fonts to a brand page](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/logos-colors-and-fonts) shows how. Guidelines, team, press and asset collections are added on the **Assets** tab, as explained in [How to add guidelines, team, press and asset collections](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/guidelines-team-and-press). ## What Start from a website fills in Start from a website fills in the name, summary, story, industry, size, company type, year founded, website, social links, colors, headline and body fonts, logo, icon and banner. It also fills in the slug, which it takes from the name. It fills empty fields only, so it never overwrites what you typed. Fonts come only as Google fonts, and only when you have not uploaded a font file. When the site has no separate icon, the logo is used as the icon. It does not fill in the SEO fields or anything in **Settings**. Running a lookup again replaces the values the previous lookup filled in, as long as you have not changed them. ## What you need to save or publish **Draft:** a brand name, a slug and a name for every asset collection. The slug is the brand's address name. It can use lowercase letters, numbers and single hyphens, with no spaces, dots or other symbols, and it can be up to 48 characters. A slug can be used once per workspace. **Publish:** everything a draft needs, plus a summary, a story, a website, an icon, a main logo, a primary color, a headline font, a body font and a banner. If access in **Settings** is a password, enter the password. If access is restricted, choose the contact or organization that can open the page. [Who can open a brand page?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page) explains the access choices. Note: a draft saved with access set to a password, but no password typed, is saved with restricted access instead. Enter the password before you publish. ## Field limits Tarkle checks the length of each text field when you create a brand and when you edit one. The name can be up to 48 characters. The page address can be up to 48 characters too. The summary can be up to 200 characters and the story up to 2000. The meta title can be up to 100 characters and the meta description up to 160. Text that is longer is not saved, so shorten it and save again. ## Good to know - On an existing brand that is still a draft, the buttons are **Save draft** and **Publish**. On a published brand they are **Save changes** and **Unpublish**, which turns the brand back into a draft. - While you create a brand, the form is kept in your browser for 24 hours, including a password you typed. The files you added (logos, banner, team photos, collection files and guideline images) are kept in your browser too, unless your browser blocks local storage, so a reload does not lose them. - If a save fails, the brand itself is saved first, so a save that fails after that point can leave the brand already created. If Tarkle shows "That page address is already used in this workspace", another brand in the same workspace has that page address. This happens on create and on edit. Open **Brands** to find it, then choose a different page address and save again. - If Tarkle shows "We could not save the colors. Nothing was changed. Try again.", the part named in the message is colors, logos, asset collections, asset files or brand settings. The brand stays as it was, so you can try the save again. - A brand page opens at `/b/your-slug` on your workspace address. To use your own domain instead, see [How do I use my own domain for a brand page?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/use-your-own-domain). ## Plan limits Brand pages belong to the organization, and its workspaces share the limit. On Free, the organization can have 1 brand page, and drafts count toward it. Pro and Agency have no limit. Deleting a brand frees its place. At the limit, the Create brand button is hidden on the **Brands** list, and opening a new brand sends you back to the **Brands** list. To add more brand pages on Free, move the organization to Pro. [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro) explains how, and [pricing](https://tarkle.com/pricing) lists the plans. ## What happens next After you save, Tarkle returns you to the **Brands** list, where the brand now appears. Open the brand to add more detail. To let a client see it, assign it to a contact or organization in **Settings**, as explained in [How do I share a brand page with a client?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/share-a-brand-with-a-client). ## Related articles - [What is a brand page in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page) - [Brand page plans and limits](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/brand-page-plans-and-limits) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/how-to-create-a-brand-page ### How to customize your Tarkle workspace branding Upload your logo and favicon, set your accent color, and choose whether the Powered by Tarkle link shows. Your workspace branding controls how your public pages look. You set your logo, the favicon shown in browser tabs, the accent color and whether the Powered by Tarkle link shows. These settings belong to one [workspace](/help/getting-started/what-is-a-tarkle-workspace), so repeat them in each workspace you want to brand. ## Change the branding 1. Open **Settings**. The logo, favicon, accent color and backlink controls are on the **General** tab. 2. In the **Custom branding** card, click the edit icon next to **Logo** and choose a PNG, JPG or JPEG file. The file shows as a preview. Tarkle uploads it when you click **Save changes**. 3. Click the edit icon next to **Favicon** and choose a PNG, JPG or JPEG file. Use a square transparent PNG for best results. 4. Click the color swatch next to **Accent color**. Pick a color in the picker or type a hex value in the box under it. The color starts as #475467. 5. In the **Backlink** card, turn the **Show Powered by Tarkle** switch on or off. 6. Click **Save changes**. The logo is your square brand mark. Tarkle shows it on transfer pages, download links and outgoing emails. The accent color is used for buttons and highlights on your public-facing pages. Below the switch is the **Affiliate link (optional)** field. Paste an affiliate link that uses ref, via or aff. If the link uses another format, Tarkle shows "Enter a valid Tarkle affiliate URL using ref, via, or aff." and the save does not go through. When Tarkle has an affiliate link for your account, a **Use my affiliate link** button fills the field with it. The link is saved when you click **Save changes**. ## Which plans include what The logo and the accent color can be changed without a plan check. A custom favicon needs the Pro or Agency plan, and so does turning off the Powered by Tarkle link. Agency includes everything in Pro. On the Free plan the switch is greyed out and the link stays on. Compare the plans on the [pricing page](/pricing). ## The Powered by Tarkle link When the switch is on, a small Powered by Tarkle link shows at the bottom of public pages. Pages served from Tarkle's own addresses always show the link, whatever the switch says. To turn the link off, follow [How to disable "Powered by Tarkle" on your workspace](/help/branding/how-to-disable-powered-by-tarkle-on-your-workspace). On the Agency plan, [white label](/help/agency-plan/set-up-white-label) replaces the link with your agency name. ## Who can save Only team members whose role can add, edit and delete settings see the **Save changes** button. For other roles the cards stay on screen, but there is no button to save them. ## What happens next Tarkle saves the logo, favicon, accent color, the switch and the affiliate link together. A successful save shows **Changes saved**, and the page refreshes with your settings. If Tarkle refuses one change, such as a custom favicon on the Free plan, the whole save stops and none of its changes are kept. ## Related articles - [How to set up a custom domain](/help/branding/how-to-set-up-a-custom-domain) - [What is included with Tarkle Free?](/help/billing-subscription/what-is-included-with-tarkle-free) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/how-to-customize-your-tarkle-workspace-branding ### How to disable "Powered by Tarkle" on your workspace Turn off the Powered by Tarkle line on public pages from the Backlink card in Settings. By default, a small line that reads "Powered by Tarkle" appears on public pages, such as transfer pages, file request pages and event pages. On plans that include removing it, you can turn the line off from the Backlink card in Settings. ## Which plans can turn it off Pro plans include turning the line off. Agency plans include it too. Free does not, so on Free the switch is greyed out and the line stays on. See [Tarkle plans and pricing](/pricing) for what each plan includes. On the Agency plan, white label can replace the line with your agency name. To set that up, read [How do I set up white label on the Agency plan?](/help/agency-plan/set-up-white-label). ## Turn off the Powered by Tarkle line 1. Open **Settings**. The page opens on the General tab. 2. Scroll to the bottom of the page to the **Backlink** card. 3. Turn off the switch next to **Powered by Tarkle**. The switch saves as soon as you flip it. To show the line again, turn the switch back on. Below the switch is **Referral link**. It is available only while the Powered by Tarkle switch is on. When it is on, the link uses your own referral link instead of the default Tarkle link. ## When the line still shows The line stays on in these cases, whatever the switch says: - **Tarkle addresses:** pages served from tarkle.com addresses always show the line. - **tarkle.page addresses:** pages served from tarkle.page addresses always show the line. - **Plans without removal:** on a plan that does not include it, the line shows on all public pages. - **Reseller and partner workspaces:** the line reads "Powered by" followed by the partner's name, instead of Tarkle. It links to the partner's website when the partner has one. Pages on your own custom domain follow the switch. To connect your own domain, read [How to set up a custom domain](/help/branding/how-to-set-up-a-custom-domain). ## Related articles - [How to set up a custom domain](/help/branding/how-to-set-up-a-custom-domain) - [Custom branding](/features/custom-branding) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/how-to-disable-powered-by-tarkle-on-your-workspace ### How to set up a custom domain Add a subdomain you own to your workspace, set its DNS records and check that it shows as Active. A custom domain lets the file transfer and file request pages you share open at an address you own, such as `files.example.com`. The same domain also serves branded recipient email. This article shows how to add the domain to a workspace, set its DNS records and check that it is active. You need access to the DNS settings of the domain at your DNS provider. Custom domains are available on every plan, and Free includes one. Compare the plans on the [pricing page](/pricing). ## Add the domain 1. Open the [Domains](/dashboard/settings/domains) tab of the workspace that will use the domain. Domains are set per workspace, so repeat these steps in each workspace that needs one. 2. Select **Add domain**. The button is shown to the workspace owner and to team members whose role can change settings. 3. In the **Add a domain** dialog, select **Workspace domain**, then select **Continue**. 4. In the **Domain** field, enter the subdomain, such as `files.example.com`, then select **Create**. Note: a root domain such as `example.com` is refused, and so is any domain that contains `www`. Pasting `https://` in front of the domain is fine, because Tarkle removes it. Tarkle also refuses a domain that another workspace, a Brand Page or an event page already uses. ## Set the DNS records After you select **Create**, the dialog title changes to **Verifying** and your domain name. The dialog shows the **Status** and a table with **Type**, **Name** and **Value** columns. Add each record at your DNS provider exactly as it appears in that table. ## Check the status 1. Select **Refresh / check** to check the domain again. When Tarkle confirms the domain is active, the dialog closes and Tarkle shows the message "Custom domain verified and connected." 2. Later, open the **Domains** tab again, select the domain's row, then select **Refresh**. Each domain row shows **Active** once the domain is connected. Until then it shows **Pending** or **Action required**. ## Edit or delete a domain Open the menu on the domain's row to choose **Edit** or **Delete**. To change the domain, choose **Edit**, enter the new domain in the **Domain** field of the **Edit custom domain** dialog, and select **Save**. Tarkle removes the existing domain and adds the new one, so ownership and DNS verification run again. Existing public links that use the old domain may stop working. To remove a domain, choose **Delete**, type the domain in the **Custom domain** field and select **Delete**. The **Delete** button stays off until the typed name matches the domain. Both public delivery and branded recipient email for this domain are removed and no longer accessible. A workspace has one custom domain. Tarkle refuses a second domain while one is set up, so delete the existing domain before you add another. Once it is deleted, you can add the new domain. ## Other domain types Brand Page domains and event page domains are added in the same **Add a domain** dialog, as their own destinations, and each has its own limit. For a Brand Page, see [How do I use my own domain for a brand page?](/help/branding/use-your-own-domain). On the Agency plan, your organization can also use one organization domain for clients. See [How do I use my own domain with the Agency plan?](/help/agency-plan/agency-organization-domain). ## What happens next Once the domain shows **Active**, the file transfer and file request pages you share open at that address. ## Related articles - [How to use a custom domain for your file sharing links](/help/getting-started/how-to-use-custom-domain-for-links) - [How to change your Tarkle workspace slug](/help/account/how-to-change-your-tarkle-workspace-slug) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/how-to-set-up-a-custom-domain ### What is a brand page in Tarkle? A brand page gathers one brand's logos, colors, fonts and guidelines on a single public page. A brand page is a public page for one brand. It gathers the brand's logos, colors, fonts, assets, team, press and written guidelines in one place, so people can open one link and take the right files. Share it instead of emailing logos and color codes. ## What a brand page holds You build a brand page in an editor with eight tabs: **Basics**, **Links**, **Logos**, **Colors**, **Fonts**, **Assets**, **SEO** and **Settings**. - **Basics:** brand name, slug, summary, story, industry, size, company type and year founded. - **Links:** the brand's website and social profiles. - **Logos:** an icon, a main logo, a banner and up to 20 additional logos. - **Colors:** a primary color, an optional secondary color and up to 30 additional colors. CMYK and Pantone values are optional print values. - **Fonts:** a headline font and a body font, from Google, Adobe or your own file. - **Assets:** collections of files, plus Team, Press and Guidelines sections. ## What visitors can do - Copy a color as HEX, RGB or CMYK, and as Pantone when you entered one. If you leave CMYK empty, the page shows an approximate CMYK worked out from the screen color. - Download each logo from its menu: the original file, SVG for vector logos, or PNG at 512, 1024 or 2048 pixels. With **Offer black and white versions** switched on in the Logos tab, transparent logos also offer black and white copies. - Use the **Download** button at the top to get the brand as a zip file. - Send a request with **Request access** when you ask for approval before downloads. - Read the Mark Usage Terms page. Tarkle writes it from the brand name and your workspace contact email, so there is nothing to fill in. ## What you control - **Draft or published:** a new brand has **Save as draft** and **Publish**. On a published brand, **Unpublish** turns it back into a draft and hides the public page. - **Who can open it:** in the **Settings** tab, **Access** offers **Public** and **Password protected**. A brand that already uses **Restricted** keeps that choice. - **Downloads:** in the **Settings** tab, switch on **Require approval to download** so visitors see **Request access** instead of **Download**. - **Address:** the page lives at your workspace address followed by /b/ and the brand slug. **Use a custom domain** in the **Settings** tab gives it your own domain. - **Search and sharing:** the **SEO** tab holds the meta title, meta description, Open Graph image and favicon. They start from the brand name, summary, banner and icon. - **Tracking:** the **Integrations** card in the **Settings** tab can add your own Google Analytics 4, Google Tag Manager and Google Search Console details. - **Client:** in the **Settings** tab, switch on **Assign this brand** to give the brand to a contact or organization. ## Plans and limits The organization owns the brand page limit, and all its workspaces share it. An organization on Free can have 1 brand page in total and cannot add a custom domain to it. An organization on Pro or Agency has no limit on brand pages and can give each one its own domain. See [Brand page plans and limits](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/brand-page-plans-and-limits) and the [pricing page](https://tarkle.com/pricing). ## What happens next Open **Brands** in the sidebar and click **Create brand** to start your first brand page. ## Related articles - [How to create a brand page](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/create-a-brand-page) - [Who can open a brand page?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page) - [How do download approval and access requests work?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/download-approval-and-requests) - [How do I use my own domain for a brand page?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/use-your-own-domain) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page ### Who can open a brand page? Choose Public or Password protected in a brand's Settings tab to decide who can open its brand page. Every brand page has one access setting, and it decides who can open the page. You set it in the brand editor, on the **Settings** tab, in the **Access** section. Your team can always open its own brand pages, whatever the setting is. The next section says who counts as your team. ## Who counts as your team Your team is the workspace owner, an owner who reaches the workspace through a workspace link, and the active team members of the workspace. A team member who is suspended is not treated as part of the team. The team is never asked for a brand page password. It can always open the page and download its files. The same check decides the page and every download, so a team member who can open a brand page can also download its files, even on a brand that asks for approval to download. ## Public Anyone with the link can open a public brand page. Search engines can index it once it is published. The **Access** menu describes this choice as "Anyone on the internet with the link can view". ## Password protected Choose **Password protected**, then type the password in the **Password** field that appears. Share the password yourself with the people who should see the page. The menu describes this choice as "Only people with the password can view it". Visitors see a title that says the brand requires a password, a **Password** field and an **Unlock** button. A wrong password shows "Incorrect password". Tarkle allows 20 password checks per brand from one internet connection in an hour. After that, the page shows "Too many attempts. Try again later." A visitor who enters the right password stays unlocked in that browser for 30 days. If you change the password, every visitor has to enter the new one. Your team is never asked for it. ## Restricted **Restricted** is an older setting. The **Access** menu shows it only on a brand that already uses it, so you cannot switch a Public or Password protected brand to Restricted. A restricted brand opens for the contact or the organization members it is assigned to, and for your team. A restricted brand with nobody assigned opens only for your team and for visitors whose access request you approved (see Giving access to a request below). Anyone else sees "{brand} is private" with a form to request access. To assign a brand, turn on **Assign this brand** in the **Settings** tab and choose the contact or organization. On a restricted brand, the assigned person opens the page when signed in with the account of that contact, or of a member of that organization. On a Public or Password protected brand, assigning gives no extra access. To show a brand in a client's portal, see [How do I share a brand page with a client?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/share-a-brand-with-a-client). ## Requests from visitors On a password protected or restricted brand, a visitor can send a request with **Request access**. The form asks for **Your name** (optional), **Your email** (required) and **Why do you need access?** (optional). Each internet connection can send 5 requests per brand in an hour. A second request from the same email within 24 hours is recorded once. You get an email about each new request. ## Giving access to a request Each request is listed in the brand's **Requests** tab. Choose **Give access** to approve it. Tarkle then emails the requester a link. On a password protected or restricted brand, opening that link in their browser opens the brand page for 30 days, without the password and without an assignment. Only that browser gets the access, so the page does not open for everyone. The approval also opens the brand's files, unless the brand asks for approval to download. A view approval does not open downloads that need approval: the requester needs an approved download request for those, as described in [How do download approval and access requests work?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/download-approval-and-requests) and in the Downloads section below. Choose **Resend access** on an approved request to send a new link. The 30 days start again, and the earlier link stops working. To end the access, choose **Revoke access** on an approved request, or **Reject** on a pending one. Revoke access and Reject end it at once: the browser stops opening the page and its files, even before the 30 days are over. You can also give someone access without the email link: on a restricted brand, assign the person, and on a password protected brand, share the password with them. ## Search engines and link previews Search engines can index only a public brand page that is published. Password protected, restricted and draft pages are marked so that search engines leave them out. When a password protected or restricted link is pasted into a chat, the preview shows only your workspace's name and image, never the brand. A pasted draft link shows no preview. ## Downloads The files on a brand page follow the same access as the page. A visitor who cannot open a password protected or restricted brand cannot download its files either. The **Require approval to download** switch under **Downloads** adds a request step for downloads. See [How do download approval and access requests work?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/download-approval-and-requests). ## What happens next Open [Brands](/dashboard/brands), choose the brand and go to its **Settings** tab to change who can open it. Brand pages belong to a workspace, so open the workspace where the brand lives. ## Related articles - [What is a brand page in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page) - [How do I see views, downloads and requests for my brand pages?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/views-downloads-and-requests) - [How to create a brand page](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/create-a-brand-page) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page-2 ### Who can open a brand page? Choose Public or Password protected in a brand's Settings tab to decide who can open its brand page. Every brand page has one access setting, and it decides who can open the page. You set it in the brand editor, on the **Settings** tab, in the **Access** section. Your team can open its own brand pages whatever the setting is. ## Public Anyone with the link can open a public brand page. Search engines can index it once it is published. The **Access** menu describes this choice as "Anyone on the internet with the link can view". ## Password protected Choose **Password protected**, then type the password in the **Password** field that appears. Share the password yourself with the people who should see the page. The menu describes this choice as "Only people with the password can view it". Visitors see the brand name, a **Password** field and an **Unlock** button. A wrong password shows "Incorrect password". Tarkle allows 20 password checks per brand from one internet connection in an hour. After that, the page answers "Too many attempts. Try again later." A visitor who enters the right password stays unlocked in that browser for 30 days. If you change the password, every visitor has to enter the new one. Your team is never asked for it. ## Restricted **Restricted** is an older setting. The **Access** menu shows it only on a brand that already uses it, so you cannot switch a Public or Password protected brand to Restricted. A restricted brand opens for the contact or the organization members it is assigned to, and for your team. Anyone else sees "{brand} is private" with a form to request access. A restricted brand with nobody assigned opens only for your team. To assign a brand, turn on **Assign this brand** in the **Settings** tab and choose the person or organization under **Contact or organization**. On a restricted brand, the assigned person opens the page when signed in with the account of that contact, or of a member of that organization. On a Public or Password protected brand, assigning gives no extra access. To show a brand in a client's portal, see [How do I share a brand page with a client?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/share-a-brand-with-a-client). ## Requests from visitors On a password protected or restricted brand, a visitor can send a request with **Request access**. The form asks for **Your name** (optional), **Your email** (required) and **Why do you need access?** (optional). Each internet connection can send 5 requests per brand in an hour. A second request from the same email within 24 hours is recorded once. You get an email about each new request. A request does not open the page by itself. To let the person in, assign them on a restricted brand, or share the password with them on a password protected brand. ## Search engines and link previews Search engines can index only a public brand page that is published. Password protected, restricted and draft pages are marked so that search engines leave them out. When a password protected or restricted link is pasted into a chat, the preview shows only your workspace's name and image, never the brand. A pasted draft link shows no preview. ## Downloads The files on a brand page follow the same access as the page. A visitor who cannot open a password protected or restricted brand cannot download its files either. The **Require approval to download** switch under **Downloads** adds a request step for downloads. See [How do download approval and access requests work?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/download-approval-and-requests). ## What happens next Open [Brands](/dashboard/brands), choose the brand and go to its **Settings** tab to change who can open it. Brand pages belong to a workspace, so open the workspace where the brand lives. ## Related articles - [What is a brand page in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page) - [How do I see views, downloads and requests for my brand pages?](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/views-downloads-and-requests) - [How to create a brand page](https://tarkle.com/help/branding/create-a-brand-page) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/branding/who-can-open-a-brand-page --- # Help: Tracking Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/tracking ### How the activity page works in Tarkle See up to 50 actions in your workspace, search them by name and export selected rows to a CSV file. The Activity page lists the actions taken in one workspace. Each row shows the item, the action, who did it, their IP address, the time and where the action came from. Activity belongs to each [workspace](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/what-is-a-tarkle-workspace). Sign in to your Tarkle account, then open [Activity](/dashboard/activity) in the workspace you want to review. ## What the page shows The page loads up to 50 entries for the workspace. The table has no date filter and no way to load older entries, so older actions do not appear on this page. The table has three columns: - **What** shows the name of the item, such as a file, a folder, a transfer or an API token. Under the name, the row shows **by** and the name of the person who did it, the IP address and the time. For files, folders, transfers and requests, the name opens the item in a new tab. - **Action** shows what happened, with a label such as Viewed, Downloaded, Uploaded or Deleted. - **Where** shows the country and city the action came from. It shows **Unknown** when no country is stored. When no IP address is stored, the row shows **Unknown** in place of the address. When an address is shown, clicking it copies the address. ## Sort the rows Click **What**, **Action** or **Where** to sort the rows. Click the same header again to reverse the order. Sorting only changes the rows the page has loaded. ## Search and refresh Type in **Search activities...** to filter the rows by name. The rows update a short moment after you stop typing. The rows are loaded when the page opens. To load new actions, click the refresh button beside the search box. Its tooltip reads **Refresh activities**. ## Export rows to CSV 1. Tick the box at the start of each row you want to export. 2. Click **Export selected** in the bar that shows how many rows are selected, or click **Export** in the toolbar. 3. Open the CSV file that Tarkle downloads. It has the columns Date, Action, Resource, User and Type. Only the selected rows are exported. In the Action column, the file shows the internal action name, such as file.downloaded, not the label on the screen. ## Examples of rows - **A recipient downloads a file.** The row shows **Downloaded**. Its name is the transfer's description, or its link name when the transfer has no description. The row also shows the recipient's IP address and location. - **An API token is revoked.** The row shows **Deleted** in **Action**, and the name reads Token "name" revoked. To see the views and downloads of one transfer, read [How to see if a recipient opened your transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/tracking/how-to-see-if-a-recipient-opened-your-transfer). ## Related articles - [How to see if a recipient opened your transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/tracking/how-to-see-if-a-recipient-opened-your-transfer) - [What is a Tarkle workspace?](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/what-is-a-tarkle-workspace) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/tracking/how-the-activity-page-works-in-tarkle ### How to see if a recipient opened your transfer Check the badges and the Activity section on a transfer to see whether it was viewed or downloaded. After you send a transfer, its detail page shows whether anyone opened or downloaded it. You can read this in two places: the status badges under the title, and the **Activity** section below the files. For what transfer status covers in general, see [Transfer status](https://tarkle.com/features/transfer-status). ## How to check one transfer 1. **Open Transfers.** In your workspace, open **Transfers**. 2. **Open the transfer.** Click the transfer you sent to open its detail page. 3. **Read the badges under the title.** They show **Viewed**, **Downloaded** and **Delivered** when they apply. 4. **Hover over a badge.** The tooltip gives the count and the date and time of the last view or download. 5. **Scroll to Activity.** Below **Files**, the **Activity** section lists what happened on this transfer. 6. **Read the rows.** Each row has three columns, explained below. ## What the badges mean **Viewed** shows the transfer was opened, and **Viewed ×N** appears when it was opened more than once. **Downloaded** and **Downloaded ×N** work the same way for downloads. **Delivered** shows the email was delivered. ## What the Activity columns show - **What:** the item name, then "by" the person, then the time. Hover over the time to see the exact date and time. - **Action:** what happened, such as a view or a download. - **Where:** the city and country, or the country alone, and "Unknown" when the location is not known. The row names the person by their name when Tarkle has one, otherwise by the part of their email address before the @. When neither is known, the row says **Guest**. ## When no one has opened it Until something is logged, the **Activity** section says "No one has opened this transfer yet." The section loads up to 50 entries, and you can type in the **Search activities...** box to filter the rows by item name. ## What happens next Once someone opens or downloads the transfer, click the refresh button in **Activity** to load the new rows. ## Related articles - [Understanding the transfer detail page](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/understanding-the-transfer-detail-page) - [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/tracking/how-to-see-if-a-recipient-opened-your-transfer --- # Help: Storage Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/storage ### Cloud storage for business files with Tarkle Where your files are kept in Tarkle, how to find them in the Library, and the storage limit on each plan. Your files are kept in your Tarkle workspace. This page covers where to find them, what you can do with a file, how the Bin works, and the storage limit on each plan. ## Files and file transfers Your files stay in your workspace until you move them to the Bin. A file transfer is the link you send someone so they can open the files. To start one, choose **Transfer** in a file's menu, which opens the transfer dialog for that file. For the steps, see [How to create a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer). ## Find your files in the Library The Library has pages for **Files**, **Photos**, **Videos**, **Audio**, **Documents** and **Bin**. Open [Files](/dashboard/files) to see the files in your workspace. Photos, Videos, Audio and Documents each have their own page. ## What you can do with a file Open the **File actions** menu on a file's row. It holds **Download**, **Rename**, **Move**, **Transfer** and **Move to bin**, and it may also show **Share access**. Select several files and the selection bar offers **Move**, **Smart rename**, **Download** and **Delete**. On Pro and Agency, **New version** and **Version history** let you replace a file and look at its earlier copies. [File versioning](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/file-versioning-what-it-is-and-how-it-works) explains how it works. To bring a file in from Google Drive or Dropbox, see [Import files from Google Drive or Dropbox](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/import-files-from-google-drive-or-dropbox). The Free plan includes this import. For folders, moving and starring, see [File and folder management in Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/file-and-folder-management-in-tarkle). ## Move a file to the Bin Choose **Move to bin** in a file's menu, or select files and click **Delete**. Both move the files to the Bin. A file that a recipient can still open through an active transfer is not moved to the Bin. Remove it from that transfer first. To get a file back, open **Bin** and choose **Restore** in the file's menu. Deleted items stay in the Bin for 30 days on Free and 90 days on Pro. After that, they are removed permanently. **Empty bin** removes everything in the Bin for good, and the owner and team members who can delete files see it. Note: Videos do not go to the Bin. Deleting a video removes it and its share link permanently. ## Storage limits by plan The Free plan costs nothing and needs no credit card. On Free, you get 5 GB of storage for 1 person. Files can be up to 1 GB, and deleted items are kept 30 days in the Bin. On Pro, you get 3 TB of storage and files up to 200 GB. Team members are unlimited, and deleted items are kept 90 days in the Bin. Agency includes everything in Pro, with 6 TB of storage shared by its 20 workspaces. Compare the plans on [plans and pricing](/pricing). To move your organization to Pro, follow [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro). ## Related articles - [How team storage works in Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/how-team-storage-works-in-tarkle) - [What are Files and file transfers in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/cloud-storage-vs-file-transfer-how-both-work-in-tarkle) - [How to download several files at once](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/download-several-files-at-once) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/storage/cloud-storage-for-business-files-with-tarkle ### File and folder management in Tarkle Create folders, move, star and delete files in your Tarkle library, and restore deleted items from the Bin. Your Tarkle library holds the files and folders of each workspace. This page covers the everyday actions: uploading, creating folders, moving, starring and deleting files, and what happens to deleted items. Files and folders belong to a workspace, so open [Files](/dashboard/files) in the workspace you want to work in. ## Find your files Open [Files](/dashboard/files) to see the files in the workspace. [Folders](/dashboard/folders), [Starred](/dashboard/starred) and the [Bin](/dashboard/bin) each have their own page. Click the **Name** heading to sort the list by name. ## Upload files On the Files page, click **Upload**. Choose **Upload files** to pick files from your device, or **Upload folder** to upload a whole folder. The same menu has **Import from Dropbox** and **Import from Google Drive**. Both bring files into your library without downloading them first. The import steps are in [How to import files from Google Drive or Dropbox](/help/storage/import-files-from-google-drive-or-dropbox). If the workspace has no storage left, the **Upload** button is disabled. ## Create a folder Open [Folders](/dashboard/folders) and click **Create folder**. Enter a name in the **Name** field and click **Done**. Tick **Go to folder after creating it** to open the new folder straight away. To create a folder inside another folder, open the parent folder and click **Create folder** there. The new folder is created inside it. ## Move files and folders Select the files or folders you want to move. In the bar that appears, click **Move**. Pick the destination in the folder list, using the **Search folders...** box to find it by name, and click **Done**. Owners and team members with permission to edit files can move items. ## Star files and folders Use the star on a file or folder row to mark it. Starred items are listed on [Starred](/dashboard/starred). The star belongs to the item itself, so everyone with access to the workspace sees the same stars, and removing a star removes it for everyone. ## Rename and download several files Select files and the bar shows **Smart rename** next to **Download**. [How to rename several files at once](/help/storage/how-to-rename-several-files-at-once) shows how to review the new names. **Download** gives you one ZIP for several files, as described in [How to download several files at once](/help/storage/download-several-files-at-once). ## Delete files and folders Select the items and click **Delete** in the bar, or open a file's menu and choose **Move to bin**. Tarkle shows **Moved to bin**, and the items move to the Bin. Owners and team members with permission to delete files can delete items. In the Bin, select items and click **Restore** to put them back, or **Delete forever** to remove them for good. **Empty bin** removes everything in the Bin. Items stay in the Bin for 30 days on Free and 90 days on Pro. After that they can no longer be restored. Plans are listed on [Pricing](/pricing), and the recovery window is described on [File retention and recovery](/features/recover-deleted-files). Some items stay where they are: - **A file in a transfer that is still open.** Tarkle keeps it out of the Bin until you remove it from the transfer. A transfer that is disabled or expired no longer blocks it. To stop sharing a file, see [How to delete a transfer](/help/storage/how-to-delete-a-transfer). - **A protected team folder, a system folder, or a folder an active file request uses.** Files inside a protected team folder stay where they are too. If every selected item stays, nothing moves and Tarkle shows an error. If only some stay, the rest move to the Bin. ## Team folders On Pro and Agency, [Team folders](/dashboard/team) gives a team its own folders inside the workspace. To start one, open Team folders and use the **Create team** dialog. It asks for a **Name**, an optional **Budget** and an **Access** setting. **Everyone** shares the team with the whole workspace. **Members only** limits it to the members you select. Leave **Budget** empty for no limit. [How team storage works in Tarkle](/help/storage/how-team-storage-works-in-tarkle) explains how budgets add up. Agency includes everything in Pro. Plan prices are on [Pricing](/pricing). ## What happens next Deleted items wait in the Bin until you restore them or their recovery window ends. To share a file, open its menu and choose **Transfer**. [Share files by link](/features/transfer-files-by-link) explains how one link can hold files and folders. ## Related articles - [File versioning: what it is and how it works](/help/storage/file-versioning-what-it-is-and-how-it-works) - [How to upload a new version of a file and restore an earlier one](/help/storage/upload-new-file-version-restore-earlier) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/storage/file-and-folder-management-in-tarkle ### File versioning: what it is and how it works Tarkle keeps the earlier copy when you replace a file on Pro, and shows it in Version history. When you replace a file in Tarkle with a newer copy, Tarkle can keep the earlier copy as an earlier version. Any transfer that includes the file starts delivering the new version. To replace a file step by step, see [How to upload a new version of a file and restore an earlier one](/help/storage/upload-new-file-version-restore-earlier). ## What a version is When you save a new version, the copy you replaced becomes an earlier version of the same file, and the new copy becomes the current version. For example, if you upload a new Report.pdf over an existing Report.pdf, the old copy is kept as an earlier version and the new copy is what the file shows. Earlier versions are private to your workspace. They appear in Version history, count toward your storage, and are never shared through transfers. ## Which plans have file versioning File versioning is available on Pro, see [Tarkle plans and pricing](/pricing). Agency includes everything in Pro, so it has file versioning too. On Free, the **New version** and **Version history** items in a file's menu show an Upgrade badge and open the upgrade dialog. Tarkle also refuses version uploads, Version history and restores on Free with the message "File versioning is a Pro feature." To move your organization to Pro, see [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro). ## When Tarkle creates a new version On Pro, a new version is created in one of three ways: you upload a file with the same name as a file in your Library, you choose **New version** in a file's menu, or you add a file to a new transfer. ### Upload a file with the same name When you upload files to a folder, Tarkle compares each file with the files already in that folder. Names are compared without capital letters and without extra spaces, and the extension is part of the name. So Report.pdf and report.PDF are the same name, but Report.pdf and Report.docx are not. Accents are not ignored, so Résumé.pdf and Resume.pdf are different names. On Pro, Tarkle then does the following: - If the content is different and the file is not in a transfer, the upload is saved as a new version by itself. - If the file is in a transfer, Tarkle asks first, unless **Update transfers automatically** is on (see Transfers and versions below). - If the content is identical, Tarkle asks. It detects identical content for files up to 100 MB. A larger file with the same size as the current one also asks. - If the name is similar, Tarkle asks. A name is similar when no file has the same name, but exactly one file in the folder has the same extension and the same name once common copy markers are removed. Markers include (1), copy, v2, final, latest, updated, revised and edited. So Report final.docx is similar to Report.docx. The default is a separate file, and it becomes a version only if you choose **Replace**. - If more than one file in the folder has that name, or the same name appears twice in one upload, the file is saved as a separate file and renamed with (2). On Free, uploads are not compared with existing files. ### Choose New version in a file's menu Open the file's menu, choose **New version**, and pick the file. The new file must have the same extension as the file it replaces. Otherwise Tarkle shows "A new version must be a .pdf file. To change the file type, upload it separately, or replace the file in the transfer." The file is replaced without the review screen. If the file is in a transfer, Tarkle asks first, as described in Transfers and versions below. ### Add a file to a transfer When you add files to a new transfer on Pro, Tarkle compares them with the top level of your Library and opens the review screen only when a decision is needed. A folder you upload that has the same name as a folder already in your library is handled the same way: Tarkle asks whether to Replace it with the new version or upload as new folder. ## The review screen When Tarkle needs a decision, it shows a review screen. Its headline reads "This file is already in your library." when one file matches, and "files are already in your library." when several do. When the match is a similar name, it reads "This file looks like an update to a file already in your library." For each file, the review shows the size of the new file and of the existing one, and when the existing one was added. If the existing file is in a transfer, it shows how many transfers use it and that replacing updates them for recipients. If the content is identical, it says "This version looks identical to the existing one." Choose **Replace** or **Upload as new** for each file. The confirm button stays off until every file has a choice. It reads **Continue**, or **Done** when nothing is left to upload. **Back** returns to the previous screen. ## Version history Choose **Version history** in a file's menu. The dialog lists the current version, marked **Current**, and each earlier version with its size, the date it was replaced and how long it is kept. For an earlier version, the dialog offers these buttons: - **Preview**, when the file can be opened in the preview. - **Download**, to download that version. - **Restore**, to make that version the current version. - **Delete**, to move that version to the bin. Restoring makes the chosen version the current version. The version you replace is kept as an earlier version, and the restored copy counts toward your storage. From the bin you can choose **Restore from bin**, or **Delete for good**, which removes the version and its stored file now. Delete for good cannot be undone. ## Transfers and versions A transfer serves the current version of each file in it, so a new version changes what recipients get. When a new version would change a file that a transfer uses, Tarkle asks first. From a file's menu, the question is **Update the transfer too?** It says how many transfers use the file, that the new version will be what recipients get from now on, and that anyone who already downloaded the file keeps their copy. Choose **Upload and update transfer** to continue, or **Cancel** to close the dialog without uploading. Restoring a version works the same way. When the file is in a transfer, the restore confirmation says that recipients get the restored version from now on. To skip the question, turn on **Update transfers automatically** on the workspace's Settings page, in the General part. It is available on Pro only and is off by default. When it is on, a transfer that uses a file is updated without asking. ## Storage and how long versions are kept On Pro, an earlier version is kept for 90 days from the moment it is replaced. The expiry date does not change if the plan changes later. When the date passes, Tarkle deletes the stored copy. Earlier versions count toward your storage until they expire. If a new version would go over your storage limit, the upload stops with the message listed below. ## Messages you might see | Message | What it means | | --- | --- | | File versioning is a Pro feature. | Your organization is on Free. | | This file is used by a transfer. Confirm the transfer update, or turn on automatic transfer updates in Settings > General > File settings. | The new version would change a file in a transfer, and the update was not confirmed. | | Not enough storage for this version. Older versions count toward your storage until they expire. | The new version would go over your storage limit. | | This file is identical to the current version, so no new version was created. | The uploaded file has the same content as the current version. | ## Related articles - [How to upload a new version of a file and restore an earlier one](/help/storage/upload-new-file-version-restore-earlier) - [File versions](/features/file-versions) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/storage/file-versioning-what-it-is-and-how-it-works ### How team storage works in Tarkle Give a Team a storage budget out of your workspace storage, and see how budgets add up and what each Team uses. Team storage sets aside part of your workspace storage for one Team, such as Marketing or Finance. A budget does not add storage. It is taken from the storage your organization's plan gives the workspace. This article shows how to set, change and remove a budget, and how to see what each Team uses. ## Which plans have Teams and budgets Team folders and storage are included on Pro, and Agency includes everything in Pro. See [pricing](https://tarkle.com/pricing) for what each plan includes. On Agency, you can also set a limit on each client workspace's storage, as explained in [Assign storage to a client workspace](/help/agency-plan/assign-storage-to-a-client-workspace). On the Free plan, the Team page shows an upgrade prompt instead of your Teams, so you cannot create a Team. ## Who can create a Team Only workspace Owners and Admins can create a Team. For other roles, the **New team** button is disabled, and hovering over it shows "Only workspace Owners and Admins can create teams." The **Edit**, **Assign storage** and **Delete** actions in a Team's row menu are checked on the server too. If your role does not allow one of them, Tarkle shows a message such as "You do not have permission to edit this team." ## Set a Team's budget 1. Open the **Team** page in your workspace at [Team](/dashboard/team). 2. Select **New team**. 3. In the **Create team** dialog, enter a **Name**. It is required. 4. In **Budget**, type an amount and choose **GB** or **TB**. 5. Select **Create team**. Under **Budget**, the dialog shows how much storage is still available to allocate. Leave **Budget** empty and the Team has no limit, so it shows **Unlimited** in the **Budget** column. The **Access** field chooses **Everyone** for the whole workspace or **Members only**, and with **Members only** you pick the members. To change a budget later, open the three-dot menu on the Team's row and select **Edit**. Change **Budget** and select **Save changes**. The same dialog also changes the Team's name, description, icon and access. You can also select **Assign storage**, which is at the top of the Team page and in the row menu. Pick the **Team**, enter the **Budget** and select **Assign**. Before you confirm, the dialog shows **Current**, **After this change** and **Workspace storage left**. This dialog always sets a fixed amount, so to go back to no limit, use **Edit** and leave **Budget** empty. The **Assign storage** button at the top stays off until you create a Team. ## How budgets add up Tarkle does not let the budgets of your Teams add up to more than the storage still available to allocate. If a budget is too large, Tarkle refuses it: - In **Create team**, it shows "That budget is more than the [amount] still available to allocate. Lower it, or leave it empty for no limit." - In **Assign storage**, the **Assign** button stays off and the dialog shows "This budget is more than the storage left in your workspace." A budget also cannot go below what the Team already uses. In **Assign storage**, Tarkle shows "The budget cannot be reduced below current usage." after you select **Assign**. In **Edit**, the same case shows "Unable to update team." To lower the budget, first free up space in the Team's folders. For more storage for the whole workspace, see [How to add more storage to your Tarkle workspace](/help/billing-subscription/how-to-add-more-storage-to-your-tarkle-workspace). ## Delete a Team Open the three-dot menu on the Team's row and select **Delete**. In the **Delete team?** dialog, select **Delete team**. Deleting a Team releases its storage budget and removes Team access. Its files and folders are kept and returned to workspace storage. ## See what a Team uses The Team page lists each Team in a table with the columns **Team**, **Budget** and **Assigned to**. Under each Team's name, a line shows **Everyone** or the number of members, the space the Team has used and the date it was created. The **Budget** column shows the amount, or **Unlimited** when there is no limit. **Assigned to** shows up to three avatars, then **+N** for any more members. Above the table, the **Team usage** card shows the space used across your Teams, split into **Documents**, **Videos**, **Audio** and **Photos**. It also shows **Transfers** and **Requests**, each with its total and its count for the last 30 days. ## Related articles - [Cloud storage for business files with Tarkle](/help/storage/cloud-storage-for-business-files-with-tarkle) - [Assign storage to a client workspace](/help/agency-plan/assign-storage-to-a-client-workspace) - [Team storage for teams and clients](/features/team-storage-for-teams-and-clients) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/storage/how-team-storage-works-in-tarkle ### How to delete a transfer Delete a transfer from its row menu on the Transfers list, which runs at once with no confirmation step. Delete a transfer when you no longer need it. You delete it from its row on the Transfers list, and the delete runs as soon as you choose it. ## Delete a transfer 1. Open **[Transfers](/dashboard/transfers)** and find the transfer. 2. Click the **three-dot** button on the transfer's row. 3. Click the **red item** at the bottom of the menu. It deletes the transfer. Delete runs at once. Tarkle does not show a confirmation dialog, so check the transfer before you click. If you still need any files from it, download or save copies of them first. Note: To turn a transfer off without deleting it, choose **Pause transfer** in the same menu. [How to pause or disable a transfer in Tarkle](/help/file-sharing/how-to-pause-or-disable-a-transfer-in-tarkle) explains the paused state. [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer) explains the transfer settings. ## What happens next When the delete works, Tarkle shows the message **Transfer deleted!** and the Transfers list refreshes. You stay on the list. If the delete fails, Tarkle shows **Error deleting transfer**, and you can choose the delete item again from the same row menu. If the transfer is a feedback board, only an owner or an admin of the workspace can delete it. For other team members the delete fails, and Tarkle shows **Error deleting transfer**. The [roles](/features/roles-and-permissions) page lists the four roles, Owner, Admin, Member and Viewer. If you need to share files again, start with [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer). ## Related articles - [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) - [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer) - [How to limit a transfer to one client organization](/help/access-control/how-to-limit-a-transfer-to-one-client-organization) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/storage/how-to-delete-a-transfer ### How to download several files at once Select files in Files, click Download, and get one ZIP, or the file itself when you pick only one. Use the bar that appears when you select files in Files to download more than one file in a single step. Tarkle packs two or more files into one ZIP, so you save once instead of one file at a time. ## Steps 1. **Open Files.** Go to Files, or open any folder. 2. **Tick the files.** Tick the checkbox on each row or card. In list view you can also tick **Select all** in the table header. 3. **Click Download.** The bar shows the count, for example "3 selected", next to **Move**, **Smart rename** and **Delete**. 4. **Choose where to save.** Your browser's save dialog opens. For several files it suggests the name archive.zip, which you can change. 5. **Wait for the panel to finish.** A panel titled **Downloading files** shows the progress, then **Download complete!**, and a "Downloaded!" message appears. If you close the save dialog without saving, nothing is downloaded and the panel shows "Save cancelled by user." ## What arrives Two or more selected files arrive as one ZIP file. If you tick a folder, it goes into the ZIP as a folder, and the folders inside it keep their structure. A single selected file downloads directly, with no ZIP. A file under 50 MB downloads straight away. For a file of 50 MB or more, your browser asks where to save it first. This works in Chrome, Edge and Opera. In other browsers you see the message "File is too large for direct download in this browser". ## Files that could not be downloaded If Tarkle could not fetch a file, the other files still download. The ZIP then holds an extra text file named _files-not-downloaded.txt at its top level, and only when at least one file was skipped. It starts with how many files are missing, then lists each one with the reason. You also see the message "Downloaded, but N file(s) could not be downloaded", and the panel says how many were skipped. To get the missing files, select them again and click **Download**. ## What happens next The ZIP, or the single file you picked, is saved where you chose. Open the ZIP to find your files and folders. ## Related articles - [File and folder management in Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/file-and-folder-management-in-tarkle) - [How to import files from Google Drive or Dropbox](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/import-files-from-google-drive-or-dropbox) - [How to upload a new version of a file and restore an earlier one](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/upload-new-file-version-restore-earlier) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/storage/download-several-files-at-once ### How to import files from Google Drive or Dropbox Copy files from Google Drive or Dropbox into your Tarkle library from the Upload menu, with no download first. You can copy files from Google Drive or Dropbox into your Tarkle library without downloading them first. Tarkle copies each file you pick, and you start the import from the **Upload** menu in your library. Import is included on the Free plan. Your organization's plan sets the largest file you can import: 1 GB per file on Free, and up to 200 GB per file on Pro and Agency. For each plan's limits, see [Tarkle pricing](/pricing). ## Import from Google Drive 1. Open your library at [Files](/dashboard/files) and go to the folder you want the files in. If you are not in a folder, the files go to the top of your library. 2. Click **Upload**, then click **Import from Google Drive**. If Tarkle is already connected to Google Drive, Google's picker opens straight away. 3. If Tarkle is not connected yet, Google asks for access in the same tab. When Google returns you to Tarkle, click **Upload** and **Import from Google Drive** again to open the picker. 4. In Google's picker, tick one or more files. 5. Tarkle copies the files. Each file has its own row in the upload panel while it is copied. Google's picker does not let you select folders. Google Docs, Sheets, Slides and Drawings are converted to Word, Excel, PowerPoint and PNG files. Google exports are limited to 10 MB, so a larger Google file cannot be converted and is not added. Google Forms and other Google items that are not files cannot be imported. Google Drive files over 100 MiB are copied in parts. Keep this window open until they finish. From the Upload menu, Tarkle does not show an "Added" message for Google Drive files. Progress shows in the upload panel instead. Files that were already imported into this workspace are skipped, and a notice says how many were skipped. If a file cannot be added, a notice lists its name and the reason. ## Import from Dropbox 1. Open [Files](/dashboard/files) and go to the folder you want the files in. 2. Click **Upload**, then click **Import from Dropbox**. The **Import from Dropbox** window opens. 3. If Dropbox is not connected, click **Connect Dropbox** and allow access on Dropbox. If the connection has expired, click **Reconnect Dropbox**. 4. Find your files. Click a folder to open it, or type in **Search Dropbox...**. Search looks through all of Dropbox and starts after two characters. 5. Select files. Tick the files you want, or click **Select all files** to select every file on screen. 6. Click **Add from Dropbox (N)**, where N is the number of files you selected. When a file matches one already in your library, the button reads **Review and add (N)** instead. The review says "This file is already in your library." For each file, choose **Replace** or **Upload as new**. **Continue** stays off until each file that needs a choice has one. - **Replace** adds the Dropbox file as the newest version of the file in your library and keeps the earlier version. Replace needs the Pro plan, because [file versioning](/help/storage/file-versioning-what-it-is-and-how-it-works) is a Pro feature. On Pro, the earlier version is kept for 90 days and counts toward your storage. If the file is in a file transfer, replacing it updates the transfer for recipients. On Free, a file you choose to replace is added as a separate copy, and Tarkle shows a notice that it could not be saved as a new version. - **Upload as new** adds the Dropbox file as a separate file in your library. Dropbox files over 100 MiB are copied in parts, the same as Google Drive files. The copy runs from the open page, so if you close it, the import is listed under **Unfinished imports** in the **Import from Dropbox** window. Open the window again and click **Resume** to continue, or **Discard** to remove it. When a Dropbox import finishes, Tarkle shows a message such as "Added 2 files from Dropbox". ## What you can pick You pick files, not folders. In Dropbox, click a folder to open it, then tick the files inside. Tarkle does not recreate the folder structure from Google Drive or Dropbox: each file goes into the folder you chose in your library. To keep a structure, create the folders in your library first, then import into each one. [File and folder management in Tarkle](/help/storage/file-and-folder-management-in-tarkle) explains how to create and move folders. Each file is checked before it is copied. A file larger than your plan allows, or one that does not fit in the storage you have left, is not added, and the result shows the reason. ## What happens next Imported files appear in the folder you were in when you clicked **Upload**, or at the top of your library if you were not in a folder. They count toward your storage like any other file. ## When import is not available Tarkle does not list **Import from Dropbox** or **Import from Google Drive** in the Upload menu for some accounts. The **Upload** button is unavailable when your storage is full. If Tarkle shows the message "you do not have permission to add files here", the file is not added, so ask someone who manages your workspace to check your access. ## Related articles - [How to upload a new version of a file and restore an earlier one](/help/storage/upload-new-file-version-restore-earlier) - [Import from Google Drive and Dropbox](/features/import-from-google-drive-and-dropbox) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/storage/import-files-from-google-drive-or-dropbox ### How to rename several files at once Use Smart rename to give a batch of files clear names, after you review every new name. Smart rename gives a batch of files in your library clear names in one run. You see every new name before anything changes, so you stay in control of the result. Use it when uploads arrive as IMG_4821.jpg, scan-00381920.pdf or a string of random characters. ## Steps 1. **Open Files.** Go to the list of files in your workspace. 2. **Select the files.** Tick the checkbox next to each file, up to 200 files per run. 3. **Click Smart rename.** A **Smart rename** dialog opens and builds a preview. 4. **Review the new names.** Each row shows the old name crossed out and the proposed name below it. 5. **Untick any file you want to leave alone.** Every row is ticked by default. 6. **Click Rename N files.** N is the number of ticked rows. Nothing changes until you click **Rename N files**. Click **Cancel** to close the dialog without changing anything. After you rename, a message confirms how many files were renamed. ## What the new names look like Rule-based names follow this pattern: your workspace name, a short label taken from the old name, and a date and time in UTC, for example `Acme Studio - Brand guidelines - 2025-03-14 0930 UTC.pdf`. The file extension stays the same. If nothing meaningful is left of the old name, the label is the type of file, such as PDF, Photo or Video. Smart rename proposes a new name only for names that look machine-made or unclear, such as very long names, names with long runs of digits, or generic names like "IMG" or "screenshot". If a name already reads well, the file is left out of the preview. When none of the selected files need a new name, the dialog says they already have clear names. If a new name is already used in the same folder, Tarkle adds a number before the extension, such as " 2". ## Improve with AI Tick **Improve with AI** in the dialog to have AI write the labels for files whose names were flagged as unclear. The preview reloads with the new labels, and you review them the same way. Improve with AI is available on Pro and Agency. On other plans the checkbox is disabled. See [pricing](https://tarkle.com/pricing) for the plans. The rule-based names work on every plan. ## Good to know - **200 files per run.** If you select more than 200 files, only the first 200 are included. Run Smart rename again for the rest. - **Original names are kept.** Only the name changes. Tarkle saves the first original name of each file. - **Folders are ignored.** If you tick folders along with files, only the files are renamed. If you tick only folders, the **Smart rename** button does not appear. - **Who can use it.** The workspace owner, and team members whose role can edit files. - **Activity log.** Each rename is recorded in the activity log with the previous name. ## What happens next The dialog closes, your selection clears and the Files list refreshes with the new names. ## Related articles - [Folders and library](https://tarkle.com/features/folders-and-library) - [AI descriptions and file names](https://tarkle.com/features/ai-descriptions-and-file-names) - [Activity log](https://tarkle.com/features/activity-log) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/storage/how-to-rename-several-files-at-once ### How to upload a new version of a file and restore an earlier one Upload a new version of a file, see its version history and restore an earlier version when you need it. Add a corrected file as a new version of the file it replaces. The earlier copy stays in the file's version history, where you can go back to it. To learn how versions are kept, read [File versioning: what it is and how it works](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/file-versioning-what-it-is-and-how-it-works). File versions are available on [Pro](/pricing), and on Agency, which includes everything in Pro. On Free, **New version** and **Version history** show an **Upgrade** badge in the file's menu. ## How to upload a new version 1. **Open Files.** Go to [Files](/dashboard/files) and find the file in its folder. 2. **Open the file's menu.** Click **File actions**, the three dots, on the file's row. 3. **Click New version.** Pick the corrected file from your computer. The new file must have the same extension as the file it replaces, so a .pdf can only replace a .pdf. 4. **Answer the transfer question, if it appears.** If the file is in a [file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer), Tarkle asks **Update the transfer too?** Click **Upload and update transfer** to save the version. Recipients get the new version from then on. Click **Cancel** to stop, and nothing is uploaded. If the file is not in a transfer, Tarkle uploads it as soon as you pick it. The question does not appear when **Update transfers automatically** is on, as described below. A file with another extension is refused with the message "A new version must be a .pdf file. To change the file type, upload it separately, or replace the file in the transfer." Tarkle also refuses an empty file, and a file larger than your plan allows. Pro and Agency support files up to 200 GB. ## How to see the version history 1. **Open the file's menu.** Click **File actions** on the file's row in [Files](/dashboard/files). 2. **Click Version history.** A window titled **Version history** opens with the file name under it. The version in use is listed first with the label **Current**. Each earlier version shows its number, its size, the date it was replaced and how long it is kept, such as **Expires in 12 days**. Earlier versions are kept for 90 days on Pro and Agency, counted from the day they are replaced. When a version expires, it is removed from the list. On an earlier version you see **Preview**, **Download**, **Restore** and **Delete**. **Preview** appears only for file types that Tarkle can show in the browser. **Restore** and **Delete** need permission to edit files. ## How to restore an earlier version 1. **Open Version history.** Use **File actions** on the file's row, then click **Version history**. 2. **Find the version.** Look for its number and the date it was replaced. 3. **Click Restore.** Use the **Restore** button on that version's row. 4. **Confirm.** In the window titled **Restore version N?**, click **Restore**. Restoring does not delete anything. The restored version becomes the current version, saved as a new version, and the present current version is kept as an earlier version for 90 days on Pro and Agency. The copy counts toward your storage. If the file is in a transfer, the window says so, and recipients get the restored version from then on. When the restore finishes, Tarkle shows "Version N was restored as the new current version." ## How to delete an earlier version 1. **Open Version history.** Use **File actions** on the file's row, then click **Version history**. 2. **Click Delete.** Use the **Delete** button on that version's row, then click **Delete** in the window. The version moves to the bin and is marked **Deleted version**. You can restore it with **Restore from bin** until its expiry date, and it counts toward your storage until then. **Delete for good** removes the version and its stored file now. It cannot be undone. ## Update transfers automatically To skip the transfer question, turn on **Update transfers automatically**. Open **Settings**, then **General**, then **File settings**. The switch saves as soon as you change it, and changing it needs the settings permission. It is off by default. When it is on, a new version of a file in a transfer goes straight through, and the transfer link serves the new version without asking. On Free, the switch is locked and shows a Pro badge. ## What happens next Anyone who already downloaded the file keeps their copy, so tell them when a correction matters. Earlier versions are private to your workspace and are never shared through transfers. ## Related articles - [File versioning: what it is and how it works](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/file-versioning-what-it-is-and-how-it-works) - [File and folder management in Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/file-and-folder-management-in-tarkle) - [File versions](https://tarkle.com/features/file-versions) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/storage/upload-new-file-version-restore-earlier ### Move storage between workspaces Move unused plan storage between two workspaces you own on the Pro plan, one move per workspace. If you own more than one workspace on the Pro plan, you can move unused plan storage from one of them to another. Only the storage moves: your files stay where they are. Use this when one workspace has storage it does not need and another workspace needs more. For example, if workspace A and workspace B each have a 3 TB limit and 1 TB of A's storage is free to move, you can move that 1 TB to B. A then has a 2 TB limit and B has a 4 TB limit. ## What you need - You must be the owner of both workspaces. Only the owner can move storage. - Both workspaces must be on the Pro plan. Workspaces on other plans cannot take part. - The workspace you move storage from has a storage limit of 3 TB or more. - Your account has an authenticator app or a passkey turned on. To turn one on, open [Account](/dashboard/account) and go to the multi-factor section, or follow [How to turn on two-step sign-in or a passkey](/help/account/how-to-turn-on-two-step-sign-in-or-a-passkey). ## How much you can move The amount you can move is the storage in the workspace that is not in use. Storage used by files, and storage a Team has reserved or uses, stays with the workspace. Read [How team storage works in Tarkle](/help/storage/how-team-storage-works-in-tarkle) to learn more about Team storage. Storage granted to a workspace, such as storage added by Tarkle support or redeemed referral rewards, stays where it is and cannot be moved. Amounts are whole GB, and the smallest move is 1 GB. In the **Amount** field you can choose GB or TB. 1 TB is 1,000 GB. The amount cannot be more than the amount available. ## One move per workspace Each workspace can send or receive storage once. After a move, neither workspace can take part in another move, so a move cannot be sent back. ## How to move storage 1. Open the Billing page of the workspace you want to move storage from. In the **Storage** row, select **Move**. 2. In the **Move storage** dialog, confirm it is you. If you have an authenticator app, enter its 6-digit code in **Authenticator code** and select **Confirm**. If you have a passkey, select **Use a passkey**. If neither is turned on, the dialog says "Turn on an authenticator app or a passkey to move storage." Select **Set up** to open your account settings. If the code does not work, the dialog shows "That code did not work. Try the next one." 3. Open **Move to** and choose the workspace that receives the storage. Your other workspaces are listed. Workspaces marked **Not eligible** cannot be chosen. Closed, deleted and suspended workspaces are not listed. 4. Enter the amount in **Amount** and choose GB or TB. The amount available appears as a badge at the top of the form. 5. Select **Move storage**. The dialog then shows how much storage moved and the new storage for both workspaces. Select **Done** to close it. ## Your receipt Tarkle emails the address on your account with the subject "You moved 1 TB of storage to Workspace B", for example. The email says only the storage moved, and it lists the new storage for both workspaces. Its **View receipt** button opens [Invoices](/dashboard/settings/billing/invoices). ## Why is Move greyed out? The **Move** badge is greyed out when: - the workspace is not on a paid plan, - its storage limit is below 3 TB, - it has already sent or received storage. Inside the dialog you may see these messages instead: - This workspace has already used its one storage move. - There is no plan storage in this workspace that can be moved. Granted and referral storage stays where it is. - The dialog says there is no other workspace on the Pro plan to move storage to. - This workspace has unlimited storage, so there is nothing to move. ## Related articles - [How to turn on two-step sign-in or a passkey](/help/account/how-to-turn-on-two-step-sign-in-or-a-passkey) - [How team storage works in Tarkle](/help/storage/how-team-storage-works-in-tarkle) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/storage/move-storage-between-workspaces ### Store and share audio files in Tarkle Upload audio to your library, then share it in an audio transfer with a waveform player and free or paid downloads. Tarkle keeps your audio files in your library. An audio transfer shares them on a player with a waveform for each track, where listeners can play the tracks, download them for free, or pay before they download. This page covers the library, the player and the download settings, and links to the step-by-step articles. ## Upload audio to your library Open the [Audio page](/dashboard/audio) in your workspace. Click **Upload**, then **Upload files**, and choose your files. The file picker accepts MP3, WAV, OGG, FLAC, AAC and M4A files. Audio files use the storage of your organization's plan. Free allows 5 GB of storage and files up to 1 GB each. Pro allows 3 TB of storage and files up to 200 GB each. [Pricing](/pricing) lists every plan. ## Albums and playlists The Audio page has three tabs: **Tracks**, **Albums** and **Playlists**. Star a track from its row to mark it. On **Albums** or **Playlists**, click **Create album** or **Create playlist**, then add tracks to it. Deleting an album or a playlist leaves its audio files in your library. ## Share audio in an audio transfer Open the [transfers page](/dashboard/transfers) and create an audio transfer in the transfer dialog. [How to create an audio transfer](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-an-audio-transfer) walks through each step. Each transfer has its own link and its own settings. Listeners see each audio track as a separate row in the player, with its waveform. They can pick any track, and when a track ends the next one starts. After the last track the list starts again from the first. The player is drawn in your workspace's accent color. When you create the transfer, choose what listeners can do. Tick **Allow download** to let anyone who opens the page download the tracks for free. Tick **Charge for download** to have listeners pay first. If you tick neither, listeners can play the tracks but cannot download them. ## Free downloads With **Allow download** ticked, listeners download the tracks without paying. **Download all** saves all the tracks as one ZIP file. ## Paid downloads Charging for downloads needs three things: - A Pro plan. Paid transfers are a Pro feature. [Pricing](/pricing) lists the plans. - Stripe connected to your workspace under **Settings**, then **Integrations** on [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations). [Share files and get paid with Stripe](/help/integrations/share-files-and-get-paid-with-stripe) explains the connection. - **Enable paid transfers** turned on under **Settings**, then **General**, then **File settings**. The switch is off by default. When you tick **Charge for download**, set the price, the currency and the preview length in seconds. The dialog starts the preview at 30 seconds, and the preview length applies to every track in the transfer. Listeners hear each track up to that length, then the payment prompt opens. After a payment, they can download the tracks. You can also set a sales limit. When the limit is reached, downloads stop. Payments go to the Stripe account you connected. A paid transfer cannot use a password, an expiry date, an email check, view only or burn after read. Tarkle refuses to create a paid transfer with one of these set. [Why can't I turn on paid transfers?](/help/troubleshooting/why-cant-i-turn-on-paid-transfers) explains each message you may see when you try to charge. ## What happens next Once the transfer is shared, [What is an audio transfer page?](/help/video-transfer/what-is-an-audio-transfer-page) describes what listeners see when they open the link. ## Related articles - [How to create an audio transfer](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-an-audio-transfer) - [How to charge for access to a transfer](/help/selling-files/charge-for-access-create-paid-transfers) - [How to embed an audio transfer on your website](/help/video-transfer/how-to-embed-an-audio-transfer-on-your-website) - [Video hosting for businesses with Tarkle](/help/storage/video-hosting-for-businesses-with-tarkle) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/storage/audio-and-podcast-hosting-with-tarkle ### Video hosting for businesses with Tarkle Upload videos to your Tarkle library and share each one on its own branded video page, with the plan limits. Tarkle keeps your videos in the workspace library. To share a video, you create a [video transfer](/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle). Each video transfer has its own link, and the person you send it to opens that link in a browser to watch the video on a player page. This article covers how to upload a video, how to manage videos in the library, and which settings the player page follows. ## Upload a video Videos are uploaded from the Videos page. Tarkle accepts MP4, WebM, MOV, AVI, or MKV files. 1. Open [Videos](/dashboard/videos). 2. Click **Upload video**. 3. Click **browse** in the dialog and choose a video file. The upload starts as soon as the file is chosen. 4. Wait until the dialog shows **Video is uploaded and ready**. 5. Click **Done**. When you click **Done**, Tarkle creates a video transfer for the video with a public link. The video stays in your library. Free supports uploads and transfers up to 1 GB each. Pro and Agency support files up to 200 GB. Storage is 5 GB on Free, 3 TB on Pro and 6 TB on Agency. See [plans and pricing](/pricing) for what each plan includes. ## Manage videos in the library The Videos page lists your videos, and the **Search videos...** box searches only videos. Select one or more videos and a bar appears with **Move**, **Smart rename**, **Download** and **Delete**. **Move** puts the selected videos into a folder, and **Smart rename** renames them. **Download** starts a download of them. **Delete** moves them to the [Bin](/dashboard/bin). **Move** and **Smart rename** need edit permission, and **Delete** needs delete permission. Workspace owners have all three. Deleted videos wait in the Bin for 30 days on Free and 90 days on Pro. ## Share a video The player page shows the video with your workspace logo and accent color, and with the title and description of the transfer. On Free, the page shows the Powered by Tarkle backlink. On Pro, you can turn it off with **Show Powered by Tarkle** in the Backlink card of the workspace's branding settings. On Agency, the backlink is replaced by your agency name. For the feature as a whole, see [video and audio sharing](/features/video-and-audio-sharing). A video transfer can also have: - a cover image, which the player shows before the video plays - a button with a label and a link of your choice, which opens in a new tab - autoplay, which starts the video when the page loads - an expiry date, after which the link stops opening - public, organization, or password access - download access set to listen only, free download, or paid download A watermark can be added only to a listen only transfer, because a transfer cannot have both a watermark and downloads. Casting and Picture-in-Picture are on by default, and they are switched off for paid downloads. A transfer with several videos plays them in one player. ## Charge for a video Paid download is a Pro feature, and Agency includes everything in Pro. Three things must be in place before you can charge for a video: 1. Your organization is on Pro or Agency. 2. Stripe is connected on the [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) page under Settings. 3. **Enable paid transfers** is switched on in your workspace settings. It stays locked on Free. A paid transfer cannot have a password, an expiry date, or view-only access, because payment is the access check. If a message stops you from charging for a transfer, [Why can't I turn on paid transfers?](/help/troubleshooting/why-cant-i-turn-on-paid-transfers) names the step that is missing. ## Related articles - [What is included with Tarkle Free?](/help/billing-subscription/what-is-included-with-tarkle-free) - [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/storage/video-hosting-for-businesses-with-tarkle ### What are Files and file transfers in Tarkle? Files holds your stored files, and a file transfer is the link you send so someone can open them. Files is where your files are stored in your workspace. A file transfer is the link you send so that someone can open the files you chose. This page explains how the two work together and what each plan allows. ## Files holds your files Your files are kept in [Files](/dashboard/files), where you can organize them in folders. Deleted files go to the [Bin](/dashboard/bin), which is described below. ## A file transfer sends them To send files, open the **New Transfer** modal in [Transfers](/dashboard/transfers) and select File transfer. [How to create a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) walks through the steps. When the transfer is created, copy its link and send it to your recipient. ## How a transfer uses your files A transfer holds files and folders from Files, and external links such as Google Drive, Figma or Dropbox links. To add files you already stored, choose Existing in the New Transfer modal, then search and select them. A transfer points to each file it includes, so one file can be part of more than one transfer. ## Choices for each transfer On the last step, tick Password protected to set a password, or tick Expiration date and pick a day. Setting either is optional, and the latest day you can pick is three years from today. [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer) shows both steps. Paid transfers cannot use a password, burn after read, email gating, view only or an expiration date, because payment is the way in. [Paid transfers](https://tarkle.com/features/paid-transfers) explains how you charge for access. ## Plan limits | | Free | Pro | Agency | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Storage in Files | 5 GB | 3 TB | 6 TB | | Largest file or transfer | 1 GB | 200 GB | 200 GB | | Transfers per month | 15 | No monthly limit | No monthly limit | | Deleted files kept in the Bin | 30 days | 90 days | 90 days | Free allows 15 transfers a month. Pro and Agency have no monthly transfer limit. Agency includes everything in Pro. Compare the plans on [pricing](/pricing). ## Deleted files go to the Bin Deleted items wait in the [Bin](/dashboard/bin) for 30 days on Free and 90 days on Pro. In the Bin, select files and click Restore to bring them back, or Delete forever to delete them permanently. Empty bin deletes the items in the Bin. Only workspace owners, and team members allowed to delete files, see Delete forever and Empty bin. ## What happens next Once a transfer is live, check the badges and the Activity section on a transfer to see whether it was viewed or downloaded. ## Related articles - [How to delete a transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/how-to-delete-a-transfer) - [How to see if a recipient opened your transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/tracking/how-to-see-if-a-recipient-opened-your-transfer) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/storage/cloud-storage-vs-file-transfer-how-both-work-in-tarkle --- # Help: Team and clients Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/team-and-clients ### Contacts and organizations: how they work together How contacts and organizations connect, how each one is created, and what happens when you delete them. The people you share files with are saved as **contacts**. When several contacts belong to the same company or client, you can group them into an **organization**. This article explains how the two connect, how each one is created, and what happens when you delete them. ## What a contact and an organization are A contact is one person, identified by their email address. Contacts are kept per workspace, so each workspace has its own list. An organization is a named group, such as a company or a client, that holds one or more contacts. A contact does not have to belong to an organization. ## Create a contact in an organization Organizations are available on Pro and Agency. Agency includes everything in Pro, so both plans can use them. On the Free plan, the Business contact? checkbox is shown with a Pro badge and cannot be ticked, and the Organizations tab opens an upgrade window instead. See [plans and prices](/pricing) for what each plan includes. To create a contact that belongs to an organization: 1. Open [Contacts](/dashboard/contacts) and click **Contact**. 2. Enter the **First name** and the **Email**. 3. Tick **Business contact?** 4. Enter the **Organization name**. 5. Click **Create contact**. The organization name is matched without regard to capital letters. If an organization with that name already exists in the workspace, the contact joins it. If it does not, Tarkle creates the organization with that name. If the email already belongs to a contact in the workspace, that contact is used and added to the organization. The **Organization** column on the Contacts tab shows the organization of each contact. ## How transfers create contacts When you send a transfer by email to an address that is not yet a contact in the workspace, Tarkle creates a plain contact for it. An address that is already a contact is reused. The email gate works the same way: a visitor who enters an email to open an [email-gated transfer](/help/access-control/email-gated-file-transfers-collect-leads-before-sharing-file) is saved as a contact. ## The Contacts area The Contacts area has three tabs: **Contacts**, **Attendees** and **Organizations**. The **Contacts** tab lists every contact in the workspace. The **Attendees** tab lists only the contacts marked as attendees, and it has no button to add a contact. The **Organizations** tab lists the workspace's organizations, except one-person organizations that older transfers created. Each row on the Contacts tab shows the name and email, the organization, and the portal access. Portal access shows **Active** or **Inactive**. Turning portal access on needs Pro, and Agency includes everything in Pro. Turning it off is allowed on any plan. The first time you turn it on, the invite email is sent with it. To see that first invitation step by step, follow [How to invite your first client to the client portal](/help/getting-started/how-to-invite-first-client-client-portal). The row menu holds **Edit**, **Storage limit** and **Delete**. **Storage limit** appears only when portal access is on. See [Storage limit: set how much a contact can upload from their portal](/help/team-and-clients/storage-limit-set-how-much-a-contact-can-upload-from-their-p) for how that limit is counted. The workspace owner and team members who can add and edit contacts see **Edit** and **Delete**. ## Deleting a contact or an organization To delete a contact, open its row menu on the Contacts tab and click **Delete**. The confirmation warns that any transfers linked to the contact will also be deleted, so check them before you confirm. A contact that belongs to an organization cannot be deleted. The **Cannot delete contact** window tells you to remove the contact from the organization first, and it shows only **Cancel**. Remove the contact from the organization, then delete it. Deleting an organization removes the organization itself. Its member contacts stay on the **Contacts** tab as standalone contacts. A workspace owner, or a team member allowed to delete clients, can delete an organization. ## Related articles - [How to invite your first client to the client portal](/help/getting-started/how-to-invite-first-client-client-portal) - [The client portal: how it works](/help/client-portal/the-client-portal-how-it-works) - [Storage limit: set how much a contact can upload from their portal](/help/team-and-clients/storage-limit-set-how-much-a-contact-can-upload-from-their-p) - [Email gated file transfers: how the gate works](/help/access-control/email-gated-file-transfers-collect-leads-before-sharing-file) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/team-and-clients/contacts-and-organizations-how-they-work-together ### Organizations: group contacts by company An organization groups the contacts of one company or client so you can manage them together. An organization is a named company or client that groups several of your contacts, so you can manage them together. This article shows how to create one, who can change it, and how to suspend, export or delete it. To see how contacts and organizations connect, read [Contacts and organizations: how they work together](https://tarkle.com/help/team-and-clients/contacts-and-organizations-how-they-work-together). ## Create an organization Organizations belong to a workspace. Open [Contacts](/dashboard/contacts) in the workspace you want, then follow these steps. 1. Open the **Organizations** tab. 2. Click **Organization**. When the list is empty, the button reads **New organization**. 3. In the **New organization** dialog, enter the **Organization name**, then the **Name** and **Email** of the first person. 4. Click **Create organization**. The first person becomes a contact in your Contacts list and the **Owner** of the organization. If a contact with that email already exists in the workspace, Tarkle uses that contact. If an organization with the same name already exists in the workspace, the person joins it. Creating an organization does not send an invite email. Tarkle also looks for a logo from the email's domain. ## Who can change an organization In the Organizations list, each row has a menu. The workspace owner and team members with the add and edit contacts permission can open **Edit**, **Suspend** and **Reopen** from it. Team members who can delete contacts also see **Delete**. In the client portal, a member with the Owner or admin role can edit the organization's details. Only the Owner can delete the organization from the portal, and must type the organization name to confirm. ## Suspend and reopen an organization 1. In the Organizations list, open the row menu of the organization. 2. Click **Suspend**, then click **Suspend** in the **Suspend organization** dialog. Suspending turns off portal access for every member of the organization. A member who opens the client portal sees the **Organization suspended** screen instead of their files. Each member also gets an email with the subject "Your organization has been suspended", followed by your workspace name. Nothing is deleted, and the organization shows a **Suspended** badge in the list. To restore access, open the same menu and click **Reopen**. Members then get an email with the subject "Your organization has been reactivated", followed by your workspace name. ## Search, export and delete On the Organizations tab, type in **Search organizations...** to filter the list by name. Select organizations to show a bar with **Export** and **Delete selected**. **Export** downloads the selected organizations as a CSV file. To delete one organization, open its row menu and click **Delete**. Deleting an organization does not delete its members: they stay in your Contacts list. Deleting one organization cannot be undone. ## Plans Organizations are part of the Pro and Agency plans, and Agency includes everything in Pro. On Free, the Organizations tab shows "Organizations are available on Pro." with an **Upgrade** button. You can still see existing organizations on Free, but you cannot create or change them. Compare the plans on the [pricing page](https://tarkle.com/pricing), or read [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro) to move your organization to Pro. ## Related articles - [How to limit a transfer to one client organization](https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/how-to-limit-a-transfer-to-one-client-organization) - [Client organizations](https://tarkle.com/features/client-organizations) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/team-and-clients/organizations-group-contacts-by-company ### Storage limit: set how much a contact can upload from their portal Set the upload storage limit for each contact in the client portal, and see how the limit is counted. A contact with portal access can upload files from the client portal into your workspace. The Storage limit sets how much each contact may keep uploaded, so you can give a trusted partner more room than a one-off guest. This article explains how the limit is counted and how to set it on the Contacts page. ## How the limit works Every contact has their own limit. Tarkle counts only the files that contact uploaded and that are not deleted. Files you send to them are never counted, and deleting one of their uploads frees that space. Tarkle creates the folder automatically, named with the contact's name followed by (uploads). It sits at the top level of your library, so you can find it on the [Folders](/dashboard/folders) page. Tarkle checks each file when its upload starts. If a file would take the contact over their limit, the upload is refused with the message "This upload is over your storage limit." Files a contact uploads are ordinary library files, so they also count toward your workspace storage. The room a contact has left is the smaller of two numbers: what is left of their limit, and what is left of the workspace storage. Workspace storage comes from your plan, plus any extra storage added to the workspace. ## Set the limit for a contact Owners and team members whose role allows adding and editing contacts can set a contact's limit. Repeat these steps for each contact. 1. Open [Contacts](/dashboard/contacts) in the sidebar. 2. Find the contact and open the menu on their row. 3. Click **Storage limit**. This item appears only for contacts whose portal access is on. 4. In the **Storage limit** dialog, the **Limit** field shows the limit as it is now. Type the new amount and choose **GB** or **TB**. The amount must be greater than zero. 5. Check **Uploaded so far**, which shows what the contact has uploaded. 6. Click **Save**. Tarkle shows "Storage limit updated". The new limit applies to the contact's next upload. Turning portal access off keeps the limit saved, so turning it back on uses the same limit. Lowering the limit below what a contact has uploaded keeps their files, but they cannot upload anything new until you raise the limit or delete some of their uploads. Note: Portal access needs a Pro or Agency plan. [Which plan includes the client portal?](/help/client-portal/which-plan-includes-the-client-portal) lists the plans, and [Pricing](/pricing) shows what each one costs. A contact whose portal access is off has no portal uploads, so there is no limit to apply. To turn on portal access for a contact, follow [How to invite your first client to the client portal](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/how-to-invite-first-client-client-portal). ## What the contact sees On the portal Home page, the **Storage** card shows how much the contact has uploaded, the percentage of their limit that this uses, and how much of the limit is left. The card reads only the contact's own limit, so it can show space left even when your workspace storage is full. When no room is left, the **Upload** button is disabled, and hovering over it shows the out-of-storage message. Room runs out when the contact has used their whole limit or when your workspace storage is full. Tarkle checks the limit again on the server when each upload starts, so an upload cannot get past it. ## Contacts in an organization Each contact keeps their own limit and their own uploads. Setting a limit for one contact does not change another's, and no limit is shared by a group of contacts. To give several people more room, set **Storage limit** for each of them on the Contacts page. [Client organizations](https://tarkle.com/features/client-organizations) group contacts into the company they belong to. ## What happens next After you save, the new limit applies to the contact's next upload. They see the new amount on the Storage card the next time they open the portal Home page. ## Related articles - [The client portal: how it works](https://tarkle.com/help/client-portal/the-client-portal-how-it-works) - [Assign storage to teams and clients](https://tarkle.com/features/team-storage-for-teams-and-clients) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/team-and-clients/storage-limit-set-how-much-a-contact-can-upload-from-their-p ### Team folders Each team in a workspace gets its own folder, its own members and an optional storage budget. Team folders split a [workspace](https://tarkle.com/help/getting-started/what-is-a-tarkle-workspace) into teams. Each team has its own folder, its own members and, if you want, a storage budget. Use them when groups in one workspace work on different things, such as Marketing, Finance or one team per project. Team folders are available on Pro and Agency. See [plans and prices](/pricing) for what each plan costs. ## What a team includes Every team gets three protected folders when it is created: a main folder, an Uploaded folder and a Received folder. To open the main folder, choose **See folder** in the team's row menu. On the Files page, when you select several items to delete or move to the bin, Tarkle skips team folders and tells you they are protected. Each team has an access setting. **Everyone** shares the team with the whole workspace. **Members only** limits it to the workspace members you select. The storage budget is optional. A budget is set aside from the workspace's storage, so the storage left for the rest of the workspace goes down by the same amount. Files in a team's folders count toward that team's storage used. To see how budgets add up, read [how team storage works in Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/how-team-storage-works-in-tarkle). The Team folders page shows a **Team usage** card with the storage the teams have used, the total reserved, the percentage used and the storage still available. The table lists each team with its used storage, its budget and who it is assigned to. The **Transfers** and **Requests** cards show the totals and the count for the last 30 days. ## Create a team Only Owners and Admins of the workspace can create a team. For other members, **New team** is disabled. 1. Open [Team folders](/dashboard/team) in your workspace. 2. Click **New team**. 3. Enter a **Name** of up to 120 characters. 4. Click **Icon** and pick an icon and a colour. 5. Add a **Description** of up to 120 characters, or click the wand icon to write one with AI. 6. Enter a **Budget** in GB or TB, or leave it empty for no limit. 7. Choose **Access**: **Members only** or **Everyone**. With **Members only**, select the people under **Team members**. 8. Click **Create team**. The Budget field shows how much storage is still available to allocate. A budget above that amount is refused, so lower it or leave the field empty. A team without a budget shows Unlimited in the table. Note: If AI is not included in your plan, the wand opens the upgrade dialog instead of writing a description. ## Change a team's storage 1. Click **Assign storage** above the team table, or open a team's row menu and choose **Assign storage**. 2. Choose the team in the **Team** field. 3. Enter the **Budget** in GB or TB. 4. Check the **Current**, **After this change** and **Workspace storage left** rows. 5. Click **Assign**. **Assign storage** stays disabled until the workspace has at least one team. A budget above the storage left in your workspace is refused, and a budget cannot go below what the team has already used. ## Edit or delete a team Open a team's row menu to see its actions: **Open team**, **See folder**, **Edit**, **Assign storage** and **Delete**. **Edit** opens the Edit team form, and **Save changes** keeps what you changed. To delete a team, choose **Delete** in its row menu and then click **Delete team** in the confirmation. Deleting releases the team's storage budget and removes team access. Files and folders stay and go back to workspace storage. ## Who can use Team folders Team folders are on Pro and Agency, and Agency includes everything in Pro. On Free, opening Team folders shows the upgrade dialog, and creating a team is refused. Free is for one person. The [plans and prices](/pricing) page lists the monthly and yearly prices. The people you add to a team are members of the workspace. To invite someone, use [Members](/dashboard/settings/members). The roles a member can have are explained in [Team roles](https://tarkle.com/features/roles-and-permissions). ## What happens next After you create a team, it appears in the team table with its access and budget. Choose **Open team** in its row menu to open the team and its folders. ## Related articles - [File and folder management in Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/file-and-folder-management-in-tarkle) - [Assign storage to teams and clients](https://tarkle.com/features/team-storage-for-teams-and-clients) - [Team folders feature](https://tarkle.com/features/team-folders) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/team-and-clients/team-folders ### Teams, roles and sharing files with your team The four roles, what each one can do, how to invite people, and when to share a file or use a Team folder. This page explains the four roles in a workspace, what each one can do, when to share a single file and when to use a Team folder, and how to invite people and manage them. ## 1. The four roles - **Owner**: the account the workspace belongs to. The owner can't be removed from the workspace. - **Admin**: manages the workspace. Admins see every file, invite people and create Teams. - **Member**: does everyday work on their own files and on the items shared with them. - **Viewer**: read-only. Sees only what is shared with them, and can view and download it. You choose the role when you invite someone. To change it later, open the person's row menu on [Members](/dashboard/settings/members) in Settings and choose **Change role**. ## 2. What each role can do | Task | Owner | Admin | Member | Viewer | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | See files and folders | ✅ every item | ✅ every item | ❌ only what they created and what is shared with them | ❌ only what is shared with them | | Upload files and create folders | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | ❌ | | Rename, move or add a new version | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ files they can see | ❌ | | Download | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | Move to Bin | ✅ any | ✅ any | ✅ only what they created | ❌ | | Empty the Bin or delete permanently | ✅ | ✅ | ❌ | ❌ | | Send a file outside the workspace ([file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer)) | ✅ any | ✅ any | ✅ only what they created | ❌ | | Share access with a teammate | ✅ any | ✅ any | ✅ only what they created | ❌ | | Invite people, change roles, suspend or remove | ✅ | ✅ | ❌ | ❌ | | Create, edit and delete Teams | ✅ | ✅ | ❌ | ❌ | A few rules sit behind the table: - Sharing does not change a role. Share access gives someone visibility of an item, and what they can do with it follows their own role. A Viewer you share a file with can open and download it, and nothing more. A Member you share a file with can edit it, but can't move it to the Bin, because they didn't create it. - A Member can delete, transfer and share only what they created, even when someone else shared the item with them. - A suspended person has no access until you restore them. - Contacts are visible to all Members. - Files uploaded before the role rules were added have no recorded uploader. Owners and admins see them, and Members see them only after someone shares them. ## 3. Share access or a Team folder Use Share access when one person needs one file or folder. Use a Team folder when a group works together all the time, such as Marketing, Finance or a client project. ### Share access: one file or folder, one person Share access lets you choose exactly who can see a file or folder. Sharing a folder includes everything inside it. You can remove a person's access at any time from the same window. The steps are in section 6. ### Team folders: a shared space for a group Team folders are available on Pro and Agency. The [pricing](https://tarkle.com/pricing) page lists what each plan includes. A Team's access is set to **Everyone** or **Members only**. Owners and admins create Teams, and section 7 shows how. | You want to… | Use | | --- | --- | | Let one person see one file or folder | Share access | | Give a whole group a shared space | A Team folder | | Send files to a client or anyone outside the workspace | [File transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) | | Collect files from someone outside the workspace | [File request](/help/file-requests/what-are-file-requests-in-tarkle) | Inside a Team folder, the table in section 2 still applies to each person. ## 4. Invite people to your workspace Only owners and admins can invite people. Pro and Agency include unlimited team members. Free is for one person, so on Free the **Add team** button opens the upgrade dialog instead of the invite form. 1. Open [Members](/dashboard/settings/members) in Settings. 2. Click **Add team**, then click **Invite a user**. 3. Enter the **Email address**. If the person doesn't have a Tarkle account yet, also enter their **Name**. People who already have an account keep their own name. 4. Choose a **Role**: Admin, Member or Viewer. 5. Click **Invite**. Tarkle shows "Invitation sent." The person receives an email with a link. They open it and sign in with the invited email address to accept. Pending invitations appear in the same list as your members. Use the row menu to choose **Resend invite**, which sends the email again, or **Revoke invite**, which stops the invitation working and frees its seat. ### Join with an invite link On Pro and Agency, you can also turn on the **Invite link** switch in Settings. It needs at least one verified team email domain. Someone with an email address on that domain can request a confirmation email and join through the link. Free email providers such as Gmail aren't accepted. The link expires 90 days after it is created, and you can turn it off at any time. ## 5. Change a role, suspend or remove someone From the person's row menu on [Members](/dashboard/settings/members): - **Change role** changes their role. - **Suspend** blocks their access to the workspace right away. Choose **Restore** to give it back. - **Remove** takes them out of the workspace. A dialog asks you to choose who receives their files and content in **Transfer their files and content to**. Their Tarkle account is not deleted. The owner can't be removed. ## 6. Share a file or folder with a teammate 1. Find the file or folder you want to share in [Files](/dashboard/files). 2. Click the **⋮** menu and choose **Share access**. 3. In **Share with**, pick one or more people from your team. 4. Click **Share**. The people you picked can see it straight away. 5. Check **Who has access**. It lists the owner, the person who uploaded the item and everyone it is shared with. Pending invitations show the tag **Invited**. Click **✕** next to a person to remove their access. A few notes: - If the person isn't on your team yet and you are an owner or admin, the **Invite a user** form opens with their email filled in. Once the invitation is sent, the item is shared with them, and they receive it when they join. Admins already see every file, so nothing is shared with an invited Admin. - Members can't send invitations. Ask an owner or admin to invite the person first. - Members can share only the items they created. Viewers can't share. ## 7. Create a Team folder Only owners and admins can create a Team. Teams are made from people who are already in your workspace, so invite anyone new first (see section 4). 1. Open [Team folders](/dashboard/team). 2. Start a new Team from the Team folders page. 3. Enter a Name for the Team, choose an icon and a colour, and add a Description if you want one. 4. Optionally, enter a **Budget** (see section 8). 5. Choose **Access**: **Everyone**, or **Members only**. With **Members only**, pick people in **Team members**. 6. Click **Create team**. ## 8. Storage budgets for Teams Your plan sets the storage total for the workspace: 5 GB on Free and 3 TB on Pro. A Team budget sets part of that total aside for one Team. In the **Budget** field of the **Create team** form, enter an amount and choose GB or TB. Leave the field empty for no limit. The field shows how much storage is still available to allocate. Budgets can't add up to more than that. If you enter more, Tarkle refuses with "That budget is more than the [amount] still available to allocate. Lower it, or leave it empty for no limit." The check runs when you create the Team. ## 9. Common questions **A Member says they can't see a file. What should I do?** Members see their own files, the files shared with them, and the folders of the Teams they can see. Share the file with them (section 6), or move it into a Team folder they can see. **Why can't a Member delete a file I shared with them?** Members can only delete what they created. Owners and admins can move any item to the Bin, and only they can empty it. **Can a Viewer download?** Yes. A Viewer can view and download what is shared with them, and nothing else. **Does a Member's storage bar show the whole workspace?** No. A Member's storage bar counts only the files that Member can see. **Is a transfer the same as Share access?** No. Share access gives a teammate access inside the workspace. A [file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) gives you one link that you can send anywhere, to people outside the workspace. ## Related articles - [File sharing](https://tarkle.com/features/file-sharing) - [Team roles](https://tarkle.com/features/roles-and-permissions) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/team-and-clients/teams-roles-and-sharing-files-with-your-team ### What is a contact in Tarkle? A contact is a saved record of a person you send files to or add by hand, so you can find them later. A contact is a saved record in your workspace for a person you send files to or add by hand. Each workspace keeps one contact per email address, so the same person never appears twice. Open the [Contacts](/dashboard/contacts) tab to see the contacts of the workspace you are in. On Pro and Agency, a contact can also get their own sign-in to the [client portal](/help/client-portal/the-client-portal-how-it-works). ## What a contact holds A contact has a first name, an optional last name, an email address and a contact type, which is personal or business. The first name is required on the form. The email address is required too. For a personal contact, Tarkle looks for a Gravatar photo for the email address when you enter it. For a business contact, Tarkle looks up a logo for the email's domain. The logo is saved on the organization, not on the contact, and only when the organization has no logo yet. Tarkle does not look up logos for free email providers. ## How contacts are created ### Add a contact by hand 1. Click **Contact**, the button with the plus icon in the header of the Contacts tab. 2. In the **New contact** form, enter **First name** and **Email**. **Last name** is optional. 3. Click **Create contact**. Tarkle saves the contact straight away and does not email the person. If the email address is already a contact in the workspace, Tarkle shows "Contact already exists in this workspace" and creates no second contact. If you enter an organization name for that address, the existing contact joins that organization instead. ### Contacts created from a transfer When you send a transfer by email to an address that is not a contact yet, Tarkle creates a contact for it. That contact has only the email address. To add a name, open the action menu on the contact's row on the Contacts tab and click **Edit**. When the address is already a contact, Tarkle links that contact to the transfer and creates no second one. ## Portal access Portal access gives a contact their own sign-in to your workspace. It needs a Pro or Agency plan, and Agency includes everything in Pro. On Free, the **Enable portal access** item is locked and opens the upgrade dialog. Compare Pro and Agency on [Tarkle plans and pricing](/pricing). To turn it on: 1. Open the contact's page from the Contacts tab. 2. Open the action menu at the right of the contact's header and click **Enable portal access**. Tarkle emails the contact a sign-in link the first time you turn portal access on. The contact signs in with that link. To send it again, open the same menu and click **Resend invite**, which appears while portal access is on. To turn access off, click **Disable portal access** in the same menu. Turning access off is always allowed. In the portal, a contact sees **Home**, **Files**, **Shared** and **Requests**. **Brands** and **Feedback** show only when a brand page or a feedback board is shared with them. Files a contact uploads count toward their storage limit, which is 5 GB by default. To change it, open the action menu on the contact's row on the Contacts tab, click **Storage limit**, enter a **Limit** in GB or TB, and click **Save**. The **Storage limit** item appears only for contacts with portal access on. Read [how to set a storage limit for a contact](/help/team-and-clients/storage-limit-set-how-much-a-contact-can-upload-from-their-p). ## Manage contacts on the Contacts tab - **Search** the list by name, email or organization in the box that reads Search contacts. - The **Portal access** column shows **Active** or **Inactive** for each contact. - **Edit** in the row menu opens a form for the first name, last name and photo. - **Export**: tick one or more contacts, then click **Export** in the bar above the list. The CSV file lists the contacts on the Contacts tab, not only the ticked ones. - **Delete** in the row menu asks you to confirm. **Delete selected** does the same for ticked contacts. The dialog warns that associated transfers are deleted too. A contact in an organization cannot be deleted until you remove it from the organization. A team member who can edit contacts but cannot delete them still sees **Delete** in the row menu, and the deletion then fails with an error. Open a contact to see its **Transfers**, **Requests**, **Files**, **Brands** and **Attendees** tabs. ## Organizations A contact can belong to an organization, which groups the contacts of one company. Organizations are a Pro and Agency feature. See [client organizations](/features/client-organizations). A transfer sent to a new email address creates a contact without an organization. To add a contact to an organization, tick **Business contact?** on the New contact form, enter an **Organization name** and click **Create contact**. If the workspace has no organization with that name, Tarkle creates it and makes the contact its owner. If it has one, the contact joins it. Names are matched without regard to capital letters. The **Organizations** tab next to Contacts lists them. On Free, the **Business contact?** checkbox is disabled. ## Related articles - [How to invite your first client to the client portal](/help/getting-started/how-to-invite-first-client-client-portal) - [What is included with Tarkle Free?](/help/billing-subscription/what-is-included-with-tarkle-free) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/team-and-clients/what-is-a-contact-in-tarkle --- # Help: Agencies and resellers Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/agencies-and-resellers ### How to let your clients use two-factor authentication Turn the Allow two-factor authentication switch on or off in Settings to offer an authenticator app to your clients. Two-factor authentication adds a second sign-in step: a 6-digit code from an authenticator app. On the Agency plan, the Allow two-factor authentication switch decides whether your clients can turn that app on for their own accounts. The switch only offers the app, and a client sets it up only by turning it on. The switch applies to your organization's own domain, the one you connect under Domains on the Settings page. On that domain, the only method offered is an authenticator app. On tarkle.com the switch has no effect. For how clients reach the platform you set up, see [How do clients get access to their workspace?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/how-clients-get-access). ## Steps 1. **Open Settings.** Open [Settings](/dashboard/settings) of your organization. 2. **Find Platform settings.** Look for the card titled **Platform settings**. 3. **Check Allow two-factor authentication.** The switch shows as on until you turn it off. Turn it on to offer an authenticator app to your clients, or off to stop offering it. The switch saves as soon as you change it. If the change cannot be saved, the switch goes back to its previous position and an error message appears. ## What your clients see On your organization's domain, a client opens **Personal account** and finds the **Multi-factor authentication** card. Its **Authenticator app** row has a switch. Turning it on opens a dialog titled **Set up authenticator app**, with a QR code and the line "Or enter this key:". The client scans the code or enters the key in an authenticator app, then types the 6-digit code it shows and selects **Turn on**. Cancel closes the dialog and removes the unfinished setup. A wrong code shows "That code did not work. Try the next one." A correct code shows "Authenticator app turned on." Once it is on, Tarkle asks for the 6-digit code when the client signs in. To turn it off, the client flips the same switch. It turns off at once, with no confirmation, and the client sees "Authenticator app turned off." ## Which plans show the switch The **Allow two-factor authentication** row appears only for an organization on the Agency plan. Free and Pro organizations do not see it. Reseller accounts on Reseller Pro get the same switch in their reseller settings, and reseller accounts below Reseller Pro see it locked with a Reseller Pro badge. To compare plans and prices, see [Tarkle pricing](/pricing). ## What turning the switch off does Turning the switch off hides the Multi-factor authentication card on your organization's domain, so clients cannot turn the authenticator app on or off there while the switch is off. It does not turn off the app for clients who already turned it on. Those clients are still asked for the 6-digit code when they sign in. Turn the switch back on to show the card again. ## What happens next Clients who want the extra protection turn on the authenticator app under **Personal account** on your domain. For the sign-in methods of a personal account, see [How to turn on two-step sign-in or a passkey](https://tarkle.com/help/account/how-to-turn-on-two-step-sign-in-or-a-passkey). ## Related articles - [How do I set up white label on the Agency plan?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/set-up-white-label) - [Agency plan price and billing](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/agency-plan-price-and-billing) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/agencies-and-resellers/let-clients-use-two-factor-authentication ### How to log in to a customer workspace as a reseller Open a customer's workspace from your partner console, with a reason, in a session that ends on its own. Open a customer's workspace from your partner console to review the account and help with a ticket or request. You stay signed in as yourself, and Tarkle records the session with the reason you give. ## How to open a customer workspace 1. **Open the Dashboard** in your partner console. It lists your customer workspaces. 2. **Find the workspace.** Type in **Search workspaces or owners...** to search by workspace name, customer email, owner name or plan name. 3. **Click the workspace name.** A dialog titled **Login to** and the workspace name opens. 4. **Enter a reason** in the box **Reason, e.g. ticket or request**. A reason is required for a customer's workspace and can be up to 500 characters. 5. **Click Open.** The workspace opens in a new tab. Click **Cancel** to close the dialog without opening anything. If you have closed workspaces, a **Show closed** switch appears above the list. It is off by default. Switch it on to list the closed workspaces first, each with a **Closed** badge. Their names cannot be clicked. ## Start from the Users or Domains tab On the **Users** tab, open the **Actions for** menu on a customer's row and choose **Login / view as user**. A dialog titled **View as** and the user's name opens with the same reason box. Enter a reason and click **Open**. Tarkle opens the most recently created workspace of that user among your customer workspaces. If they have none, it opens one of your customer workspaces where they are a team member. On the **Domains** tab, open **Actions for** on a row and choose **Login to workspace**. The same **Login to** dialog opens. ## During the session A banner at the bottom of the screen shows **Support session**, the workspace name and the time the session ends. Click **End session** to stop it. You are taken to the **Users** page of your partner console. - The session ends after 30 minutes without use, or 2 hours after it started, whichever comes first. - Starting a new session on the same workspace ends your earlier one on it. - Billing is not shown in the workspace menu during a partner session. - After a session ends or expires, the customer's workspace no longer opens for you. Start a new session from the partner console. ## What Tarkle records When a session starts, Tarkle records it with your reason and the workspace. If the session cannot be created, that failed start is recorded too. When you click **End session**, Tarkle records the end of the session. ## Your own workspace If you click a workspace that belongs to the account you are signed in with, it opens as you. No session starts, no reason is needed and nothing is recorded. ## Error messages An error appears as a short message on screen after you click **Open**. - **A reason is required.** Enter a reason and click **Open** again. - **That workspace is not one of yours.** The workspace is not linked to your partner account. - **That account cannot be viewed.** The customer's account belongs to Tarkle staff. - **This partner account is suspended.** Your partner account is not active. - **You need a partner account for this.** You are not signed in to a partner account. - **You have no customer workspaces yet.** No workspace is linked to your partner account. - **No workspace of yours found for this user.** Shown with **Login / view as user** when no matching customer workspace exists for that user. - **The session could not be started.** Click **Open** again to retry. ## What happens next The customer's workspace stays open in its tab until the session ends. To help another customer, go back to the **Dashboard** and repeat the steps. ## Related articles - [Resell Tarkle as your own platform](https://tarkle.com/features/reseller-platform) - [A workspace for every client](https://tarkle.com/features/agency-client-workspaces) - [How to let your clients use two-factor authentication](https://tarkle.com/help/agencies-and-resellers/let-clients-use-two-factor-authentication) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/agencies-and-resellers/log-in-to-a-customer-workspace-as-a-reseller --- # Help: Agency plan Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan ### Agency plan limits Agency includes 20 workspaces, 6 TB of shared storage and 200 GB per file, and what happens at each limit. An organization on the Agency plan includes 20 workspaces and 6 TB of cloud storage that every workspace shares. This page lists those limits, what counts toward them and what Tarkle does when you reach one. Plans belong to the organization, not to a single workspace. For prices, see [pricing](https://tarkle.com/pricing). ## The limits at a glance - **Workspaces:** 20 for the whole organization. Pro includes 2. - **Storage:** 6 TB, shared by all workspaces in the organization. Pro includes 3 TB. - **Largest file:** 200 GB per file. Pro has the same limit, and Free allows 1 GB per file. - **Team members:** unlimited, as on Pro. Tarkle can set a different workspace allowance for an organization. When it does, that allowance applies in place of 20. To split the 6 TB between your workspaces, read [How do I assign storage to a client workspace?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/assign-storage-to-a-client-workspace). ## What counts toward the 20 workspaces Tarkle counts your open workspaces. Closed and deleted workspaces are not counted, so deleting a workspace you no longer use frees a place. Workspaces that belong to a platform partner count against that partner's limit, not yours. Only the workspace owner can delete a workspace, and only a workspace on the Free plan can be deleted. On the [Workspaces](https://tarkle.com/dashboard) page, click **Workspace actions** on the workspace's row and choose **Settings**. Find the **Danger zone** and click **Delete workspace**. You confirm by typing the workspace name. If Tarkle shows "Downgrade to the Free plan before deleting this workspace.", the workspace is on a paid plan, and it has to be on the Free plan before you can delete it. The workspace then shows as **Closed** on the Workspaces page, and its files and data are permanently deleted after 30 days. ## When you reach the workspace limit At the limit, you cannot add another workspace. Once a day Tarkle checks your count and emails the owner's email address: - **At 16 of 20 workspaces**, the email is titled "You are close to your workspaces limit". - **At 20 of 20**, the email is titled "You have reached your workspaces limit". It suggests deleting a workspace you no longer use, or contacting us if you need more room. Each email has an **Open workspaces** button and is sent once for a given limit. If an organization has more open workspaces than its plan allows, the same daily check suspends the newest workspaces and keeps the oldest active. Suspending does not delete files. A suspended workspace switches back on by itself at the next daily check once there is room again, for example after you delete another workspace. To see what a plan ending means for client workspaces, read [What happens if my Agency plan ends?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/if-your-agency-plan-ends). ## When storage is full All workspaces draw on the same 6 TB. When an upload would go past the limit, Tarkle stops it and shows "This file would exceed your storage limit." Tarkle can also email the owner when storage is full, with an **Upgrade storage** button. ## Give a workspace its own share of storage By default, every workspace can use whatever is still free in the 6 TB. The organization owner can set aside a share for one workspace: 1. Open the workspace list and click **Workspace actions** on the workspace's row. 2. Choose **Assign limit**. 3. In **Select workspace**, pick the workspace. 4. In **Assign storage**, enter an amount. 5. In **Unit**, pick **GB** or **TB**. 6. Click **Save**. The amount still available shows under the field. The amount you enter is both the most that workspace can store and the space held back for it, so other workspaces cannot use it. It cannot be lower than what the workspace already stores, and it cannot be more than your organization has left. To remove the share, clear **Assign storage** so it shows "No limit", then click **Save**. Workspaces managed by a platform partner cannot be changed this way. Assigning a limit moves storage between your workspaces. It does not add storage to the 6 TB. ## Related articles - [What is the Tarkle Agency plan?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/what-is-the-agency-plan) - [What happens if my Agency plan ends?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/if-your-agency-plan-ends) - [Agency plan price and billing](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/agency-plan-price-and-billing) - [Tarkle plans and pricing](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-plans-and-pricing) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/agency-plan-limits ### Agency plan price and billing Agency costs $59 a month, or $49 a month billed yearly, and the owner buys, upgrades and cancels it in Billing. The Agency plan costs $59 a month, or $49 a month billed yearly ($588 a year). It belongs to your organization and includes 20 workspaces for clients and 6 TB of cloud storage. This article covers how to pay for it, how to upgrade from Pro, and how to manage or cancel it. ## Buy Agency Only an organization owner can buy or change the plan. Anyone else who tries is told "Only an organization owner can manage the plan." 1. **Open Billing.** In your dashboard, open **Billing**. 2. **Choose monthly or yearly.** Turn the **Pay yearly** switch on or off. 3. **Click Upgrade to Agency.** This opens the checkout page for the interval you chose. 4. **Pay by card.** Finish the payment on the checkout page. ## Upgrade from Pro If your organization is on Pro with a subscription, click **Upgrade to Agency** on the Billing page. The upgrade charges the full Agency price today to the card saved on your Pro subscription, and your Pro plan ends at once. The unused time on Pro is refunded in proportion by the Tarkle team. You do not need to ask for it. A few conditions apply: - A card must be saved on the subscription. If none is, you are told to change it from **Manage billing** first. - If the card is declined, nothing changes and you keep Pro. Update the card from **Manage billing** and try again. - Only one plan change can run at a time for an organization. - Moving from monthly to yearly on the same plan works the same way: click **Switch to yearly** on your plan card. ## Manage or cancel On the Billing page, click **Manage** on your plan card. A billing portal opens where you can update your card, see invoices and cancel at the end of the paid period. Cancelling stops future renewals, and your paid access continues until the period ends. A **Manage billing** link under the cards opens the same portal for monthly subscriptions. To move to a lower plan, click **Change to Pro** on the Billing page. This opens the billing portal too. ## Agency and a Reseller plan Agency and Reseller plans cannot be held together on one account. If your account has a Reseller plan, the checkout page refuses Agency and shows an **Open partner portal** link. Pro can be held with either plan. ## Paying by invoice Tarkle staff can set up Agency on a monthly or yearly subscription billed by emailed invoice, due in 1 day. You cannot choose this at checkout. Ask in the live chat if you want it. ## Related articles - [How do I upgrade to the Agency plan?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/upgrade-to-agency) - [What is the Tarkle Agency plan?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/what-is-the-agency-plan) - [What happens if my Agency plan ends?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/if-your-agency-plan-ends) - [Tarkle plans and pricing](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-plans-and-pricing) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/agency-plan-price-and-billing ### How do clients get access to their workspace? Your client gets an emailed invitation as Admin of the workspace you made for them, and accepts it on Tarkle. When you create a workspace for a client on the Agency plan, Tarkle emails your client an invitation to join that workspace as an Admin. This article explains what the client receives, what they do on the accept page, and how to send the invitation again if it did not arrive. To create the workspace, follow [Create a workspace for a client](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/create-a-workspace-for-a-client). ## When the invitation is sent Tarkle sends the invitation while it creates the workspace, so you do not send it yourself. The client's email must be a different address from your own. If the email cannot be sent, the workspace is still created and the invitation is withdrawn. The hub then shows **Invite not sent** on that workspace, and you can send the invitation again as described below. ## What the client receives The subject of the email reads Invite to join, followed by the workspace name. When [white label](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/set-up-white-label) is on, the email carries the name, logo and accent color of your agency. Its button opens your own domain when your organization domain is active, as set up in [How do I use my own domain with the Agency plan?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/agency-organization-domain). Otherwise the button opens tarkle.com. ## What the client does on the accept page The client clicks the button in the email. The accept page says that the workspace invited their email address to join. From there the client does one of two things: - If the email already has a Tarkle account, the page offers **Sign in to accept**. After signing in, the client returns to the invitation. - If it does not, the page offers **Sign up to accept**. The sign-up form opens with the invited email already filled in. When the client is signed in with the invited email, the page offers **Join workspace**. Clicking it opens the workspace's home page. **Decline** turns the invitation down. If the client is signed in with a different email, the page asks them to sign in with the invited email, and **Decline** is not shown. If the invitation has expired, the page says so and asks for a new one. The client joins that workspace as an Admin. ## Plan and billing The Agency plan includes 20 client workspaces. Only the organization owner buys, upgrades and cancels the Agency plan, in [Billing](/dashboard/settings/billing). For the plan prices, see [Tarkle pricing](/pricing). If the Agency plan is canceled or a payment fails, you return to Free and client workspaces can be suspended. [What happens if my Agency plan ends?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/if-your-agency-plan-ends) is the next article to read. ## If the client did not get the email Open the [workspace hub](/dashboard) and find the workspace row. The **Invite not sent** label means the client's invitation has not been sent. Open the workspace's menu and choose **Resend invite**. Tarkle sends the invitation again to the client's email. If you do not see **Resend invite**, open [Members](/dashboard/settings/members) in that workspace (members are set per workspace), click **Add team**, choose **Invite a user**, and enter the client's email address. Ask the client to check their spam folder too. ## Related articles - [What is the Tarkle Agency plan?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/what-is-the-agency-plan) - [How do I upgrade to the Agency plan?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/upgrade-to-agency) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/how-clients-get-access ### How do I assign storage to a client workspace? Give a client workspace its own storage amount from the Dashboard, so it cannot use your whole shared pool. The workspaces of an organization on the [Agency plan](/pricing) share 6 TB of storage. Assigning storage gives one workspace its own amount. That amount is the most the workspace can store, and it is held back for that workspace so other workspaces cannot use it. For the other limits of the plan, see [Agency plan limits](/help/agency-plan/agency-plan-limits). ## Assign storage to a workspace 1. Open the [Dashboard](/dashboard), which lists your workspaces. 2. Choose the three-dot button at the end of the workspace's row. 3. Choose **Assign limit**. 4. In **Select workspace**, check that the workspace is the one you want. You can choose another workspace from this list. 5. In **Assign storage**, type an amount and choose **GB** or **TB**. Leave the field empty for no limit. 6. Read the line under the field. It shows how much storage is still available, **Unlimited storage** or **No storage available**. 7. Choose **Save**. Tarkle shows the message "Limit saved", closes the dialog and updates the Storage column. The Assign limit item appears only on workspaces you own, and only when your organization has storage or brand pages to hand out. Saving an amount sets both the limit and the reservation. Clearing the field and saving takes both back, so the workspace uses whatever the organization still has free. One TB is 1,000 GB. ## What the amount must allow Save stays off while the amount is lower than what the workspace already stores or higher than what the organization has left. Tarkle shows the reason under the field: - "This workspace already stores more than that." The amount cannot be lower than the storage the workspace already uses. - "That is more than your organization has left." The amount cannot be higher than the line under the field shows as available. A reservation also needs space that the other workspaces do not hold. When you save, Tarkle can stop with "Not enough unreserved storage left in your account." or "Your other workspaces already use too much to reserve that amount." ## Who can assign storage Only the owner of a workspace can assign its storage. Teammates do not get the Assign limit item for that workspace, and Tarkle refuses the save if the signed-in person is not the owner. A workspace that a partner platform manages cannot be changed here, and Tarkle says the storage is managed by your platform. ## The Storage column The **Storage** column on the Dashboard shows what each workspace uses. A workspace with an amount also shows that amount. A workspace with no amount shows only what it uses, because it draws on whatever the organization has left. ## What happens next The **Storage** card above the list of workspaces on the [Dashboard](/dashboard) shows the storage your workspaces have used, out of the total for your organization. To create the client's workspace first, read [How do I create a workspace for a client?](/help/agency-plan/create-a-workspace-for-a-client). ## Related articles - [What is the Tarkle Agency plan?](/help/agency-plan/what-is-the-agency-plan) - [How do clients get access to their workspace?](/help/agency-plan/how-clients-get-access) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/assign-storage-to-a-client-workspace ### How do I create a workspace for a client? Create a client workspace from the workspace hub, and your client is invited to it as Admin. You create a client workspace from the workspace hub. The workspace belongs to your organization, and your client is invited to it as Admin. ## Before you start - You need the Agency plan, and you must be the organization owner. - You need a workspace of your own first. - You need room under your 20-workspace limit. ## Steps 1. Open the [workspace hub](/dashboard) and choose **New workspace**. 2. Choose **For a client**. (The other option is **For me or my team**.) 3. Enter the workspace **Name** and your client's email in **Client email**, then choose **Continue**. You cannot use your own email. Choose **For me or my team** for a workspace you use yourself. 4. On the next screen, optionally enter **Storage for this client** in GB or TB. Leave it empty for no limit. To change the amount later, see [assign storage to a client workspace](/help/agency-plan/assign-storage-to-a-client-workspace). 5. Choose a **Data residency** region. Tarkle suggests one from your location, and you can change it. Optionally, add a **Logo**. 6. Choose **Done**. Tarkle creates the workspace and sends your client an invitation as **Admin**. To see what your client does next, read [how clients get access to their workspace](/help/agency-plan/how-clients-get-access). ## If something fails Tarkle sends the invitation and applies the storage limit on its own servers, so closing the tab does not stop them. The workspace is created first. If a message says the invitation was not sent, the workspace still exists and shows an **Invite not sent** badge in the hub. Open its menu and choose **Resend invite**. If the storage share was not applied, set it with **Assign limit**. ## Related articles - [Assign storage to a client workspace](/help/agency-plan/assign-storage-to-a-client-workspace) - [How do clients get access to their workspace?](/help/agency-plan/how-clients-get-access) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/create-a-workspace-for-a-client ### How do I set up white label on the Agency plan? Set your name, logo, favicon and accent color, then turn on White label on the Agency plan. White label replaces the Powered by Tarkle line with your organization's name and website on every workspace your account owns. It is part of the Agency plan. Plans and prices are on the [pricing page](/pricing). ## Steps 1. Open [Settings](/dashboard/settings). This page belongs to your organization, not to a workspace. 2. In the **Organization settings** card, enter your **Name** and upload your **Logo**. 3. Upload a **Favicon** and choose an **Accent color** in the same card. Logo and favicon files must be PNG or JPEG. 4. Add your own domain in the **Domains** card below it. The Agency plan includes one organization domain. [How do I use my own domain with the Agency plan?](/help/agency-plan/agency-organization-domain) explains how to connect it. 5. In the **Platform settings** card, turn on the **White label** switch. It saves as soon as you change it. Changes to the Name, Logo, Favicon and Accent color save a moment after you make them. On Free and Pro, the **Favicon**, **Accent color** and **White label** show an **Upgrade** badge and cannot be changed, and the **Domains** card does not appear. The Name and Logo stay editable. The **Upgrade** badge on **White label** opens [Billing](/dashboard/settings/billing). ## What changes - With **White label** on, the Powered by Tarkle line on your workspaces shows your organization's name and website. Turning the switch off brings the Powered by Tarkle line back. - Your **Logo** is shown on transfer pages, download links and outgoing emails. - Your **Favicon** is shown in browser tabs and bookmarks. - Your **Accent color** is used for buttons on public pages. ## Hide the Powered by Tarkle line On Pro and Agency, each workspace can hide the Powered by Tarkle line. Open **Settings** inside the workspace, stay on **General**, and switch off **Powered by Tarkle** on the **Backlink** card. On Free the switch is locked, and the line always shows on Tarkle's own addresses, such as tarkle.page. The steps are in [How to disable "Powered by Tarkle" on your workspace](/help/branding/how-to-disable-powered-by-tarkle-on-your-workspace). ## If the Agency plan ends White label stops once the Agency plan is no longer in force, and workspaces show Powered by Tarkle again. The article [What happens if my Agency plan ends?](/help/agency-plan/if-your-agency-plan-ends) explains what happens to your client workspaces. ## Related articles - [How do I use my own domain with the Agency plan?](/help/agency-plan/agency-organization-domain) - [What happens if my Agency plan ends?](/help/agency-plan/if-your-agency-plan-ends) - [How to customize your Tarkle workspace branding](/help/branding/how-to-customize-your-tarkle-workspace-branding) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/set-up-white-label ### How do I upgrade to the Agency plan? Only the organization owner can upgrade: Free pays on the checkout page, and Pro upgrades with its saved card. Only the organization owner can buy the Agency plan or move to it. A Free organization buys Agency on the checkout page. A Pro organization moves to Agency at once, and the card saved on its Pro subscription is charged. To see what Agency adds, read [What is the Tarkle Agency plan?](/help/agency-plan/what-is-the-agency-plan). ## Before you start - Only the organization owner can upgrade. An organization admin can open Billing and see the plan, but cannot buy or change it. - Agency and a Reseller plan cannot be held on the same account. Pro can be held with either plan. ## Upgrade from Free 1. Open [**Billing**](/dashboard/settings/billing) and select **See plans**. The [pricing page](/pricing) opens. 2. On the Agency card, select **Buy Agency now**. The checkout page opens with Agency selected. 3. Under **Choose a plan**, check that **Agency** is selected. Then choose **Billed yearly** or **Billed monthly**. 4. Under **Payment details**, enter your card details and select **Purchase**. 5. After the payment, Tarkle returns you to Billing. ## Upgrade from Pro Pro moves to Agency in place, and the card saved on your Pro subscription is charged. 1. Open [**Billing**](/dashboard/settings/billing). In **Active subscriptions**, open the menu in the **Actions** column on your Pro row and select **Upgrade**. The menu item is only there when Tarkle allows the change (see the cases below). 2. On the checkout page, check the **Payment method** line. It shows the card saved on your Pro subscription. Then choose **Billed yearly** or **Billed monthly**. 3. Select **Change to Agency**. You can also select **Upgrade to Agency** on the Agency card of the upgrade dialog. Tarkle charges the full Agency price today, on the saved card, and your Pro plan ends at once. The unused time on your Pro plan is refunded in proportion (prorated) by Tarkle's team shortly after. ## When Tarkle refuses the upgrade - **Your plan can't be changed here. Change it from Manage billing.** Tarkle refuses the change when the Pro subscription is not active or is set to end at the end of its period. Open **Manage** on your plan's row in **Active subscriptions**. It opens the Stripe billing portal. - **No card is saved for this subscription. Change it from Manage billing.** Open **Manage** on your plan's row, as above. - **Your card was declined. Update it from Manage billing and try again.** The card is charged first, so a declined card leaves your plan as it was. - **A plan change is already in progress. Wait a moment and check your Billing page before trying again.** Only one plan change can run for an organization at a time. Other cases: - **Some of your workspaces still have their own subscriptions.** Billing shows: "Some of your workspaces still have their own subscriptions. Contact support to move them onto one organization plan; buying a plan here is paused until then." - The checkout page shows this message when your account has a Reseller plan: "Your account has a Reseller plan, and Agency and Reseller plans can't be held together. Pro can." Select **Open partner portal** on that page. - Billing shows this message for a plan that Tarkle manages: "Your plan is managed by Tarkle. Contact support to change it." Contact Tarkle in the row menu opens the Tarkle chat. ## Next step When your plan is Agency, read [How do I create a workspace for a client?](/help/agency-plan/create-a-workspace-for-a-client) to set up your first client workspace. ## Related articles - [What is the Tarkle Agency plan?](/help/agency-plan/what-is-the-agency-plan) - [How do I create a workspace for a client?](/help/agency-plan/create-a-workspace-for-a-client) - [Tarkle refund policy](/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-refund-policy) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/upgrade-to-agency ### How do I use my own domain with the Agency plan? The Agency plan includes one organization domain, so clients open Tarkle at an address you own. The Agency plan includes one organization domain, so clients open Tarkle at an address you own. You connect that domain on the Settings page, and invitation links to a client workspace use it once it is active. Only an organization on the Agency plan sees the Domains card, and the domain is used only while White label is on and the Agency plan is in force. To turn White label on, follow [How do I set up white label on the Agency plan?](/help/agency-plan/set-up-white-label). Plans and prices are on [pricing](/pricing). ## Connect your domain 1. Open [Settings](/dashboard/settings). This is the settings page of your organization. 2. In the **Domains** card, below the General settings form, click **Add domain**. 3. In the **Add custom domain** dialog, enter a subdomain such as app.yourdomain.com in the **Domain** field and click **Create**. 4. Add every DNS record shown at your DNS host. The records cover your domain, the workspace addresses (a wildcard) and sending email from your domain. 5. Click **Refresh / check** until the status shows **Active**. Enter a subdomain, not a root domain. A root domain like yourdomain.com can't be used, and a domain that starts with www is refused too. Keep the dialog open while you add the records. Until then the status reads **Pending**. When Tarkle has verified the domain, the dialog closes and shows the message "Custom domain verified and connected." ## What happens next When the status shows **Active**, [invite a client](/help/agency-plan/how-clients-get-access) and open the invitation link to check that it opens on your domain. ## Good to know - **One domain, locked when active.** You have one organization domain. Until it is active, the button reads **Change domain**: click it, enter the new subdomain and add its records. Once the domain is active, the button is no longer shown and the domain is locked. To change an active domain, contact Tarkle support. - **Domains already in use are refused.** A domain that is already in use elsewhere in Tarkle is refused with "This domain is already assigned to ...". The message names where it is used: a workspace's file-delivery domain, a brand page, another workspace's Events domain or a partner platform. - **Workspace and Brand Page domains are separate.** Workspace domains and Brand Page domains are separate settings and do not use up your organization's one domain. Read [How to set up a custom domain](/help/branding/how-to-set-up-a-custom-domain) for a workspace, and [How do I use my own domain for a brand page?](/help/branding/use-your-own-domain) for a Brand Page. - **Email before and after verification.** Until the sending records verify, emails come from a Tarkle address under your organization's name. After they verify, emails come from notifications@ followed by your domain. Invitation links can open on your domain before then. - **Invitations.** Invitation links to a client workspace use your domain once it is active. Invitations to become an admin of the organization always use Tarkle's own address, even when the domain is active. - **If the Agency plan ends.** Tarkle's own brand and address are used again. See [What happens if my Agency plan ends?](/help/agency-plan/if-your-agency-plan-ends). ## Related articles - [Agency plan limits](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/agency-plan-limits) - [What is the Tarkle Agency plan?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/what-is-the-agency-plan) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/agency-organization-domain ### What happens if my Agency plan ends? When your Agency plan ends, your organization moves to Free and extra workspaces are switched off. If your Agency plan is canceled, or a payment fails and is not fixed, your organization moves to the Free plan. This page explains when that happens, what changes for your workspaces, and where to check the plan in Billing. ## Timing A canceled plan stays in force until the end of the paid period. On [Billing](/dashboard/settings/billing), the Renewal date of the subscription then reads "Ends" followed by the date. If a payment fails, the plan stays in force for 7 days after the end of the paid period. Your workspaces are not switched off during those 7 days. ## What happens when it ends Once the Agency plan is no longer in force, these changes apply: - **Your organization moves to Free.** Free allows 1 workspace, 5 GB of storage and up to 1 GB per file. The [Free plan](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/what-is-included-with-tarkle-free) article lists what else it includes. - **White label stops.** Workspaces show "Powered by Tarkle" again. - **Extra workspaces are switched off.** As soon as the organization moves to Free, Tarkle keeps the one workspace that uses the least storage and switches off the others. A switched-off workspace is suspended, not deleted, and its files are not removed. - **Switched-off workspaces come back.** The scheduled workspace check switches them back on once the workspace limit has room again. To compare the limits of each plan, see [Tarkle plans and pricing](/pricing). ## Before the plan ends Check the subscription in [Billing](/dashboard/settings/billing) first. The Active subscriptions table shows each subscription with its Name, Renewal date and Status. To open the billing portal for the Agency subscription, choose **Manage** in the **Actions** menu of its row. Before you cancel, tell your clients that their workspaces are switched off when the plan ends. To cancel, follow [How to cancel a Tarkle subscription](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-cancel-a-tarkle-subscription). ## Related articles - [Agency plan limits](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/agency-plan-limits) - [Agency plan price and billing](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/agency-plan-price-and-billing) - [How do I upgrade to the Agency plan?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/upgrade-to-agency) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/if-your-agency-plan-ends ### What is the Tarkle Agency plan? The Agency plan adds up to 20 workspaces, 6 TB of cloud storage and white label to everything in Pro. The Agency plan is for agencies that use Tarkle for their clients. It includes everything in Pro, plus up to 20 workspaces, 6 TB of cloud storage and white label. This page explains what the plan includes and how client workspaces, storage and white label work on it. ## What you get Agency includes everything in Pro. Pro includes unlimited team members, an upload limit of up to 200 GB, the AI assistant (Beta) and a fully branded client portal. Agency adds: - **Up to 20 workspaces.** Client workspaces count toward this limit. - **6 TB of cloud storage.** The storage is shared by the workspaces your account owns. - **A client provisioning portal.** - **White label.** Your organization's name and website can replace "Powered by Tarkle" on every workspace your account owns. Agency costs $59 per month, or $49 per month billed yearly ($588 per year). Prices are on the [pricing page](/pricing). To move your organization to Agency, follow [How do I upgrade to the Agency plan?](/help/agency-plan/upgrade-to-agency). ## How client workspaces work A client workspace belongs to your account, and your client joins it as an Admin. Open your [workspace hub](/dashboard) and click **New workspace**. On an Agency account, the **Create workspace** dialog first shows two cards: **For me or my team** and **For a client**. Choose **For a client**. The **Create a workspace for a client** dialog has two steps. In the first step, enter a **Name** and the **Client email**. You can also add a logo, then click **Continue**. In the second step, set **Storage for this client (optional)** and review **Data residency**. Data residency starts on a suggested region based on your account's location, and you can change it there. Click **Done** to create the workspace. Enter your client's email address in the **Client email** field. Tarkle does not accept your own email address there. For a workspace you use yourself, choose **For me or my team**. Your account needs a workspace of its own first, because your first workspace is your own. For the full steps, read [How do I create a workspace for a client?](/help/agency-plan/create-a-workspace-for-a-client). After the workspace is created, Tarkle emails your client an invitation to join it as an Admin. If the invitation cannot be sent, use **Resend invite** on the workspace in the Hub. To see what your client does next, read [How do clients get access to their workspace?](/help/agency-plan/how-clients-get-access). ## Storage for a client workspace The storage step is optional. If you leave the field empty, no storage limit is set for the workspace. Enter an amount in GB or TB to set the most that workspace can use. The amount cannot be more than your account has. If the amount cannot be applied, the workspace is still created and Tarkle shows the reason. To give a client workspace its own storage amount later, see [How do I assign storage to a client workspace?](/help/agency-plan/assign-storage-to-a-client-workspace). ## What happens at the limits When your account already holds 20 workspaces, creating another one shows **Max workspaces reached**. If the storage amount is more than your account has, the workspace is still created, and you see **The storage share was not applied:** followed by **That is more than your account has.** ## How white label works White label is one switch for your organization. Open [Settings](/dashboard/settings), your organization's settings, and turn on **White label** in the **Platform settings** card. When it is on, your organization's name and website replace **Powered by Tarkle** on every workspace your account owns, and your clients open Tarkle on your own domain. For the setup steps, read [How do I set up white label on the Agency plan?](/help/agency-plan/set-up-white-label). The switch works only while the Agency plan is in force. For what happens when the plan ends, read [What happens if my Agency plan ends?](/help/agency-plan/if-your-agency-plan-ends). ## Related articles - [Agency plan limits](/help/agency-plan/agency-plan-limits) - [Agency plan price and billing](/help/agency-plan/agency-plan-price-and-billing) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/what-is-the-agency-plan --- # Help: Selling files Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/selling-files ### How to charge for access to a transfer Charge for a transfer so recipients pay through Stripe before they can download the files. Charge for a transfer so recipients pay through Stripe before they can download the files. The money goes to your own Stripe account. Paid transfers are a Pro feature, so the setup below needs your organization on Pro. You can compare the [plans and pricing](/pricing) first. ## Turn on paid transfers Two settings must be in place before you can charge for a transfer. On the Free plan, the **Enable paid transfers** switch is locked with a Pro badge, and [how to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro) explains the move. 1. **Connect Stripe.** Open [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) in **Settings** and connect Stripe with its publishable key, secret key and webhook signing secret. Stripe counts as connected only when all three are saved. 2. **Turn on Enable paid transfers.** On the **General** tab in **Settings**, turn on **Enable paid transfers**. The switch is off until you turn it on, and it saves as soon as you change it. Only the workspace owner can change it. **Payments** appears in the sidebar once the switch is on and Stripe is connected. Turning the switch off hides Payments in the sidebar and stops new paid transfers. Links you already sent keep working for buyers. ## Create a paid transfer 1. Open the **New Transfer** modal and add your files, as described in [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer). 2. Enter a title, which is required. You can add a summary of up to 150 characters. 3. Tick **Charge for download**. 4. Enter the price, and choose the currency. Tarkle accepts only the currencies Stripe supports. 5. Submit the transfer. Tarkle creates it and shows you the shareable link. A paid transfer cannot use a password, burn after read, an email check, view only or an expiration date. If one of these is set, Tarkle refuses to create the transfer. A direct link is not kept either: a paid transfer uses the standard download. Paid audio transfers have their own download settings. [What is an audio transfer page?](/help/video-transfer/what-is-an-audio-transfer-page) explains how previews and paid downloads work on the audio page. ## What happens next Recipients pay through a Stripe payment form when they open the link. The payment goes to your own Stripe account. ## Related articles - [Why can't I turn on paid transfers?](/help/troubleshooting/why-cant-i-turn-on-paid-transfers) - [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) - [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro) - [What is an audio transfer page?](/help/video-transfer/what-is-an-audio-transfer-page) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/selling-files/charge-for-access-create-paid-transfers ### How to charge for an audio transfer Set a price on an audio transfer, choose the free preview length, and let buyers pay before they download. Charge for an audio transfer when you want listeners to pay before they download your tracks. Listeners hear a free preview first, and then the checkout opens. This page covers the setup, the audio settings and what listeners see. ## Before you start Paid transfers are a Pro feature, and Agency includes everything in Pro. Charging needs three things: your organization on Pro or Agency, the **Enable paid transfers** switch turned on, and Stripe connected to the workspace. On the Free plan you can still connect Stripe, but the switch is disabled. Compare the plans on the [pricing page](/pricing). ## Set up paid transfers 1. **Connect Stripe.** Open [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) and connect Stripe for the workspace. Tarkle needs a publishable key, a secret key and a webhook signing secret saved before it can charge. [Share files and get paid with Stripe](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/share-files-and-get-paid-with-stripe) explains how to connect Stripe. 2. **Turn on Enable paid transfers.** Go to **Settings**, then **General**, then **File settings**, and switch on **Enable paid transfers**. The switch is set per workspace and is off by default. Note: The **Charge for download** option appears in the transfer dialog only when the switch is on and Stripe is connected. If it does not appear, read [Why can't I turn on paid transfers?](https://tarkle.com/help/troubleshooting/why-cant-i-turn-on-paid-transfers). ## Create the audio transfer 1. Click **Share** in your workspace, then choose **Audio** at the top of the dialog. [How to create an audio transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-an-audio-transfer) covers the basic steps for an audio transfer. 2. On the first step, drop audio files onto the upload area or browse for them, or select audio that is already in your Library. Audio files are accepted when the browser reports an audio file type. When the type is missing or generic, the file extension decides: mp3, wav, ogg, m4a, aac, flac, aif, aiff, opus and wma are accepted. Other file types are refused. Click **Continue**. 3. On the second step, enter a **Title**, which is required, and a **Summary** of up to 150 characters. The title is the heading listeners see on the audio page. Click **Continue**. 4. On the third step, which offers **Allow download** and **Charge for download**, tick **Charge for download** (via Stripe). The price fields appear below it. 5. Fill in the price fields: - **Price**: the amount, such as 9.99. - **Currency**: choose the currency for the sale. - **Free preview (seconds)**: how long listeners can play before the checkout opens. - **Limit downloads**: how many copies you sell. Leave it blank for no limit. 1. Click **Create transfer**. The button stays disabled until you enter a price. ## What listeners see Listeners open the audio page and play the tracks. When playback reaches the Free preview (seconds) length, playback stops and the checkout opens. Choosing to download all tracks before paying also opens the checkout. [What is an audio transfer page?](https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/what-is-an-audio-transfer-page) explains the audio page. The checkout shows a Stripe payment form. The listener enters their payment details and clicks **Complete Payment**. The form shows the line Payment is secure and encrypted by Stripe. After payment, the page reloads to the audio page, and downloads are allowed once the purchase is recorded. ## After a sale Turning on **Enable paid transfers** also adds **Payments** to your sidebar. The [Payments](/dashboard/payments) page lists each paid transfer with its price, number of purchases, total earned and the latest buyers. ## Related articles - [How to charge for access to a transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/selling-files/charge-for-access-create-paid-transfers) - [Paid video transfer: sell video files with Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/selling-files/paid-video-transfer-sell-video-files-with-tarkle) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/selling-files/paid-audio-transfer-sell-audio-files-with-tarkle ### Paid video transfer: sell video files with Tarkle Charge for downloads of a video from a transfer link, with a free preview and a price, paid through Stripe. Like audio, video paid transfers use the same transfer modal. There is no separate video upload flow. Understanding how the modal handles video files specifically gives you control over preview and download behavior. ## Before you start Paid transfers are a Pro feature, so your organization must be on Pro or Agency. If your organization is on Free, [upgrade your organization to Pro](/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro) first, or compare the [plans and pricing](/pricing). Two settings in each workspace must be on before the **Charge for download** option appears. Open **Settings**, go to the **General** tab and turn on **Enable paid transfers**. The switch is locked on the Free plan. Then connect Stripe in [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) with its publishable key, secret key and webhook signing secret. The [Stripe setup guide](/help/integrations/share-files-and-get-paid-with-stripe) walks through the connection. Once both are in place, Payments appears in the sidebar. If a message appears when you try to charge for a transfer, [Why can't I turn on paid transfers?](/help/troubleshooting/why-cant-i-turn-on-paid-transfers) names the step to take. For the general setup of any paid transfer, read [How to charge for access to a transfer](/help/selling-files/charge-for-access-create-paid-transfers). ## Creating a paid video transfer 1. Open the new transfer modal. 2. On the **Upload** tab, drag your video into the drop area. To use a video that is already in your files, click the **Library** tab and select it. 3. Click the button at the bottom right to go to step 2. 4. In step 2, enter a **Title**. It is required. The **Summary** holds up to 150 characters. 5. Click the button at the bottom right to go to step 3, then tick **Charge for download**. 6. Enter the **Price** and choose its currency. The currency starts at your workspace currency when Stripe accepts it, and at USD when it does not. You can change it. 7. Set the free preview in seconds. It starts at 30 and accepts 5 to 300. 8. Click the submit button on step 3 to create the transfer. Charge for download is not offered for a video pasted as a link from YouTube, Vimeo or another provider. Tarkle accepts common video formats, such as MP4, WebM, MOV, AVI and MKV. Every uploaded video is converted to MP4 for playback. When you tick **Charge for download**, Allow download and Charge for download cannot be on at the same time. Allow casting, Allow Picture-in-Picture and Allow public embedding are switched off and cannot be turned on for a paid video. Show watermark during playback cannot be used either, because turning the watermark on turns downloads off. Tarkle refuses a paid transfer that has a password, burn after read, an email check, view only or an expiration date. A paid transfer always uses the standard download, so no direct link is created for it. ## What the buyer sees The buyer opens the transfer link and watches the free preview for the number of seconds you set. To download the video, the buyer pays through a Stripe payment form, and the payment goes to your own Stripe account. Find your paid transfer sales on the [Payments](/dashboard/payments) page. ## Use cases for paid video transfers - Filmmakers delivering final cuts after invoice payment - Online course creators selling individual video lessons - Videographers releasing event footage to clients - Agencies billing before releasing brand video assets ## Related articles - [What is a video transfer page?](/help/video-transfer/what-is-a-video-transfer-page) - [How to create a video transfer](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-video-transfer) - [What are transfers in Tarkle?](/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/selling-files/paid-video-transfer-sell-video-files-with-tarkle ### Selling files with paid transfers Charge for files with paid transfers, and find your paid transfer sales on the Payments screen. Tarkle charges for files through paid transfers. Recipients pay through Stripe before they can download the files. This article explains what a paid transfer needs, how to set one up and where your paid transfer sales are listed. ## What a paid transfer needs A paid transfer needs three things: - **A Pro plan.** Paid transfers are a Pro feature. On the Free plan, the **Enable paid transfers** switch is locked with a Pro badge. See [plans and pricing](/pricing). - **The Enable paid transfers switch.** Turn it on from the **General** tab in **Settings**. Only the workspace owner can change it. - **Stripe connected.** Connect your own Stripe account in **Settings**, under **Integrations**. The payment goes to your Stripe account. [Share files and get paid with Stripe](/help/integrations/share-files-and-get-paid-with-stripe) explains the connection. The **Charge for download** option is shown in the transfer window only once paid transfers are switched on and Stripe is connected. ## Charge for files with a paid transfer In the transfer window, tick **Charge for download**, then enter a price and choose the currency. [How to charge for access to a transfer](/help/selling-files/charge-for-access-create-paid-transfers) walks through every step. Recipients pay through a Stripe payment form when they open the link. After they pay, they can download the files. A paid transfer cannot use a password, burn after read, an email check, view only or an expiration date. Charging for a transfer leaves these options out. Paid video and audio transfers use the same option. Viewers preview the video for free, then purchase it to download it. Listeners preview the audio for free, then purchase it to download all tracks. [What is an audio transfer page?](/help/video-transfer/what-is-an-audio-transfer-page) explains how the audio page works. ## Where your paid transfer sales are Sales from paid transfers are listed on the **Payments** screen in the sidebar. The screen lists only the transfers you charge for. For each one, it shows the price, the completed purchases and the buyers. Only the owner of the workspace can open it, and it is available on the Pro plan. Payments appears in the sidebar once the Enable paid transfers switch is on and Stripe is connected. ## Related articles - [How to charge for access to a transfer](/help/selling-files/charge-for-access-create-paid-transfers) - [Why can't I turn on paid transfers?](/help/troubleshooting/why-cant-i-turn-on-paid-transfers) - [Share files and get paid with Stripe](/help/integrations/share-files-and-get-paid-with-stripe) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/selling-files/selling-files-and-the-digital-store-are-now-retired --- # Help: Billing & subscription Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription ### How to add more storage to your Tarkle workspace Storage is shared by your organization's workspaces, so check usage in Billing, then upgrade or contact support. Storage in Tarkle belongs to your organization. Every workspace in the organization draws from the same storage, so to get more room you change your plan. For more storage than the Agency plan includes, you contact support. ## How much storage each plan includes - Free: 5 GB of cloud storage - Pro: 3 TB of cloud storage - Agency: 6 TB of cloud storage The storage of your plan is shared by all the workspaces in your organization. Plan prices are on the [pricing page](/pricing). To set part of your storage aside for a team, see [How team storage works in Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/how-team-storage-works-in-tarkle). ## Check how much storage you use 1. Open [Billing](/dashboard/settings/billing). 2. Find the **Storage** row on the plan card. It shows the storage you have used and the total your plan includes. The Billing page is visible to the organization owner and to admins. ## Upgrade to a plan with more storage Plans are bought and changed on the checkout page, and only the organization owner can do it. You can start from the sidebar or from Billing. **From the sidebar** 1. In the sidebar, click **Upgrade**. The upgrade dialog compares the Pro and Agency plans. 2. Choose a plan. On Free you can choose Pro or Agency. On Pro, the dialog offers Agency. Where a plan is changed by hand, the card opens contact instead of checkout. **From Billing** 1. Open [Billing](/dashboard/settings/billing). 2. In **Active subscriptions**, open the actions menu of your plan and choose **Upgrade**. It opens checkout with the plan you can move to. **Manage** in the same menu opens the billing portal, where you manage a plan you already pay for. Pro and Agency are bought at checkout. You sign in or create an account with an emailed code or Google, then pay by card. If your organization is on Free and you want Pro, see [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro). ## Get more storage than Agency includes Contact support@tarkle.com, which reviews what you need and helps find the right setup. It can arrange additional storage up to 1,000 TB. On the Agency plan, the Agency card in the upgrade dialog leads to contact instead of checkout. For the limits of the Agency plan, see [Agency plan limits](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/agency-plan-limits). ## When your storage is full When your workspace has no room left, the upload buttons show this message: "You're out of storage. Delete files or upgrade to Pro to keep uploading." The message is the same on every plan. To keep uploading, delete files you no longer need, or upgrade using the steps above. ## Related articles - [How team storage works in Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/how-team-storage-works-in-tarkle) - [Agency plan limits](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/agency-plan-limits) - [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-add-more-storage-to-your-tarkle-workspace ### How to cancel a Tarkle subscription Cancel a paid Tarkle plan from Billing, and see when your paid access ends. You cancel a paid Tarkle plan from the Billing page of your organization. The cancellation is made in the Stripe billing portal that Billing opens for you. Cancelling stops future renewals, and your paid access continues until the end of the current billing period. ## Who can cancel Only the owner of the organization can cancel a plan. An organization admin can open the Billing page and see the plan, but cannot manage it. Members who are neither owner nor admin are sent to Settings instead of the Billing page. ## Open your billing page 1. Sign in to Tarkle with the account that owns the organization. 2. In the sidebar, open **Settings**, then select [**Billing**](/dashboard/settings/billing). 3. In the **Active subscriptions** table, open the menu in the **Actions** column on your plan's row and select **Manage**. The **Active subscriptions** table lists each plan with its **Renewal date** and its **Status**. ## Cancel in Stripe **Manage** opens the Stripe billing portal in the same tab. Follow the steps in the portal to cancel your subscription. When you finish in Stripe, the portal returns you to the Billing page. ## After you cancel Your paid access continues until the end of the current billing period. On the Billing page, the plan summary card then reads **Ends on:** followed by the date, in place of **Next billing date:**. The **Renewal date** column reads **Ends** followed by the date. When the paid period ends, your workspace moves to the Free plan. If your content is over the Free limits, you will not be able to upload new files. You can still download your files for 30 days. After that, we may delete content above the Free limits, newest uploads first, unless you upgrade or reduce your usage first. Tarkle emails you before any deletion. To check your storage use and add more, read [How to add more storage to your Tarkle workspace](/help/billing-subscription/how-to-add-more-storage-to-your-tarkle-workspace). You can also see current plans and prices on the [pricing page](/pricing). Payments are non-refundable once processed, except where the law requires a refund or this Section says otherwise. We will refund a duplicate charge or a billing error once we confirm it. For a billing question, email support@tarkle.com. The [refund policy](/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-refund-policy) explains more. ## Plans that Tarkle manages If Tarkle manages your plan by hand, **Manage** does not open the Stripe portal. The row offers **Contact Tarkle** in its Actions menu instead, and selecting it opens the Tarkle chat. The Billing page also says: Your plan is managed by Tarkle. Contact support to change it. If your account also holds a Reseller plan, that plan has its own row in **Active subscriptions**, with its own **Manage** action. ## Related articles - [Tarkle refund policy](/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-refund-policy) - [How to contact Tarkle](/help/about-tarkle/how-to-contact-tarkle) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-cancel-a-tarkle-subscription ### How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro Move your organization from Free to a monthly or yearly Pro plan by paying by card at Checkout. Tarkle Pro is the paid plan for freelancers and small teams. It is billed monthly or yearly, and the plan belongs to your organization, so every workspace in it draws on the same storage. This article shows how to upgrade from Free. ## What Pro adds to Free Free gives your organization 1 workspace, 5 GB of storage and uploads of up to 1 GB. Pro includes everything in Free and adds: - 2 workspaces and 3 TB of storage - Uploads of up to 200 GB - Unlimited team members - Team folders and storage - File versioning - Fully branded client portal - The AI assistant (Beta) - 90-day file recovery instead of 30 days - Priority support For everything Free includes, read [What is included with Tarkle Free?](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/what-is-included-with-tarkle-free). For prices, see [Tarkle plans and pricing](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-plans-and-pricing). ## How to upgrade Only the owner of the organization can upgrade. Admins can open Billing to see the plan, but they cannot buy or change it. 1. **Sign in** to Tarkle with the account that owns the organization. Checkout asks you to sign in or create an account with an emailed code or Google, then pay by card. 2. Open **Settings** in the sidebar and click **Billing**. You can also go straight to [Billing](/dashboard/settings/billing). Billing belongs to your organization, not to a single workspace. 3. In the **Active subscriptions** table, click the **⋯** menu on the **Free** row. 4. Click **Upgrade**. Checkout opens with Pro selected and **Billed yearly** chosen. 5. Choose **Billed yearly** or **Billed monthly**. Yearly is $19 a month, billed as $228 a year. Monthly is $29 a month. Checkout also lists Pro and Agency under **Choose a plan**. Agency costs $59 a month, or $49 a month billed yearly. 6. Enter your card number, expiration date and security code. Then enter your country and your ZIP code, or your postal code outside the United States. 7. Click **Purchase**. When the payment is confirmed, Tarkle opens the Billing page. To compare plans first, click **See plans** on the Billing page. It opens the [pricing page](/pricing). The **Upgrade** badges inside a workspace open a dialog titled **Upgrade to get the most of Tarkle**. A Free organization sees **Upgrade to Pro** and **Upgrade to Agency** there, and both lead to the same Checkout. Note: By clicking **Purchase**, you agree to the Terms of Service and Privacy Policy. Taxes are added where they apply, and all amounts are in USD. Checkout shows the amount under **Billed now** before you pay. If Billing shows a note that buying a plan is paused, contact Tarkle support through the chat. ## What happens next After the payment is confirmed, your organization is on Pro. On Billing, the **Active subscriptions** table lists **Pro** with **Active** in the **Status** column and the next renewal date in the **Renewal date** column. If the card is declined, the reason appears under **Purchase**. Your organization stays on Free, and you can try again. If you close the page before you pay, you are not charged. ## Change your plan later The **Pro** row in **Active subscriptions** shows an **Upgrade** item when a move is allowed: from Pro to Agency, or from monthly to yearly. Checkout then charges the new plan in full now, on the saved card shown there, and your old plan ends the same day. To stop renewals, follow [How to cancel a Tarkle subscription](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-cancel-a-tarkle-subscription). ## Related articles - [What is included with Tarkle Pro?](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/what-is-included-with-tarkle-pro) - [Tarkle refund policy](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-refund-policy) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro ### Legacy plans and lifetime access Find out how older plans and lifetime access appear on your organization's Billing page, and what to do next. Older paid plans and lifetime plans belong to your organization, not to one workspace. This page shows where they appear on the Billing page, what each row means and what the owner can do with them. ## Check your plan Open [Billing](/dashboard/settings/billing) to see your organization's plan. The page is titled Billing, and the plan it shows covers the whole organization. Owners and admins can open the page, but only the owner can change the plan, manage a subscription or redeem codes. The card at the top shows the plan name, such as Pro Lifetime, and its status badge. A lifetime plan shows Lifetime · No renewal under the name. Below it, the usage rows show Workspaces, Storage, Team members, Workspace domains, Organization domain, Brand page domains and Event page domains, each measured against the limits of the plan. Under the card, the Active subscriptions table lists the plans of the organization. Each row shows the plan name, its price and the date it was created or last updated, then the renewal date and the status. ## Older paid plans Some workspaces paid for their own subscription before their plans moved to the organization. If one of your workspaces still has its own subscription, Billing shows this note: "Some of your workspaces still have their own subscriptions. Contact support to move them onto one organization plan; buying a plan here is paused until then." When Tarkle moves them, it sets up one subscription for the organization and sets each old subscription to cancel at the end of its paid period. Nothing is charged at the move. Billing for the organization's plan starts when the last paid period of the old subscriptions ends. A subscription that is past due or unpaid has to be settled before the move. If Billing says "Your plan is managed by Tarkle. Contact support to change it.", changes to that plan go through support as well. For what Free, Pro and Agency include, see [Tarkle plans and pricing](/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-plans-and-pricing). ## Lifetime access Lifetime plans are paid once and have no renewal. Each one belongs to your organization. There are three: - Pro 500 GB costs $29, with 500 GB of storage, 1 workspace and 1 team seat. - Pro costs $169, with 3 TB of storage, 2 workspaces and unlimited team members. - Agency costs $299, with 6 TB of storage and 20 workspaces. Lifetime plans do not include the AI assistant (Beta). In the Active subscriptions table, a lifetime plan shows its name, such as Pro Lifetime, and its one-time price. No renewal appears in the renewal column. A plan that came from lifetime codes shows Lifetime codes as its price. The only action on a lifetime row is Contact Tarkle. To see what each plan includes and how codes add up, read [What a lifetime plan includes and how codes add up](/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-lifetime-plans-what-s-included-and-how-codes-stack). ## Redeem lifetime codes The owner redeems lifetime codes from Billing. The Redeem code card appears on a Free organization and on an organization that holds a lifetime plan. It does not appear for an Agency lifetime plan or a Reseller lifetime plan, because no more codes can be added to those. 1. Open **Billing** as the owner of the organization. 2. Click **Redeem codes** in the **Redeem code** card. 3. Sign in if Tarkle asks. Tarkle then opens the redeem step of checkout, where you enter your codes. You can redeem up to 12 codes at once. Codes are refused while the organization has an active Pro or Agency subscription, and Billing then says: "Your organization has an active Pro or Agency subscription. Codes are for Free and lifetime organizations. Contact Tarkle to switch." An organization can hold up to 12 codes for now. ## Need help with an older purchase? For a lifetime plan, open the actions menu in its row in Active subscriptions and choose **Contact Tarkle**. It opens the chat with Tarkle. You can also email support@tarkle.com. Have the email address you used to buy and your order details ready. ## Related articles - [Tarkle plans and pricing](/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-plans-and-pricing) - [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro) - [How to add more storage to your Tarkle workspace](/help/billing-subscription/how-to-add-more-storage-to-your-tarkle-workspace) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/legacy-plans-and-lifetime-access ### Tarkle plans and pricing See what Free, Pro and Agency include, what each costs, and how to move to a paid plan. Tarkle gives freelancers, agencies and small teams one place to store and share files. There are three plans: Free, Pro and Agency. The plan belongs to your organization, and the workspaces in that organization share its limits. Prices are on the [pricing page](https://tarkle.com/pricing). ## Free The Free plan costs nothing and requires no credit card. It is for one person with one workspace. - 5 GB of cloud storage - Uploads and transfers up to 1 GB - Sharing and requesting files - Client feedback and approval - Custom branding and a custom domain - Event management - Password protection for shared files - 30-day file recovery The "Powered by Tarkle" backlink always shows on your pages on Free and cannot be turned off. ## Pro Pro costs $29 per month when billed monthly, or $19 per month when billed yearly. The yearly price is $228 per year, charged once. Pro includes everything in Free, plus: - 2 workspaces - 3 TB of cloud storage, shared by the workspaces in your organization - Uploads and transfers up to 200 GB - Unlimited team members, with team folders and team storage - File versioning - A branded client portal - AI assistant (Beta) - Slack integration - 90-day file recovery - Priority support On Pro you can turn off the "Powered by Tarkle" backlink on your pages. ## Agency Agency costs $59 per month when billed monthly, or $49 per month when billed yearly. The yearly price is $588 per year, charged once. Agency includes everything in Pro, plus: - 20 workspaces for your clients - 6 TB of cloud storage, shared by the workspaces in your organization - A white-label platform: your clients sign in on your own domain, and "Powered by Tarkle" becomes your agency name - A client provisioning portal For more storage, invoice payments or a tailored plan, contact support@tarkle.com. ## How to move to a paid plan Only the organization owner can buy a plan. You pay by card at checkout. 1. **Open Billing:** sign in as the organization owner and open the Billing page. 2. **Pick monthly or yearly:** turn the **Pay yearly** switch on for yearly billing, or off for monthly. 3. **Choose a plan:** click **Upgrade to Pro** or **Upgrade to Agency**. 4. **Pay:** enter your card details at checkout. If you pay monthly and switch or upgrade to another plan, the new plan is charged in full today and the old plan ends right away. The full steps for a move from Free to Pro are in [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro). For a move to Agency, see [How do I upgrade to the Agency plan?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/upgrade-to-agency). ## When a paid plan ends If the owner cancels a paid plan, the organization keeps it until the end of the period already paid for. The organization then goes back to Free. If it has more workspaces than Free allows, the extra workspaces are switched off. ## When to choose a paid plan Pro fits when you need more than 5 GB of storage, files larger than 1 GB, team members or a second workspace. Agency fits when you run Tarkle for your clients and want each client in their own workspace on your own domain. ## Related articles - [What is included with Tarkle Free?](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/what-is-included-with-tarkle-free) - [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro) - [Agency plan limits](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/agency-plan-limits) - [What happens if my Agency plan ends?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/if-your-agency-plan-ends) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-plans-and-pricing ### Tarkle refund policy Which Tarkle payments are refundable, how to report a billing error, and what cancelling does to your access. This article explains when a Tarkle payment can be refunded, how to report a billing error, who can cancel a subscription and what cancelling does. The Free plan costs nothing and needs no credit card. ## Payments that are not refundable Tarkle payments cannot be refunded once they are processed, except where the law requires a refund. This covers: - Monthly and annual subscriptions - Renewals - Upgrades - Storage purchases - One-time purchases - Reseller subscriptions For reseller plans, a setup fee cannot be refunded once onboarding work has started, unless your order says otherwise. ## Billing errors Contact us promptly through the Tarkle support chat if you see a duplicate charge, multiple payments, a technical billing failure or a charge you did not authorize. A duplicate charge or billing error is refunded or corrected once we confirm it. ## Chargebacks Contact us before filing a chargeback so we can fix the problem. A chargeback for a valid charge may lead to suspension of your account. ## Who can cancel Billing belongs to your organization, not to a workspace. Only the organization owner can cancel a subscription, buy a plan or open the **Actions** menu. Organization admins can open the **Billing** page and **Invoices** and see the plan and its subscriptions, but they do not see the **Actions** menu, and the **Invoices** page is read only for them. Team members cannot open **Billing**. ## How to cancel Only the organization owner can cancel. For the cancel steps on their own, see [How to cancel a Tarkle subscription](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-cancel-a-tarkle-subscription). 1. **Open Billing.** Open the **Billing** page of your organization. 2. **Open the Actions menu.** In the **Active subscriptions** table, click the **⋯** button in the **Actions** column on your plan's row. 3. **Click Manage.** This opens the billing portal for your plan. 4. **Cancel the subscription.** You can cancel at any time in your account settings. Follow the steps in the billing portal to cancel the subscription. **Manage** appears on a plan that is billed through the billing portal and has not been canceled. A plan with **Contact Tarkle** instead is managed by Tarkle. Click **Contact Tarkle** to open the Tarkle support chat and ask for the change. ## What cancelling does Cancelling stops future renewals. Your paid access continues until the end of the paid period. After you cancel, the **Billing** page shows **Ends on** with that date, and the **Renewal date** column of **Active subscriptions** shows **Ends** with the same date. A payment that was already processed is not refunded. When a paid plan ends, it moves to the Free plan at the end of the paid period. If your content is over the Free limits, you will not be able to upload new files. You can still download your files for 30 days. After that, we may delete content above the Free limits, newest uploads first, unless you upgrade or reduce your usage first. We will email you before any deletion. These rules are set out in the Terms of Service. To go back to a paid plan, see [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro). ## Related articles - [How to cancel a Tarkle subscription](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-cancel-a-tarkle-subscription) - [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro) - [Tarkle plans and pricing](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-plans-and-pricing) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-refund-policy ### What a lifetime plan includes and how codes add up Lifetime plans are paid once, and this page shows what each plan includes and how your codes add up. A lifetime plan is one payment with no renewal. Tarkle has three lifetime plans, and the lifetime codes you redeem give your organization one of them. This page lists what each plan includes and how the codes add up. ## The three lifetime plans Pro 500 GB costs $29, Pro costs $169 and Agency costs $299, each paid once. You buy one with a card on checkout, and the [lifetime plans page](/lifetime-plans) describes all three. Monthly and yearly Agency prices are in [Agency plan price and billing](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/agency-plan-price-and-billing). - **Pro 500 GB**: 500 GB of storage, 1 workspace and 1 team seat. - **Pro**: 3 TB of storage, 2 workspaces and unlimited team members. - **Agency**: 6 TB of storage, 20 workspaces and white label. Lifetime plans do not include the AI assistant. Pro 500 GB and Pro keep the "Powered by Tarkle" backlink on your pages. On Agency, you can replace it with your own brand. ## How codes add up Each lifetime code adds 500 GB of storage. The plan your organization holds follows its total number of codes. - **1 code**: Pro 500 GB, with 1 workspace, 1 team seat and 5 Brand Pages. - **2 to 5 codes**: 1 TB to 2.5 TB of storage, 2 workspaces, unlimited team members and 5 Brand Pages for each code. - **6 codes**: Pro, with 3 TB of storage, 2 workspaces, unlimited team members and unlimited Brand Pages. - **7 to 11 codes**: Pro with 500 GB more for each code above 6, so 3.5 TB to 5.5 TB of storage, with 2 workspaces, unlimited team members and unlimited Brand Pages. - **12 codes**: Agency, with 6 TB of storage, 20 workspaces and white label. Each workspace can set one custom domain, so the number of custom domains grows with the number of workspaces. Set a domain for a workspace on its [Domains](/dashboard/settings/domains) page. Lifetime codes are limited to 12 per organization for now. For more storage, contact Tarkle. ## Who can redeem codes Only the organization owner can redeem codes. An organization with an active Pro or Agency subscription cannot add codes, and you need to contact Tarkle to switch. An organization that holds a lifetime Agency or Reseller plan cannot add codes either. ## Redeem a code 1. Open [Billing](/dashboard/settings/billing) and click **Redeem codes** in the **Redeem code** card. The button opens the redeem page. 2. If you are signed out, sign in or create an account first. 3. In **Redemption code**, type or paste a code. Codes separated by spaces, commas, semicolons or new lines fill one field each. 4. Wait for the check under each field. A valid code shows **Valid code**. Any other code shows its reason, such as **This code is not valid.** 5. Click **+ Add another code** for each more code. The page takes up to 12 codes. 6. Check the **Summary**. It shows the plan your codes give and, if your organization already holds codes, the plan it holds after this redemption. 7. Click **Redeem**. Codes bought from another seller are redeemed on the same page. If one code is not valid or can no longer be redeemed, none of the codes is redeemed. Remove that code and click **Redeem** again. ## What happens next After a successful redemption, the page shows **Your lifetime plan is active**. Tarkle emails the owner's sign-in address with the subject "Your Tarkle lifetime plan is active". The redemption is also recorded in the Invoices list. Click **Open Tarkle** to go to your dashboard. ## Refunds One-time purchases are not refundable after processing, except where the law requires a refund. The [Tarkle refund policy](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-refund-policy) sets out when refunds are available. ## Related articles - [Tarkle plans and pricing](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-plans-and-pricing) - [What is the Tarkle Agency plan?](https://tarkle.com/help/agency-plan/what-is-the-agency-plan) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-lifetime-plans-what-s-included-and-how-codes-stack ### What is included with Tarkle Free? What the Free plan includes, what Pro and Agency add, and how to move your organization to a paid plan. Tarkle Free is the plan that costs nothing. The plan belongs to your organization. ## What Free includes Free includes the following. - One workspace. - 5 GB of storage. - Files and transfers up to 1 GB each. - One team member in each workspace. - One custom domain for each workspace. Set it up on [Domains](/dashboard/settings/domains) in the workspace you want to use it in. - One Brand Page, with no Brand Page custom domain. - Custom branding. The "Powered by Tarkle" line stays on every Free page. - File sharing, file requests, client feedback and approval, and password protection. - 30 days of file recovery in the bin. ## What Free leaves out Some features are on Pro and Agency only. Agency includes everything in Pro. - **Slack.** Slack requires the Pro plan, so it is on Pro and Agency. - **Client portal.** The client portal is included on Pro and Agency. - **File versions.** Keeping earlier versions of a file is a Pro and Agency feature. - **More storage.** Pro has 3 TB of storage. - **Larger files.** Pro allows files and transfers up to 200 GB each. - **More Brand Pages.** Pro has unlimited Brand Pages, and each one can have its own custom domain. See [Brand page plans and limits](/help/branding/brand-page-plans-and-limits). - **Longer recovery.** Pro keeps deleted files for 90 days. - **More team members.** Pro has unlimited team members. To compare the plans side by side, read [Tarkle plans and pricing](/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-plans-and-pricing) or the [pricing page](/pricing). ## Moving to Pro or Agency Open [Billing](/dashboard/settings/billing) to see the plan your organization is on. To move from Free to a paid plan, follow [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro). Only Pro and Agency are paid by card, at checkout. To move to Agency, follow [How do I upgrade to the Agency plan?](/help/agency-plan/upgrade-to-agency). ## When Free is a good fit Free suits one person who needs up to 5 GB of storage and sends files up to 1 GB each. Move to Pro when you need more storage, larger files, more Brand Pages, longer file recovery, the client portal or Slack. ## Related articles - [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro) - [Tarkle plans and pricing](/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-plans-and-pricing) - [Brand page plans and limits](/help/branding/brand-page-plans-and-limits) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/what-is-included-with-tarkle-free ### What is included with Tarkle Pro? What Tarkle Pro includes, what it costs, and how it differs from Free and Agency. Tarkle Pro is the paid plan for an organization that needs more storage, larger files, more Brand Pages, longer file recovery or the client portal. The plan belongs to your organization. An organization on Pro can have two workspaces. ## Pro pricing Pro costs $29 per month when billed monthly. Billed yearly, it costs $19 per month, which is $228 per year. Compare all plans on the [pricing page](/pricing). ## What Pro includes Pro includes everything in Free, plus: - 2 workspaces, sharing 3 TB of cloud storage - Files and transfers up to 200 GB each - Unlimited file transfers - Unlimited file requests - Unlimited team members - Team folders and storage - Unlimited Brand Pages - File versioning - 90-day file recovery - A fully branded client portal - Slack alerts, connected to each workspace on [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) - Paid transfers, where you charge for access to a transfer - AI assistant (Beta) - Priority support On Pro, you can turn off the "Powered by Tarkle" line on your public pages from the Backlink card in Settings. Full white-label is on Agency only. On Agency, the Tarkle platform runs under your agency's name and domain, and the "Powered by Tarkle" line is replaced by your agency name. ## When Pro is a good fit Pro is a good fit when the Free plan's limits are too small. On the [Free plan](/help/billing-subscription/what-is-included-with-tarkle-free), each workspace has: - One team member - 5 GB of storage - Files and transfers up to 1 GB each - One Brand Page - 30 days of file recovery ## Pro and Agency Agency includes everything in Pro, plus 20 workspaces for your clients, 6 TB of cloud storage and a 100% white-label platform. It also includes a client provisioning portal. Agency costs $59 per month, or $49 per month billed yearly ($588 per year). ## Moving to Pro Open [Billing](/dashboard/settings/billing) to see the plan your organization is on. To move from Free to Pro, follow [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro). Pro is paid by card at checkout, monthly or yearly. ## Related articles - [Tarkle plans and pricing](/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-plans-and-pricing) - [What is the Tarkle Agency plan?](/help/agency-plan/what-is-the-agency-plan) - [Brand page plans and limits](/help/branding/brand-page-plans-and-limits) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/what-is-included-with-tarkle-pro --- # Help: Integrations Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations ### API tokens and webhooks Create, rename and delete API tokens, and add webhook endpoints, on Settings > API. API tokens let a tool outside Tarkle connect to your account. Your own code, the Tarkle WordPress plugin and the Brand API can each use one. Webhooks send a signed request to an address you choose when something happens to a [brand page](/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page). Both are managed on the API page, Settings > API. Tarkle turns Settings > API on for all accounts at once. Until then the page is not found. ## Open Settings > API Open [Settings > API](/dashboard/settings/api). The page lists your developer tokens and MCP tokens in one table, newest first. Below the table is the Webhooks section, which works on one workspace at a time. A developer token belongs to your account, not to one workspace, and it works for every workspace you can access. ## Create a developer token 1. Click **New token**. 2. If the dialog asks which kind of token to make, click **Developer token**. The **MCP token** card appears only when Tarkle has switched MCP on for your account. 3. In **Token name**, type a name you will recognise, such as Production API. 4. Under **Public API access**, tick each access the token needs. 5. Click **Create token**. 6. In **Token (shown once)**, click the token to copy it, then click **Done**. The access choices are these: - **brands:read**: Read brands, their assets, brand.md and analytics - **brands:write**: Update a brand's text, links, access and settings - **brands:create**: Create brands, delete them to the bin and restore them from it - **brands:requests**: List download and view requests and approve or reject them - **webhooks:manage**: Add, change and remove webhooks, send test events and read the delivery log - **files:read**: List and download files and folders - **files:write**: Create folders, rename and delete files and folders (and restore them from the bin); uploads are separate calls A token with no access selected cannot call the API. The WordPress plugin needs no access, so leave the boxes empty for it. Developer tokens do not expire. Each request names the workspace it works on, and the [Brand API quick start](/help/developers/brand-api-quick-start) shows the first calls. ## Manage your tokens The table has five columns: **Name**, **Type**, **Token**, **Expires** and **Last used**. Developer tokens show **Never** under **Expires**. To find a token, type its name, its type or the first characters of the token in the **Search tokens...** box. Open the three-dot menu at the end of a row: - **Rename** opens **Rename token**. Change the **Name** and click **Save**. - **Delete** opens **Delete token**. Click **Delete** to confirm. Deleting a token stops it at once, everywhere it is used. Create the replacement token and put it in your tool before you delete the old one. ## Add a webhook Webhooks belong to one workspace, and only an owner or admin of that workspace can add, change or remove its webhooks. If you have more than one workspace, choose the workspace above the **Webhooks** table first. 1. Under **Webhooks**, click the button that adds a webhook. 2. In **Address**, type an https:// address that is reachable from the internet. 3. In **Description (optional)**, add a short name, such as Zapier. 4. Under **Events**, keep **All events** ticked. To send page views too, tick **Also send page views**. To choose events one by one, untick **All events** and tick each event you need. 5. Click the button that saves the webhook. 6. In **Signing secret (shown once)**, click the secret to copy it, then click **Done**. The events come from brand pages: page views, downloads, brand edits, new access requests, and access requests approved or rejected. **All events** does not include page views. Use the signing secret to check the Tarkle-Signature header on each request. ## Manage webhooks Each row of the webhook table shows its address, its events, whether it is **On** or **Off**, and when it was **Last delivered**. Open the row's menu for these actions: - **Send test** sends a test event to the address and shows the answer it gave. - **Deliveries** lists the latest events sent to the address, kept for 7 days. Click **Send again** to send one again. It works only while the webhook is on. - **New signing secret** makes a new secret. The old one keeps working for 24 hours. - **Turn off** pauses the webhook, and **Turn on** starts it again. - **Delete** removes the webhook and its delivery history, and events stop being sent to it. ## What happens next Once a webhook is on, Tarkle sends it the events you chose. A delivery that fails is tried again, and the row shows **Failing: retrying** until a delivery succeeds. The **Last delivered** column shows **Never** until the address answers a delivery. ## Related articles - [Brand API quick start](/help/developers/brand-api-quick-start) - [Brand API endpoints](/help/developers/brand-api-endpoints) - [WordPress integration](/help/integrations/wordpress-integration) - [How to connect an AI assistant to Tarkle](/help/integrations/connect-ai-assistant-to-tarkle) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/api-tokens-and-webhooks-2 ### API tokens and webhooks Create, rename and revoke API tokens on the Developers page, and see the state of webhooks. The Developers page is where you create API tokens for your workspace. A token lets an outside tool connect to the workspace: the Tarkle WordPress plugin connects with one, and so does the Brand API. This article covers creating, copying, renaming and revoking a token, and what the Webhooks tab offers today. ## Open the Developers page Open the Developers page in the Tarkle app. The page has two tabs, **API Tokens** and **Webhooks**, and it opens on **API Tokens**. Each token belongs to one workspace, and the list shows the tokens of that workspace only. ## Create a token 1. Click **New token** on the **API Tokens** tab. 2. In **Token name**, type a name you will recognise, such as "Production API". 3. Under **Public API access**, tick the scopes the token needs. 4. Click **Create**. A scope sets what the token may do in the Brand API. Each scope is listed with its description: - **brands:read**: Read brands, their assets, brand.md and analytics. - **brands:write**: Update a brand's text, links, access and settings. - **brands:requests**: List download and view requests and approve or reject them. A token with no access selected cannot call the Brand API. The WordPress plugin does not need any scope. The calls each scope allows are listed in [Brand API endpoints](https://tarkle.com/docs/developers/brand-api-endpoints). ## Copy the token After you click **Create**, the **Token created** dialog shows the full token under **Token (shown once)**. Click the token to copy it, then click **Done**. The dialog says: "This token will not be shown again. Save it in a secure location." Tarkle keeps a hash of the token and its first characters, not the full token. Once you close the dialog, the full token cannot be shown again. If you lose it, revoke the token and create a new one. ## Manage your tokens The list has four columns: **Name**, **Token**, **Last used** and **Created**. The **Token** column shows the first characters of the token followed by dots. **Last used** shows **Never** for a token that has not been used. To find a token, type its name in the **Search tokens...** box above the list. Each row has a three-dot menu at its right end: - **Rename** opens **Rename token**. Change the name and click **Save**. - **Revoke** opens **Revoke token** and asks you to confirm. Click **Revoke** to confirm. A revoked token leaves the list and stops working: the Brand API and the WordPress plugin no longer accept it. To keep a connection working, create a new token and put it in the tool in place of the revoked one. ## Webhooks The **Webhooks** tab shows a table and a **Create webhook** button. The button is disabled, so webhooks cannot be set up yet. To connect a tool today, create an API token as described above. ## What happens next Copy the token into the tool you are connecting. For the WordPress plugin, follow [WordPress integration](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/wordpress-integration). For the Brand API, the [Brand API quick start](https://tarkle.com/docs/developers/brand-api-quick-start) creates a token with the right scopes and makes the first calls. ## Related articles - [Brand API overview](https://tarkle.com/docs/developers/brand-api-overview) - [Brand API errors, paging and rate limits](https://tarkle.com/docs/developers/brand-api-errors-paging-and-limits) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/api-tokens-and-webhooks ### Calendly integration Save your Calendly booking link in Tarkle, then change it, remove it or see where the Book a meeting button shows. Calendly lets visitors book a meeting with you. Save your Calendly booking link in Tarkle, and a **Book a meeting** button appears for visitors on the public file pages that show it. This article covers how to connect the link, change it, remove it and use it alongside Cal.com. ## Connect your Calendly booking link 1. Open [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) in the workspace you want to connect. Integrations are set per workspace. 2. In the Scheduling section, find the Calendly row and click **Connect**. 3. In the booking link box, paste your Calendly booking link, for example https://calendly.com/yourname. 4. Click **Save**. The link cannot be empty when you save. The Calendly row then shows a Connected badge, and its button changes to Manage. ## Change or remove the link Once Calendly is connected, the Calendly window shows the saved link as text, with no field to type in. To use a different link, click **Manage** on the Calendly row, click **Disconnect**, and then connect again with the new link. Disconnect clears the saved link, and the **Book a meeting** button stops showing until a link is saved again. ## Calendly and Cal.com The Integrations page lets only one of the two be connected at a time. While Calendly is connected, the Cal.com row in the Scheduling section is faded and cannot be opened, and the other way round. Disconnect the connected tool first. To use Cal.com, read [How to connect Cal.com to Tarkle](/help/integrations/cal-com-integration). ## Where visitors see the button Visitors see the **Book a meeting** button only on public file pages that show it, and only while a booking link is saved. Clicking it opens your Calendly booking page in a pop-up window. If the pop-up is not ready, the link opens in a new tab. ## What the connection does not do Connecting Calendly only saves the link you paste. Tarkle does not ask you to sign in to your Calendly account. A workspace holds one Calendly booking link at a time. ## What happens next The Calendly row keeps its Connected badge until you click **Disconnect**. To share files with the people who book with you, start with [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer). ## Related articles - [Slack integration](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/slack-integration) - [How to connect Cal.com to Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/cal-com-integration) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/calendly-integration ### Crisp integration Save your Crisp Website ID in Tarkle so the Crisp chat bubble loads on your public pages. The Crisp integration adds the Crisp live chat bubble to the public pages of a Tarkle workspace. You connect it by saving your Crisp Website ID in the workspace's Integrations settings. This article covers how to connect Crisp, where the bubble shows, how Crisp works next to the other live chat tools and how to disconnect it. ## Connect Crisp 1. Open **Settings** in the workspace you want to connect, then choose the **Integrations** tab, or go straight to [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations). 2. Find the Crisp card in the live chat group, next to Intercom and HubSpot Chat. You can also type Crisp in the **Search integrations...** box. Click **Connect**. 3. In the dialog, paste your Website ID into the field. 4. Click **Save**. A blank field is not saved, and an error message appears. Tarkle does not check the format of the ID, so copy it exactly. Each workspace keeps its own Website ID, so connect Crisp in every workspace that should show the bubble. After a save, a success message confirms the connection. The Crisp card then shows a Connected badge and a **Manage** button. ## Where the chat bubble shows Once a Website ID is saved, the Crisp chat bubble loads on the public pages of the workspace: transfer pages, file request pages and Brand Pages. It does not load in the Tarkle dashboard. The chat script receives only your Website ID. Note: if your organization is on the [Free plan](/pricing), and its stored files are over the Free storage limit, its public pages show a not found page, so the chat bubble does not load there either. ## One live chat tool at a time Crisp, Intercom and HubSpot Chat belong to one live chat group, and only one of them can be connected in a workspace. While one is connected, the other two cards are faded and cannot be opened. Saving a Website ID also clears any Intercom or HubSpot Chat setting in the workspace. The [Intercom integration](/help/integrations/intercom-integration) and [HubSpot Chat integration](/help/integrations/hubspot-chat-integration) articles cover those two tools. To use one of them, disconnect the connected tool first. ## Disconnect Crisp Open the **Integrations** tab, click **Manage** on the Crisp card, then click **Disconnect** in the dialog. Tarkle clears the Website ID, and the chat bubble stops loading on your public pages. To change the Website ID instead, paste the new one into the field and click **Save**. ## What happens next After you save, the chat bubble loads on the public pages of that workspace and the Crisp card shows Connected. To use Intercom or HubSpot Chat in the same workspace, disconnect Crisp first. ## Related articles - [Integrations: connect tools to Tarkle](/help/integrations/integrations-connect-tools-to-tarkle) - [Slack integration](/help/integrations/slack-integration) - [Google Tag Manager integration](/help/integrations/google-tag-manager-integration) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/crisp-integration ### Facebook Pixel integration Add your Facebook Pixel ID in Tarkle so Meta records a page view each time a visitor opens one of your public pages. The Facebook Pixel integration adds Meta's Pixel to the public pages of one workspace. Use it when you want Meta to record a page view each time someone opens one of those pages. ## What the Pixel records Once a Pixel ID is saved, Tarkle loads the Meta Pixel on the public pages of that workspace. These are file transfer pages, audio pages, video pages, file request pages, event pages and Brand Pages. Each time one of these pages opens, the Pixel sends a PageView event to Meta. Tarkle does not send purchase, lead or other standard events through the Pixel. ## Add the Pixel ID Add the Pixel ID in the workspace you want to track. Each workspace has its own Pixel ID. 1. Open [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) in Settings. 2. Find the Facebook Pixel card in the Analytics group, and click **Connect**. 3. Paste your Pixel ID into the field. 4. Click **Save**. When the save works, Tarkle confirms it. The card then shows a **Connected** badge and a **Manage** button. ## Change or remove the Pixel ID Click **Manage** on the Facebook Pixel card. The window shows the saved Pixel ID and a **Disconnect** button. Click **Disconnect** to remove the Pixel: Tarkle clears the ID, and the Pixel stops loading on your public pages. To use a different ID, disconnect first, then add the new ID the same way as above. ## Who can change it and what Tarkle checks Only the owner of the workspace can save or disconnect the Pixel ID. The save is refused with a Not authorized error for other accounts. Tarkle checks only that the field is not empty, and it does not check the format of the ID. It also does not ask visitors for consent before the Pixel loads. ## Plans and other analytics The Facebook Pixel is not tied to a plan in Tarkle's code. Its card has no upgrade button, and on the Integrations tab only Slack shows one. The Pixel is not in the groups where only one tool at a time can be connected, so it works alongside [Google Analytics 4](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/google-analytics-4-integration) and [Google Tag Manager](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/google-tag-manager-integration). The [pricing page](/pricing) lists the plans. ## What happens next From the next page view on your public pages, the Pixel sends a PageView to Meta. To change the other analytics tools, open the same Integrations tab and find them in the Analytics group. ## Related articles - [Integrations: connect tools to Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/integrations-connect-tools-to-tarkle) - [Plausible integration](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/plausible-analytics-integration) - [How to connect Fathom to Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/fathom-analytics-integration) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/facebook-pixel-integration ### Google Tag Manager integration Save your Google Tag Manager Container ID in Tarkle so your container loads on the public pages of your workspace. Google Tag Manager loads a container that you manage in Google, so the tags you publish in that container run on the public pages of your workspace. To use it, save your Container ID in Tarkle. Each workspace has its own Container ID. ## Before you start Copy your Container ID from Google Tag Manager. The field in Tarkle shows the placeholder GTM-XXXXXXX as an example. Tarkle checks only that the field is not empty and does not check the format, so copy the ID exactly as Google Tag Manager shows it. ## Connect Google Tag Manager 1. Open [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) in the workspace you want to connect. Integrations are set per workspace. 2. In the analytics section, click the **Google Tag Manager** card. A window titled Add Google Tag Manager opens. 3. Paste your Container ID into the field with the placeholder GTM-XXXXXXX. 4. Click **Save**. ## Check, change or disconnect Click the connected **Google Tag Manager** card to see the saved Container ID. The window shows the ID as text, with a red **Disconnect** button. The field for entering an ID is no longer shown. To change the ID, click **Disconnect**, then add the new ID with the steps above. Clicking **Disconnect** clears the saved ID, and the card goes back to not connected. ## Where the container loads Tarkle loads the container on the public pages of your workspace: [file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) pages, file request pages, video pages, audio pages and Brand Pages. The same pages load the container when they open on your [custom domain](/help/branding/how-to-set-up-a-custom-domain). The container uses the standard Google Tag Manager script, so the tags you publish in it run on these pages. Note: If you also enter a GA4 Measurement ID in Tarkle (see [Google Analytics](/integrations/google-analytics)) and your container has a GA4 tag, the same visit can be counted twice. ## What happens next After you save, the card shows as connected, and the public pages of that workspace load your container. ## Related articles - [What are transfers in Tarkle?](/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle) - [How to see if a recipient opened your transfer](/help/tracking/how-to-see-if-a-recipient-opened-your-transfer) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/google-tag-manager-integration ### How to connect an AI assistant to Tarkle Create an access token for Claude Code, Codex, Cursor, or another assistant so it can upload files and create links. You can connect an AI assistant such as Claude Code, Codex or Cursor to Tarkle. Once connected, the assistant can upload files, create share links and create file requests in your account, when you ask it to. The feature is in beta. Tarkle releases it to all accounts at once, so until it is released, the Claude & Codex page is not found. ## What the assistant can and cannot do The assistant works with the workspaces where you can upload and share files, and each action follows your role in that workspace. If your role there does not allow uploading or sharing files, the assistant gets an error instead. Your plan's per-file size and storage limits apply to uploads too. You can see what each plan includes on [pricing](/pricing). The assistant can list your workspaces, browse the files in a workspace and search them by name. It can upload a file it can read to a workspace you choose. When it cannot read a file, such as a chat attachment, it can give you a browser upload link instead, and you pick the file yourself on the page that opens. The assistant can create a public share link for up to 25 files, as files, audio or video. Anyone with the link can view and download the files, and the assistant cannot add a password or an expiry date to that link. To add them, open the transfer in the Tarkle app, as described in [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer). The assistant can create a [file request](/help/file-requests/what-are-file-requests-in-tarkle) with a public link and an optional expiry date. Anyone with that link can upload files into the destination folder. The assistant can also list your file requests as active, completed or all, and list the files submitted to one of them. It can list the brands in a workspace, with each brand's own brand-page domain if it has one. Tarkle sends no email when the assistant creates a share link or a file request, so give the link to the person yourself. The assistant cannot delete, rename or move files. It cannot read or change billing or settings, and it cannot send email. An assistant can make up to 120 calls per user in each 60-second window. Past that limit, Tarkle refuses the call as rate limited and asks the assistant to retry after 60 seconds. ## How to connect Start with an access token from the Claude & Codex page, then give your assistant the setup prompt from the same page. 1. **Open the page.** Open [Claude & Codex](/dashboard/connect-ai) in the Tarkle app. The first card is headed **Use Tarkle inside your AI**. 2. **Name your token.** Under **Access tokens**, type a **Name** of up to 80 characters, for example "Cursor on my laptop". 3. **Choose the expiry.** Open **Expires** and pick 30 days, 90 days or 1 year. It is set to 90 days by default. 4. **Create the token.** Click **Create token**. The button stays off until you type a name. 5. **Copy the token.** Click **Copy** next to the token, then click **Done**. 6. **Copy the setup prompt.** In the **Use Tarkle inside your AI** card, click **Copy**. 7. **Paste the prompt.** Paste it into your assistant. The prompt asks the assistant to read the install guide at https://tarkle.com/install.md and follow it. 8. **Give the assistant your token.** Paste the token when the assistant asks for it. For Codex, first set an environment variable named TARKLE_MCP_TOKEN to your token, as the Codex setup guide shows. 9. **Test the connection.** Ask your assistant: "List my Tarkle workspaces." A list of workspaces means the connection works. Note: The token is shown only once. Copy it before you click **Done**. If you lose it, create a new token. The setup guide covers Claude Code, Codex, Cursor, VS Code (GitHub Copilot) and Windsurf. Any other client that supports remote MCP servers with custom headers can connect too. For those, use the server address https://mcp.tarkle.com/mcp and add the header Authorization with the value Bearer, a space, then your token. Tarkle is still verifying each client end to end. If a test fails, see [How to contact Tarkle](/help/about-tarkle/how-to-contact-tarkle). ## Manage your tokens Each active token appears in the **Access tokens** list on the Claude & Codex page, and in the **MCP** tab of Developers. The list shows the token's name, its last four characters, its expiry date and the day it was last used. A token that has not been used shows **Never**. Expired tokens stay in the list until you revoke them. To stop a token at once, click **Revoke** next to it. Tarkle does not ask you to confirm, and the assistant is refused the next time it uses that token. You can have up to 10 active tokens. Revoked and expired tokens do not count toward the 10. A token stops working when it expires, so create a new token to keep the assistant connected. Tarkle checks your second sign-in step before it creates a token, and if that check blocks you, creating a token fails with Not authorized. A token acts as you, so treat it like a password. Claude (web and desktop) and ChatGPT custom connectors only connect with browser sign-in, which Tarkle does not support for them. Use a token with Claude Code, Codex, Cursor or another client that can send an Authorization header. ## What happens next If the assistant reports an unauthorized error, the token is wrong, expired or revoked, and the error does not say which. Create a new token on the Claude & Codex page and give it to the assistant. If the assistant reports a 404 error, the Tarkle feature is not available right now. To send a file the assistant uploaded, see [How to share business files with Tarkle](/help/file-sharing/how-to-share-business-files-with-tarkle). ## Related articles - [MCP server](https://tarkle.com/features/mcp-server) - [Cursor and other MCP clients](https://tarkle.com/integrations/cursor-and-mcp-clients) - [API tokens and webhooks](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/api-tokens-and-webhooks) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/connect-ai-assistant-to-tarkle ### How to connect an AI assistant to Tarkle Create an access token for Claude Code, Codex, Cursor, or another assistant so it can upload files and create links. You can connect an AI assistant such as Claude Code, Codex or Cursor to Tarkle. Once connected, the assistant can upload files, create share links and create file requests in your account, when you ask it to. The connection uses an access token that you create in Tarkle and give to the assistant. The feature is in beta. Until Tarkle releases it to all accounts, only Tarkle staff can open the Claude & Codex page. ## What the assistant can and cannot do The assistant works with the workspaces where you can upload and share files. Each action follows your role in that workspace, and if your role does not allow it, the assistant gets an error instead. Your plan's limits apply to uploads too. Free supports uploads and transfers up to 1 GB each, and Pro and Agency support files up to 200 GB. See [pricing](/pricing) for what each plan includes. The assistant can list your workspaces, the files in a workspace, your file requests and the files submitted to them. It can upload a file to a workspace you choose, create a public share link for files, and create a [file request](/help/file-requests/what-are-file-requests-in-tarkle) with a public link. Anyone with a share link can download the files without a Tarkle account, and anyone with a file request link can send files to it. The assistant can use only the actions listed in this article. To add a password or an expiry date to a transfer, open it in the Tarkle app, as described in [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer). Reading calls are limited to 120 per user in each minute. Calls that start an upload, sign upload parts, or create a share link or a file request are limited to 30 per user in each minute. Past a limit, Tarkle refuses the call and sends a Retry-After header that says how long to wait. ## How to connect 1. **Open the page.** Open [Claude & Codex](/dashboard/connect-ai) in the Tarkle app. The first card is headed **Use Tarkle inside your AI**. 2. **Name your token.** Under **Access tokens**, type a **Name** of up to 80 characters, for example "Cursor on my laptop". 3. **Choose the expiry.** Open **Expires** and pick 30 days, 90 days or 1 year. It is set to 90 days by default. 4. **Create the token.** Click **Create token**. The button stays off until you type a name. 5. **Copy the token.** Copy it now, because the page says it will not be shown again. Then click **Done**. 6. **Copy the setup prompt.** In the **Use Tarkle inside your AI** card, copy the setup prompt. 7. **Paste the prompt.** Paste the prompt into your assistant, then paste the token where the assistant asks for it. 8. **Test the connection.** Ask your assistant to list your Tarkle workspaces. A token made on this page can do everything its three access choices allow, described below. To give a token fewer abilities, create it on [Settings > API](/dashboard/settings/api) instead. ## Choose what a token may do On [Settings > API](/dashboard/settings/api), click **New token** and choose the option for an MCP token. Under **What this token may do**, tick only the access it needs: - **Read**: list workspaces, files, file requests, submissions and brands - **Upload**: start uploads and send files into a workspace - **Share**: create public share links and file requests **Create token** stays off until at least one box is ticked. The assistant can use only the actions that the ticked access allows, so a token with only Read can list files but cannot upload or share. ## Manage your tokens Each active token appears in the **Access tokens** list on the Claude & Codex page, and on [Settings > API](/dashboard/settings/api), where developer tokens and MCP tokens are listed together. The list shows the token's name, its last four characters, its expiry date and the day it was last used. A token that has not been used shows Never. Expired tokens stay in the list until you revoke them. To remove a token, click **Revoke** next to it. Tarkle does not ask you to confirm. A revoked token no longer appears in the list. You can have up to 10 active tokens. Revoked and expired tokens do not count toward the 10, so create a new token when you need one and the limit is reached. A token acts as you, limited to your roles in each workspace, so treat it like a password. ## What happens next If you lose a token, create a new one on the Claude & Codex page and give it to the assistant. To send a file the assistant uploaded, see [How to share business files with Tarkle](/help/file-sharing/how-to-share-business-files-with-tarkle). ## Related articles - [MCP server](https://tarkle.com/features/mcp-server) - [Cursor and other MCP clients](https://tarkle.com/integrations/cursor-and-mcp-clients) - [API tokens and webhooks](/help/integrations/api-tokens-and-webhooks) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/how-to-connect-an-ai-assistant-to-tarkle ### How to connect Cal.com to Tarkle Save your Cal.com booking link so visitors can book a meeting from an embedded transfer page. Cal.com is a scheduling tool. Once you save your Cal.com booking link in Tarkle, a Book a meeting button appears on embedded transfer pages, so the person viewing the transfer can book a time with you. This article shows how to connect Cal.com, where the button appears, and how to switch to Calendly or disconnect Cal.com. ## Before you start The button shows only on embedded transfer pages, which are transfers you show on your own website with an embed code. [Embed a transfer on your website](/features/embed-transfers) explains how to add one. Embeds are included on Pro and Agency, and the Free plan does not include them. [What is included with Tarkle Free?](/help/billing-subscription/what-is-included-with-tarkle-free) lists what Free has. Agency includes everything in Pro. See [plans and prices](/pricing) for what each plan costs. If your organization is on Free, [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro) explains the steps. You need your Cal.com booking link, for example https://cal.com/yourname. The link is saved for each workspace, so repeat these steps in every workspace that needs it. ## Connect Cal.com 1. Open [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) in the workspace you want to connect. 2. Click the **Cal.com** card. 3. In the **Add Cal.com** window, paste your booking link into the field, for example https://cal.com/yourname. 4. Click **Save**. Tarkle only checks that the field is not empty, so an empty field cannot be saved. To check the connection, click the Cal.com card again. The window shows your saved link and a **Disconnect** button. ## Where the button appears On an embedded transfer page, visitors see a **Book a meeting** button in the toolbar, next to **Copy Link**. The button appears only when a booking link is saved. Clicking it opens Cal.com's booking window for your link, where the visitor chooses a time. Note: The button is hidden when the embed address includes `booking=false`. ## Switch to Calendly or disconnect Cal.com Cal.com and Calendly cannot be connected at the same time. While Cal.com is connected, the Calendly card is disabled. To switch, open the **Cal.com** card, click **Disconnect**, and then connect [Calendly](/integrations/calendly) on its card. Disconnect removes the booking link and the Cal.com connection from the workspace. The Book a meeting button stops showing on embedded transfer pages until you save a booking link again. ## Who can set it up Only the owner of the workspace can save or disconnect the booking link. Tarkle refuses the change from any other account. A partner can hide the Cal.com card for a customer workspace, and then the card does not appear in the list. ## What happens next Open an embedded transfer page on your website and check that **Book a meeting** appears next to **Copy Link**. ## Related articles - [Cal.com integration](/integrations/cal-com) - [Tarkle plans and pricing](/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-plans-and-pricing) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/cal-com-integration ### How to connect Fathom to Tarkle Paste your Fathom Analytics Site ID in Tarkle so Fathom counts visits on your public pages. Fathom Analytics counts visits to your public pages. To connect it, paste your Fathom Site ID into the Fathom Analytics card in your workspace integrations. Tarkle then adds the Fathom script to those pages. This article covers how to connect Fathom, which pages get the script, and how to disconnect it or switch to another analytics tool. ## How to connect Fathom Analytics 1. Open [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) in the workspace you want to track. 2. In the Analytics section, click the Fathom Analytics card. 3. Paste your Site ID into the field in the window. 4. Click **Save**. After you click Save, the card shows as connected. If the field is empty, Tarkle shows an error and saves nothing. Tarkle does not check the ID against Fathom, so copy it exactly from your Fathom account. A mistyped ID is saved without an error message. Note: The Site ID belongs to one workspace, so repeat the steps in each workspace you want to track. Only the owner of the workspace can save or disconnect the Site ID. ## Which pages get the script Once the ID is saved, Tarkle adds the Fathom script to the public pages of the workspace, such as [brand pages](/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page). Those pages open on your Workspace URL, on a [custom domain](/help/branding/how-to-set-up-a-custom-domain) you connected, on a tarkle.page address or on a brand domain. The ID applies to the whole workspace. ## Switch to another tool or disconnect Fathom Analytics, [Plausible Analytics](/integrations/plausible-analytics) and [Simple Analytics](/integrations/simple-analytics) form one group, so a workspace can have only one of them connected. While one is connected, the other two cards cannot be opened. To switch, open the connected card and click **Disconnect**. Disconnect removes the Site ID, and Tarkle stops loading the Fathom script. Then connect the other tool. To change the Site ID, click **Disconnect** and add the new ID. A connected card shows the saved ID as text, with no field to edit it. Google Analytics 4, Google Tag Manager and Meta Pixel are not in that group, so they can stay connected next to Fathom. See the [Google Analytics integration](/integrations/google-analytics) to learn what that connection does. ## What happens next After you save, the Fathom Analytics card shows as connected, and the Fathom script loads on the public pages of your workspace. ## Related articles - [Google Tag Manager](/integrations/google-tag-manager) - [Meta Pixel](/integrations/facebook-pixel) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/fathom-analytics-integration ### How to connect Google Analytics 4 to Tarkle Add your Google Analytics 4 Measurement ID in Tarkle so the Google tag runs on your public pages. Connect Google Analytics 4 to a Tarkle workspace with your Measurement ID. After you save it, the Google tag runs on the public pages of that workspace. Use this page to connect the tag, change the ID or disconnect it. ## Before you start Your Measurement ID starts with `G-` and looks like the placeholder `G-XXXXXXXXXX` in Tarkle. Each workspace has its own Measurement ID, so repeat these steps in every workspace you want to track. ## Connect Google Analytics 4 1. Open the [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) page in your workspace settings. 2. Find the Google Analytics card and click **Connect**. 3. In the dialog, enter your Measurement ID in the field. 4. Click the save button at the bottom right of the dialog. When the ID is saved, the card shows a Connected badge and a **Manage** button. Tarkle only checks that the field is not empty, so type the ID exactly as Google Analytics shows it. ## Change or disconnect the Measurement ID Click **Manage** on the Google Analytics card. The dialog shows the saved ID as plain text. Click the disconnect button at the left of the dialog's footer to clear it. You can then enter a new ID and save it. Note: Only the owner of the workspace can save or disconnect the Measurement ID. Anyone else who tries gets a Not authorized error, and the saved ID does not change. ## What happens next After you save, the Google tag runs on the public pages of the workspace, the pages your recipients open. To learn how transfers reach your recipients, read [What are transfers in Tarkle?](/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle). To get Slack alerts when files are viewed, downloaded or uploaded, see the [Slack integration](/help/integrations/slack-integration) article. ## Related articles - [How to connect an AI assistant to Tarkle](/help/integrations/connect-ai-assistant-to-tarkle) - [What is a brand page in Tarkle?](/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/google-analytics-4-integration ### How to connect Mailchimp to Tarkle Connect Mailchimp with your API key and Audience ID, so the contacts Tarkle sends reach your Mailchimp audience. Connect Mailchimp to a Tarkle workspace with your Mailchimp API key and Audience ID. After you connect, the contacts Tarkle sends go to the Mailchimp audience you name. This article covers connecting, syncing existing contacts and disconnecting. ## Connect Mailchimp Integrations are set per workspace. Open [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) in the workspace you want to connect. 1. Type Mailchimp in **Search integrations...** if you need to find the row. 2. Click **Connect** on the Mailchimp row. 3. In the API key field, paste your Mailchimp API key. 4. In the Audience ID field, enter the ID of the audience that should receive your contacts. 5. Click **Save**. Tarkle checks the key and the Audience ID with Mailchimp before it saves anything. The key must end with a datacenter code such as -us21, which is two to four letters followed by one to three digits. A key without it is refused with the message "That does not look like a Mailchimp API key". If Mailchimp rejects the key, you see "Mailchimp rejected this API key". If the Audience ID is not in that Mailchimp account, you see "Audience ID not found in this Mailchimp account". If Tarkle cannot reach Mailchimp, you see "Could not reach Mailchimp, try again". Once saved, the Mailchimp row shows a **Connected** badge and its button reads **Manage**. Note: Only the owner of the workspace can connect or disconnect Mailchimp. Anyone else who saves sees a Not authorized error. Note: Mailchimp and Loops cannot be connected at the same time. While Mailchimp is connected, the Loops row is disabled, and connecting Mailchimp clears a Loops key that was saved before. ## What gets synced Tarkle sends each contact's email address to the one audience whose Audience ID you entered, with the first and last name when Tarkle has them. Tarkle sends a contact in these cases: - when you send a file transfer to a new recipient - when a visitor leaves an email address at an email gate, which is covered in [Email gated file transfers](/help/access-control/email-gated-file-transfers-collect-leads-before-sharing-file) - when a buyer pays for a paid transfer, which is covered in [Share files and get paid with Stripe](/help/integrations/share-files-and-get-paid-with-stripe) Tarkle adds each contact it sends as subscribed, and it does not ask the contact first. For the feature overview, see [email marketing sync](/features/email-marketing-sync). ## Sync existing contacts Contacts that were already in your workspace before you connected are not sent on their own. To send them, click **Manage** on the Mailchimp row, then click **Sync existing contacts**. The button appears only while Mailchimp is connected. Tarkle sends the workspace's contacts in batches. When it finishes, it shows a message with the number of contacts it went through. Tarkle does not show an error for a single contact that fails. ## Disconnect Mailchimp Click **Manage** on the Mailchimp row, then click **Disconnect**. Tarkle removes the API key and the Audience ID from the workspace, and it stops sending contacts to Mailchimp. Disconnecting does not remove or unsubscribe anyone in your Mailchimp audience. After you disconnect, the row shows **Connect** again. ## What happens next After you connect, new contacts are sent to your audience as described above. To send the contacts that were already in the workspace, use **Sync existing contacts**. ## Related articles - [Slack integration](/help/integrations/slack-integration) - [Plausible integration](/help/integrations/plausible-analytics-integration) - [Google Analytics 4 integration](/help/integrations/google-analytics-4-integration) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/mailchimp-integration ### HubSpot Chat integration Add HubSpot live chat to the public pages of your workspace by saving your HubSpot Portal ID in Tarkle. The HubSpot Chat integration adds the HubSpot chat widget to the public pages of your workspace, such as [file transfer pages](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer). You connect it by saving your HubSpot Portal ID in Tarkle. For the other tools you can connect, see [Integrations: connect tools to Tarkle](/help/integrations/integrations-connect-tools-to-tarkle). ## Connect HubSpot Chat Integrations belong to each workspace. Open the workspace you want to change, then follow these steps. 1. Open [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) in the workspace settings. 2. Find the HubSpot card in the list. It is in the live chat group. 3. Click **Connect**. If HubSpot Chat is already connected, the button reads **Manage**. 4. In the dialog, type your HubSpot Portal ID in the **Portal ID** field. 5. Click **Save**. When you save, the dialog closes and the card shows a **Connected** label. Tarkle checks only that the field is not empty, and an empty field shows an error. Tarkle does not check the number itself, so copy the Portal ID exactly as HubSpot shows it. ## Disconnect HubSpot Chat Open the HubSpot card and click **Manage**, then click **Disconnect**. Tarkle removes the Portal ID from the workspace, and the chat widget stops loading on its public pages. To leave the dialog without changes, click **Cancel**. ## Who can change it Only the workspace owner, or a linked account that has access to the workspace, can save or disconnect HubSpot Chat. A workspace has one live chat connection. While HubSpot Chat is connected, the Intercom and Crisp cards are disabled. To use one of them instead, disconnect HubSpot Chat first. ## What happens next After you save, the chat loads on the public pages of that workspace. Open one of your file transfer pages to check it. ## Related articles - [Slack integration](/help/integrations/slack-integration) - [Google Tag Manager integration](/help/integrations/google-tag-manager-integration) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/hubspot-chat-integration ### Integrations: connect tools to Tarkle See where the Integrations tab is, which tools it lists, how each one connects and which plan Slack needs. Tarkle connects your workspace to other tools from the Integrations tab in Settings. The tab lists analytics, Slack, email marketing, live chat, reviews, scheduling, publishing, file storage, AI assistants and Zapier, and shows which of them are already connected. Use it to find a tool and connect it to the workspace you have open. ## Open the Integrations tab Open Settings in your workspace and choose the Integrations tab, or go straight to [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations). Only the workspace owner can open Settings, so other members cannot reach the Integrations tab. ## Find a tool and read its card The tab shows the tools connected to the workspace you have open. Each tool has a card with its logo, name and a short description. The button on the card reads **Connect** when the tool is not connected and **Manage** when it is. Use the search box, which reads "Search integrations...", to find a tool by its name, its description or its group. A group with no match is hidden while you search. If the tool you need is not in the list, click **Request integration**. Support opens with a request already written. ## Tools in the list The tools are grouped by type: - Analytics: [Google Analytics 4](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/google-analytics-4-integration), [Google Tag Manager](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/google-tag-manager-integration), [Fathom](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/fathom-analytics-integration), [Plausible](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/plausible-analytics-integration), Simple Analytics and Facebook Pixel. - Notifications: [Slack](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/slack-integration). - Payments: [Stripe](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/share-files-and-get-paid-with-stripe), for paid transfers. - Email marketing: Loops and Mailchimp. - Live chat: Intercom, HubSpot Chat and Crisp. - Reviews: Trustpilot. - Scheduling: [Cal.com](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/cal-com-integration) and Calendly. - Publishing: [WordPress](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/wordpress-integration). - Cloud storage: Dropbox and Google Drive. - AI: ChatGPT, Claude, SpaceXAI, Meta Muse and Perplexity. - Automation: Zapier. ## Connect a tool Most cards open a window for that tool. Fill in the details it asks for and save. Click **Manage** on a connected card to change its details or disconnect the tool. Some cards work differently: - **Slack** sends you to Slack's authorization page to approve the connection. - **WordPress** opens the WordPress plugin page in a new tab. - **Dropbox** and **Google Drive** open your [Account](/dashboard/account) page, where you connect them for yourself. These connections belong to your account, not to the workspace. - **ChatGPT**, **Claude**, **SpaceXAI**, **Meta Muse**, **Perplexity** and **Zapier** do not connect from the card. Clicking **Connect** opens support with a request to turn that tool on for your workspace. To connect an AI assistant with an access token, read [How to connect an AI assistant to Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/connect-ai-assistant-to-tarkle). ## Plans and groups Slack needs the Pro or Agency plan. On Free, the Slack card shows an **Upgrade** button instead of **Connect**. Agency includes everything in Pro. Billing belongs to your organization, so change the plan in [Billing](/dashboard/settings/billing). [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro) explains how to move from Free to Pro, and the [pricing page](/pricing) lists the plans. Some tools exclude each other. Only one tool can be connected in each of these groups: Fathom, Plausible and Simple Analytics; Intercom, HubSpot Chat and Crisp; Loops and Mailchimp; Cal.com and Calendly. While one tool in a group is connected, the others in that group are faded and their buttons are disabled. Disconnect the connected tool to choose another. The other tools in the list are not in a group. ## What happens next After a tool is connected, its card shows **Manage**. Open the help article for that tool for the details it needs. ## Related articles - [How to upgrade your organization from Free to Pro](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/how-to-upgrade-from-free-to-pro) - [What is included with Tarkle Free?](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/what-is-included-with-tarkle-free) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/integrations-connect-tools-to-tarkle ### Intercom integration Save your Intercom App ID in Tarkle, see where the chat bubble shows and disconnect Intercom. The Intercom integration connects your Intercom App ID to a Tarkle workspace, so the Intercom messenger loads on your public pages. This article covers how to connect it, where the chat bubble shows and how to disconnect it. ## Connect Intercom 1. Open **Settings** in the workspace you want to connect, choose the **Integrations** tab, or go straight to [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations). 2. Find the Intercom card under Live chat and click **Connect**. 3. In the dialog, paste your Intercom App ID into the **App ID** field. 4. Click **Save**. Save needs an App ID, so a blank field is not saved. The identity secret field below the App ID is optional. Tarkle stores what you enter there, but the messenger on your public pages loads with your App ID only, so Tarkle does not send a visitor's name, email or ID to Intercom. After you save, the page refreshes and the Intercom card shows a **Connected** badge and a **Manage** button. ## Where the chat bubble shows Once an App ID is saved, the Intercom messenger loads on the public pages of your workspace. Tarkle hides the chat bubble on [file transfer pages](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer), video pages, audio pages, [file request pages](/help/file-requests/what-are-file-requests-in-tarkle) and Brand Pages, so visitors do not see it there. The bubble stays visible on your other public pages. Note: if your organization is on the Free plan and its stored files are over the Free storage limit, its public pages return a not found page, so the messenger does not load on them either. ## One live chat tool at a time Intercom shares one live chat choice with HubSpot Chat and Crisp. While Intercom is connected, the HubSpot Chat and Crisp cards are faded and their buttons are disabled. Saving an App ID also clears any HubSpot Chat or Crisp setting in the workspace. To use one of those tools instead, disconnect Intercom first. ## Disconnect Intercom On the Intercom card, click **Manage**, then click **Disconnect** in the dialog. Tarkle removes the App ID and the identity secret, and the messenger stops loading on your public pages. To change the App ID instead, paste the new one into the App ID field and click **Save**. ## What happens next Once Intercom is disconnected, the HubSpot Chat and Crisp cards are available again, so you can connect one of them instead. ## Related articles - [Integrations: connect tools to Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/integrations-connect-tools-to-tarkle) - [What are transfers in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/intercom-integration ### Loops integration Connect Loops with your API key, and Tarkle sends each new contact to your Loops account. Connect your Loops account to Tarkle with your Loops API key. ## Before you connect - Only the owner of the workspace can connect, change, sync or disconnect Loops. Other members of the workspace cannot. - Loops and Mailchimp cannot be connected at the same time. While Mailchimp is connected, the Loops row is dimmed and its Connect button is disabled, so disconnect Mailchimp first. Connecting Loops also removes any Mailchimp key saved in the workspace. - Have your Loops API key ready. Copy it from your Loops account. ## Connect Loops 1. **Open Integrations.** Go to [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) in your workspace settings. 2. **Click Connect on the Loops row.** A dialog opens with an API key field. 3. **Paste your API key.** Paste the key from your Loops account into the field. The field hides the key as you type. 4. **Click Save.** Tarkle checks the key with Loops before it saves anything. If Loops rejects the key, the message says Loops rejected this API key. If Tarkle cannot reach Loops, or the check fails for another reason, the message says Could not reach Loops, try again. Nothing is saved in either case. If the field is empty, Tarkle asks you to enter your API key. ## What happens next When the key is saved, the Loops row shows the Connected badge, and its button reads Manage. From then on, Tarkle sends a contact to Loops when one of these happens: - You add a new contact from the dashboard. - A visitor enters an email address to open a transfer with an [email gate](/help/access-control/email-gated-file-transfers-collect-leads-before-sharing-file). - A buyer pays for a [paid transfer](/help/integrations/share-files-and-get-paid-with-stripe) and gives an email address. - You send a transfer to an email address that is not yet a contact. - A new person uploads files to one of your [file requests](/features/file-requests). Each contact is sent to your Loops account with its email address, its first and last name when Tarkle has them, and a source label that shows how the contact came to Tarkle. Tarkle does not add the contact to a Loops list. ## Send existing contacts to Loops 1. **Open the Loops dialog.** On [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations), click Manage on the Loops row. 2. **Click Sync existing contacts.** The button shows Syncing and a count while Tarkle works. When it finishes, Tarkle shows the message Synced followed by the number of contacts. Tarkle sends every contact in the workspace, including people who only received a transfer or uploaded a file. The number shown counts the contacts Tarkle has processed, not the contacts Loops has confirmed. ## Disconnect Loops 1. **Open the Loops dialog.** Click Manage on the Loops row. 2. **Click Disconnect.** Tarkle removes the Loops API key from the workspace and stops sending contacts to Loops. Contacts already in your Loops account stay there. After you disconnect, the Loops row shows Connect again. ## Related articles - [Share files and get paid with Stripe](/help/integrations/share-files-and-get-paid-with-stripe) - [Email gated file transfers](/help/access-control/email-gated-file-transfers-collect-leads-before-sharing-file) - [File requests](/features/file-requests) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/loops-integration ### Plausible integration Connect Plausible to Tarkle by entering your domain, so Plausible counts visits on your public pages. Plausible Analytics counts visits to your public pages. To connect it, enter your domain in the Plausible card on the Integrations page in Settings. Tarkle then adds the Plausible script to those pages. This article covers how to connect Plausible, which pages get the script, how it works with the other analytics tools, and how to change or disconnect it. ## How to connect Plausible Analytics Integrations are set per workspace, so repeat these steps in each workspace you want to track. 1. Open [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) in the workspace's Settings. 2. In the Analytics section, click Connect on the Plausible card. 3. In the Add Plausible window, type your domain in the field, for example yourdomain.com. 4. Click Save. Type the domain as you registered it in Plausible. Tarkle sends this value to Plausible as the site domain, and it saves what you type, apart from spaces at the start and end. Tarkle does not check the name against Plausible, so check the spelling before you save. If the field is empty, Tarkle shows an error and saves nothing. After a successful save, the card shows a Connected label and the domain as text. Note: Only the owner of the workspace, or a linked account that works on that workspace, can save or disconnect the domain. ## Plans and who can set it up The Plausible card does not ask for a plan upgrade, so you can connect it on any plan. If the card is missing from your Integrations list, a partner may have hidden it for this workspace. ## Which pages get the script After you save a domain, Tarkle adds the Plausible script to the public pages of the workspace: file transfer pages, file request pages, [Brand Pages](/help/branding/what-is-a-brand-page) and the other public pages. Plausible needs only the domain. Tarkle loads the script from plausible.io, and no other script address can be set. ## Analytics tools that switch each other off Plausible, [Fathom Analytics](/help/integrations/fathom-analytics-integration) and Simple Analytics form one group, so a workspace can have only one of them connected. While one of them is connected, the other two cards are greyed out and cannot be opened. To switch, open Manage on the connected card, click Disconnect, and then connect the other tool. [Google Analytics 4](/help/integrations/google-analytics-4-integration) is not in this group, so it can stay connected next to Plausible. ## Change or disconnect the domain A connected card shows the domain as text, with no field to edit it. To change the domain, open Manage on the Plausible card, click Disconnect, and then connect the card again with the new domain. Disconnect clears the domain at once, and Tarkle does not ask you to confirm. After that, Tarkle stops loading the Plausible script on the public pages. ## What happens next After you save, the Plausible card shows as connected, and the Plausible script loads on the public pages of the workspace. ## Related articles - [How to set up a custom domain](/help/branding/how-to-set-up-a-custom-domain) - [Google Tag Manager integration](/help/integrations/google-tag-manager-integration) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/plausible-analytics-integration ### Share files and get paid with Stripe Connect your own Stripe account to Tarkle to charge for access to your file transfers, then turn on paid transfers. Connect your own Stripe account to Tarkle to charge for access to a file transfer. When a recipient pays, the payment is made through your Stripe account and the files open for them. This article shows how to connect Stripe, add the webhook it needs, and turn on paid transfers. ## What you need - A Stripe account that takes live payments. Tarkle accepts live keys only. - Three values from Stripe: a publishable key, a secret key or a restricted key, and a webhook signing secret. - The owner of the workspace. Only the owner sees the Stripe card in Integrations. - A Pro or Agency plan to charge for access. Connecting Stripe is open on every plan. See [Tarkle plans and pricing](/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-plans-and-pricing) for what each plan includes. ## 1. Get your keys Copy your live publishable key and your live secret key or restricted key from your Stripe account. A restricted key works as well as a secret key. Tarkle refuses a test key. Then open [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) in your workspace settings. Integrations are set per workspace. In the **Payments** section, click **Connect** on the Stripe row. If Stripe is already connected, the row shows a **Connected** badge and a **Manage** button instead. The window is titled **Add Stripe**. Paste the **Publishable key** and the **Secret key** into it. Tarkle stores them encrypted and never shows them again. ## 2. Add the webhook Stripe tells Tarkle when a payment succeeds, so Tarkle can unlock the files for the buyer. Keep the Stripe window open while you set this up. 1. Click the copy button next to the webhook address shown in the Stripe window. 2. In your Stripe account, add a webhook pointing to that address. 3. Select the events `payment_intent.succeeded` and `checkout.session.completed`. Tarkle ignores any other event. 4. Copy the signing secret of that webhook. 5. In the Stripe window in Tarkle, paste it into **Webhook signing secret**. Tarkle checks every message from Stripe against the signing secret you saved, and rejects a message that does not match. ## 3. Save Click **Save**. Tarkle needs all three values, either typed now or already saved. When it saves, Stripe is switched on for the workspace and the row shows **Connected**. ## Two switches, not one Connecting Stripe does not by itself offer paid transfers. To charge for a transfer, you also turn on **Enable paid transfers** in **Settings → General → File settings**. The switch is off by default and is saved as soon as you change it. Only the workspace owner can change it. Paid transfers are a Pro feature, and Agency includes everything in Pro. On the Free plan the switch is locked with a **Pro** badge. Free can connect Stripe, but it cannot charge for transfers. When both switches are on and Stripe is connected, the Payments page appears in the sidebar and you can charge for access when you create a transfer. If one step is missing, the [troubleshooting article](/help/troubleshooting/why-cant-i-turn-on-paid-transfers) names the step to take. ## What the recipient sees When someone opens a paid file transfer link, the page shows the transfer name, its summary, the files included and the total price. The files stay hidden until payment. The recipient clicks **Proceed to checkout**, and a **Pay to download** window opens with Stripe's payment form. They click **Complete Payment**. The page then waits while the payment is recorded and opens the files. ## Change or disconnect Stripe To change a value, open **Manage** on the Stripe row, type the new value in its field and click **Save**. A field you leave empty keeps the value already saved. To stop charging, open **Manage** and click **Disconnect**. Tarkle switches Stripe off and keeps your saved keys, so you can connect again without entering them again. ## Related articles - [Paid transfers](/features/paid-transfers) - [Stripe integration](/integrations/stripe) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/share-files-and-get-paid-with-stripe ### Simple Analytics integration Connect Simple Analytics in Tarkle by entering your domain, so its script runs on your public pages. Simple Analytics is cookie-free analytics for your public pages. You connect it by entering your domain on the Integrations settings page, and then the Simple Analytics script loads on your public pages. This article covers how to connect it, change the domain, disconnect it, and what it works alongside. ## Connect Simple Analytics Connections are set per workspace, so open the workspace you want to track first. 1. Open [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) under **Settings** in that workspace. 2. Find the **Simple Analytics** row in the analytics tools list and click **Connect** on it. 3. In the **Add Simple Analytics** dialog, type your domain in the field, for example yourdomain.com. 4. Click **Save**. The field only checks that it is not empty, so type the domain alone. After you save, Tarkle shows a confirmation message, and the Simple Analytics row shows a **Connected** badge and a **Manage** button. ## Change the domain or disconnect it Click **Manage** on the Simple Analytics row. The dialog shows the saved domain as text that cannot be edited, so to use a different domain, disconnect first and then connect again. To disconnect, click **Disconnect** in the dialog. Tarkle clears the domain, the row goes back to **Connect**, and the Simple Analytics script stops loading on your public pages. ## One analytics tool at a time Simple Analytics, [Fathom](/help/integrations/fathom-analytics-integration) and [Plausible](/help/integrations/plausible-analytics-integration) form one group on the Integrations page. When one of them is connected, the other two rows are dimmed and cannot be opened. Disconnect the connected tool first, then connect the one you want. [Google Analytics 4](/help/integrations/google-analytics-4-integration) is not part of this group, so you can connect it while Simple Analytics is connected. ## Where the script runs The Simple Analytics script loads on the public pages of the workspace, the pages visitors and recipients open. If your organization is on Free and a workspace is over its storage limit, its public pages return a not found page, so the script does not run there. ## What happens next After you save, the Simple Analytics script loads on your public pages. To stop it, click **Manage** and then **Disconnect**. ## Related articles - [How to connect Fathom to Tarkle](/help/integrations/fathom-analytics-integration) - [Plausible integration](/help/integrations/plausible-analytics-integration) - [How to connect Google Analytics 4 to Tarkle](/help/integrations/google-analytics-4-integration) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/simple-analytics-integration ### Slack integration Connect Slack to a Tarkle workspace and choose the channel that receives its file alerts. Slack connects one Slack channel to a Tarkle workspace. After you connect, Tarkle posts alerts to that channel when people act on your files, such as viewing or downloading a transfer. Slack is included on Pro and Agency. Agency includes everything in Pro. For the other tools you can connect, see [Integrations: connect tools to Tarkle](/help/integrations/integrations-connect-tools-to-tarkle). ## Connect Slack Each Tarkle workspace has its own Slack connection and channel, so repeat these steps in every workspace you want to connect. On a plan without Slack, the Slack dialog shows an **Upgrade** button instead of **Connect Slack**. Plans and prices are on the [pricing page](/pricing). 1. Open [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) under **Settings** in the workspace. 2. Click the **Slack** card. 3. Click **Connect Slack**. Tarkle sends you to Slack's authorization page. 4. Approve access on Slack's page. 5. Tarkle returns you to **Settings**, then **Integrations**. Click the **Slack** card again. 6. Open the channel field and choose a channel. Private channels show a lock icon. If a channel is missing from the list, use the refresh button next to the field. 7. Click **Save**. The button stays disabled until you choose a channel. ## Which notifications are sent When you save a channel, Tarkle turns on these notifications for the workspace: - a transfer is viewed - a transfer is downloaded - a file request is viewed - a file request is fulfilled - a file is uploaded - an email is captured - a masked link is created - a Brand Page is viewed - a Brand Page is downloaded Every alert goes to the one channel you chose. To send alerts to another channel, choose it in the channel field and click **Save** again. ## If the connection does not finish If Slack does not complete the connection, Tarkle sends you back to the app home page without a message. Open **Settings**, then **Integrations**, and start again from the Slack card. ## Disconnect Slack Open the Slack card and click **Disconnect**. The button appears only while Slack is connected. Disconnecting removes the Slack connection and the chosen channel from the workspace. If you connect again to the same Slack workspace without disconnecting first, the channel you chose stays. After you disconnect, choose a channel again. Connecting a different Slack workspace clears the channel. If your plan no longer includes Slack, for example after a move to Free, Tarkle stops posting to Slack. The connection stays saved until you click **Disconnect**. ## What happens next After you click **Save**, the alerts listed above go to the channel you chose. Each integration has its own help article, for example the [Mailchimp integration](/help/integrations/mailchimp-integration). To see what the alerts report, read [Slack notifications](/features/view-download-tracking). ## Related articles - [Integrations: connect tools to Tarkle](/help/integrations/integrations-connect-tools-to-tarkle) - [Mailchimp integration](/help/integrations/mailchimp-integration) - [Slack notifications](/features/view-download-tracking) - [Transfer status](/features/transfer-status) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/slack-integration ### Slack integration Connect Slack to a Tarkle workspace and choose the channel that receives its file alerts. Slack connects one Slack channel to a Tarkle workspace. After you connect, Tarkle posts alerts to that channel when people act on your files, such as viewing or downloading a transfer. For the other tools you can connect, see [Integrations: connect tools to Tarkle](/help/integrations/integrations-connect-tools-to-tarkle). ## Connect Slack Each Tarkle workspace has its own Slack connection and channel, so repeat these steps in every workspace you want to connect. 1. Open [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) under Settings in the workspace. 2. Click the Slack card. 3. Connect Slack from the Slack window. Tarkle sends you to Slack's authorization page. 4. Approve access on Slack's page. 5. Tarkle returns you to Settings, then Integrations, and the Slack window opens by itself with the channel list. 6. Choose a channel in the list and save it. If a channel is missing from the list, close the window and open the Slack card again. ## If the connection does not finish If Slack does not complete the connection, Tarkle sends you back to the app home page without a message. Open Settings, then Integrations, and start again from the Slack card. ## Which notifications are sent The Slack window lists the notifications Tarkle can send to the channel, including **Brand page viewed** and **Brand page downloaded**. To see the numbers behind brand page alerts, read [How do I see views, downloads and requests for my brand pages?](/help/branding/views-downloads-and-requests). To see what the alerts report, read [Slack notifications](/features/view-download-tracking). ## Disconnect Slack Open the Slack card and click **Disconnect**. Click Disconnect in the Slack window to remove the connection, then choose a channel again if you connect later. ## What happens next After you save a channel, the alerts go to that channel. To check what each alert reports, read [Transfer status](/features/transfer-status). ## Related articles - [Integrations: connect tools to Tarkle](/help/integrations/integrations-connect-tools-to-tarkle) - [Slack notifications](/features/view-download-tracking) - [Transfer status](/features/transfer-status) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/slack-integration-2 ### Trustpilot integration Connect Trustpilot to a workspace by saving your BCC email, and disconnect it from the same card. Use the Trustpilot integration to save your Trustpilot BCC email address in a Tarkle workspace. Once the address is saved, the Trustpilot card in that workspace's Integrations settings shows as connected. For the other tools on the same page, see [Integrations: connect tools to Tarkle](/help/integrations/integrations-connect-tools-to-tarkle). Each workspace has its own connection, so repeat the steps below for every workspace you want to connect. ## Connect Trustpilot 1. Open [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) in the workspace you want to connect. 2. Click the **Trustpilot** card in the reviews section. The dialog opens with the title **Add Trustpilot**. 3. Paste your unique Trustpilot BCC email address into the BCC email field. 4. Click **Save**. If the field is empty when you click **Save**, Tarkle shows an error and does not save anything. ## Change or disconnect the address A connected card does not have an edit field. Its dialog shows the saved address on one line, next to a **Disconnect** button. Clicking **Disconnect** clears the saved address, and the card stops showing as connected. To use a different address, click **Disconnect** first. Then click the **Trustpilot** card again, paste the new address into the field and click **Save**. ## Who can connect Trustpilot Only the account that owns the workspace can save or remove the BCC email. Other team members who try to save or disconnect get a Not authorized error. The Trustpilot card does not need a paid plan. On the Integrations page, Slack is the only integration marked as needing an upgrade. ## What happens next After you save, the Trustpilot card shows as connected and keeps the address until you disconnect it. To connect another tool from the same page, see [Slack integration](/help/integrations/slack-integration) or the other articles in the Integrations category. ## Related articles - [Integrations: connect tools to Tarkle](/help/integrations/integrations-connect-tools-to-tarkle) - [Slack integration](/help/integrations/slack-integration) - [Calendly integration](/help/integrations/calendly-integration) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/trustpilot-integration ### WordPress integration Connect the Tarkle WordPress plugin with an API token to embed transfers and file requests on your site. The WordPress integration connects the Tarkle WordPress plugin to your workspace, so the plugin can embed your transfers and file requests on your WordPress site. The plugin connects with an API token that you create in Tarkle. ## Create an API token for WordPress The WordPress panel shows **Connected** as soon as the workspace has an API token that has not been revoked. If no token is listed yet, follow these steps. 1. Open [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) in Settings and find WordPress in the list. The WordPress panel lists the setup steps. 2. Click **Go to Developers**. The Developers page opens on the **API Tokens** tab. 3. Click **New token**. 4. In the **Create API token** dialog, type a **Token name**, for example WordPress Integration. 5. Leave the boxes under **Public API access** unchecked. The WordPress plugin does not need any access. For the scopes behind those boxes, read the [Brand API quick start](/docs/developers/brand-api-quick-start). 6. Click **Create**. 7. In **Token created**, click the box under **Token (shown once)** to copy the token, then click **Done**. 8. Paste the token in your WordPress plugin settings. The token is shown only once, so copy it and save it in a secure location before you click **Done**. ## Check the connection Once a token exists, the WordPress panel lists it under **Active API token**. The panel shows the newest token that has not been revoked. Any token in the workspace appears there, including one made for another purpose, so keep that in mind when you choose the token for WordPress. - **Name** and **Token**: the token name, and the first characters of the token followed by dots. - **Created**, and **Last used**, which appears once the plugin has used the token. - **Connected domains**: the first WordPress site that called Tarkle, shown as Connected to followed by its domain. When more sites connect, the panel adds a count, for example and 1 other or and 2 others. Until a site connects, the panel shows Waiting for WordPress plugin to connect... Use **Manage token** to open the **API Tokens** tab, where you rename, revoke and create tokens. ## Replace or disconnect a token To replace a token, create a new one as described above and paste it in your WordPress plugin settings. Then revoke the old token. On the **API Tokens** tab, open the three-dot menu on the token's row, click **Revoke**, and click **Revoke** again in the dialog. A revoked token no longer works, so the plugin's next request is refused. Click **Disconnect** in the WordPress panel to clear the connected domains. Disconnect does not revoke the token. To stop the plugin from using it, revoke the token on the **API Tokens** tab. A workspace under a reseller partner that hides WordPress cannot load WordPress status. ## What the plugin can embed These rules apply to what the plugin can embed. - A transfer must be public. Only public transfers can be embedded on WordPress. A transfer that is disabled, expired or already burned cannot be embedded either. - A download embed works only for transfers set to direct download. For more on direct download links, read [Direct download links in Tarkle](/help/file-sharing/direct-download-links-in-tarkle). - Each embed link is signed for 10 minutes. ## What happens next Once a WordPress site connects with the token, its domain appears under **Connected domains** in the WordPress panel. ## Related articles - [Embed a file request on your website](/help/file-requests/embed-a-file-request-form-on-your-website-with-tarkle) - [What are transfers in Tarkle?](/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/wordpress-integration ### WordPress integration Connect the Tarkle WordPress plugin with an API token to embed transfers and file requests on your site. The WordPress integration connects the Tarkle WordPress plugin to your workspace, so the plugin can embed your transfers and file requests on your WordPress site. The plugin connects with a developer token that you create in Tarkle, on the API page, Settings > API. Tarkle turns Settings > API on for all accounts at once. Until then the page is not found, so the steps below cannot be completed. ## Create a token for WordPress The WordPress panel shows **Connected** as soon as you have a developer token. If no token is listed yet, follow these steps. 1. Open [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations) in Settings and find **WordPress** in the list. The WordPress panel lists the setup steps. 2. Click **Go to Developers**. The button opens Settings > API. 3. Click **New token**. 4. If the dialog asks which kind of token to make, click **Developer token**. 5. In **Token name**, type a name you will recognise, for example WordPress Integration. 6. Leave the boxes under **Public API access** unchecked. The WordPress plugin does not need any access. To learn what the access choices do, read [API tokens and webhooks](/help/integrations/api-tokens-and-webhooks). 7. Click **Create token**. 8. In **Token (shown once)**, click the token to copy it, then click **Done**. 9. Paste the token in your WordPress plugin settings. The token is shown only once, so copy it and save it in a secure location before you click **Done**. ## Check the connection Once a token exists, the WordPress panel lists the newest developer token under **Active API token**. The panel shows its name, its token and when it was created, and **Last used** appears once the plugin has used it. The panel shows the newest token whatever it was made for, so keep that in mind when you create one for WordPress. The **Connected domains** section shows the first WordPress site that called Tarkle, as Connected to followed by its domain. When more sites connect, the panel adds a count, for example and 1 other or and 2 others. Until a site connects, the panel shows Waiting for WordPress plugin to connect... ## Replace or disconnect a token To replace a token, create a new one as described above and paste it in your WordPress plugin settings. Then delete the old token on the API page: open its menu, click **Delete**, and confirm. A deleted token stops working right away, everywhere it is used. Click **Disconnect** in the WordPress panel to clear the connected domains. To stop the plugin from using its token, delete that token on the API page. A workspace under a reseller partner that hides WordPress cannot load WordPress status. ## What the plugin can embed A transfer must be public. Only public transfers can be embedded on WordPress. To learn what a transfer is, read [What are transfers in Tarkle?](/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle). ## What happens next Once a WordPress site connects with the token, its domain appears under **Connected domains** in the WordPress panel. ## Related articles - [Embed a file request on your website](/help/file-requests/embed-a-file-request-form-on-your-website-with-tarkle) - [What are transfers in Tarkle?](/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle) - [API tokens and webhooks](/help/integrations/api-tokens-and-webhooks) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/wordpress-integration-2 --- # Help: Video transfer Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer ### How to create a branded video page with a Bunny Stream video Paste a Bunny Stream player link into a video transfer and share the video on a Tarkle page. If your video is hosted on Bunny Stream, you can share it on a Tarkle video page by pasting its player link into a video transfer. ## When this is useful Use this when your video is already on Bunny Stream and you want to share it on a Tarkle video page with a title and your workspace name. For a video you upload to Tarkle, read [How to create a video transfer](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-video-transfer). For a YouTube video, read [How to create a branded video page with a YouTube video](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-youtube-video). ## Link formats Tarkle accepts Tarkle plays a Bunny Stream video from a player link in one of these two forms: - `https://player.mediadelivery.net/embed/LIBRARYID/VIDEOID` - `https://player.mediadelivery.net/play/LIBRARYID/VIDEOID` The library ID is a number. The video ID can contain letters, numbers and hyphens, and the link must start with `https://`. A link on another Bunny address, such as `iframe.mediadelivery.net`, is recognized as Bunny Stream, but the video page shows no player for it. Use the player link in one of the two forms above. ## How to set it up 1. Copy the player link of your video from Bunny Stream. Use one of the two forms above. 2. Open the transfer window as described in [How to create a video transfer](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-video-transfer) and choose **Videos**. The window offers **Files**, **Videos** and **Audio**. 3. Open the **Link** tab and paste the player link. When Tarkle recognizes the link, it shows **Detected: Bunny Stream** under it. 4. Go to the next step and enter a title. The title names the page. 5. On the last step, choose who can open the page. To ask for a password, turn on password protection. ## What your client sees Share the link Tarkle creates. The video page opens at your workspace address, or at your custom domain when one is set. The browser tab shows the transfer title followed by your workspace name, and the video plays on the page. Each time someone opens the page, Tarkle counts a view on the transfer. For the layout of the page, read [What is a video transfer page?](/help/video-transfer/what-is-a-video-transfer-page). If you turn on a password, the viewer enters it before the video loads. Members of your workspace are not asked for it. The viewer's side of a password is explained in [How recipients open a password protected transfer](/help/access-control/password-protected-file-sharing-with-tarkle). After the expiry date, or when the transfer is disabled, the page shows a not-found page. ## What happens next Send the link to your client. When they open it, the video plays on your page with the title you entered. ## Related articles - [How to create a branded video page with a Loom video](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-loom-video) - [How to create a branded video page with a Wistia video](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-wistia-video) - [How to create a branded video page with a Gumlet video](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-gumlet-video) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-bunny-stream-video ### How to create a branded video page with a Gumlet video Wrap a Gumlet video in a Tarkle video page with its embed link, and choose who can open it. A Gumlet video can play on a Tarkle video page. Tarkle creates the page and its link, and the video plays inside an embedded Gumlet player on that page. This article shows how to create the page from a Gumlet video and what your recipients see. A video page is a video transfer. [What are transfers in Tarkle?](/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle) explains the three transfer types. ## Before you start Copy your Gumlet video link in this form: `https://play.gumlet.io/embed/ASSETID`, where ASSETID is the ID of the video in Gumlet. Only links in this form play on the video page, so use the embed form and not another Gumlet address. ## Create the video page 1. Open **[Transfers](/dashboard/transfers)** in your workspace and start a new transfer. 2. Choose the video transfer type. 3. Paste the Gumlet link into the transfer dialog. 4. Enter a title for the page. 5. Choose who can open the page, as described in the next section. 6. Finish the dialog to create the transfer. ## Choose who can open the page When you create the transfer, you choose one of three ways to open it: anyone with the link, people from one client organization, or a password. You can also set an expiry date. After that date the page no longer opens. [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer) shows how to set a password and an expiry. You can also add an email check. A visitor passes the email check once, and then the page stays open for that visitor for 24 hours. A visitor who enters the password stays unlocked for 30 days. Changing the password locks everyone out again. Signed-in people with access to the workspace open the page without the password or the email check. ## What your recipients see Recipients open the page link, and the video plays inside an embedded Gumlet player. The player's own controls come from Gumlet, and the video stays hosted on Gumlet. While a password or email check is not passed, the video does not show. ## What happens next Once the transfer is created, send the page link to your recipient. ## Related articles - [How to create a branded video page with a Loom video](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-loom-video) - [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-gumlet-video ### How to create a branded video page with a Loom video Paste a Loom share link into a video transfer in Tarkle to share the recording on a branded video page. A Tarkle video page shows a Loom recording with your transfer title. This article shows how to create that page from a Loom share link. If you are new to transfer types, read [What are transfers in Tarkle?](/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle) first. ## Before you start Copy the share link of the Loom recording. Tarkle recognises a Loom link only when it contains `loom.com/share`. ## Create the video page 1. Open [Transfers](/dashboard/transfers) in your workspace and start a new transfer. 2. In the transfer dialog, choose **Videos**. 3. Open the **Link** tab and paste the Loom share link into the field. 4. Check the line under the field. When Tarkle recognises the link, it shows **Detected: Loom**. 5. Click the button to go to the next step. 6. Enter a **Title**, which is required. You can also add a **Summary** of up to 150 characters. 7. Go to the last step and choose how people can open the page. Tick **Password protected** and type the password in the box that says "Set a password", or turn on an email check. To learn more about passwords, read [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer). 8. Click the button that creates the transfer. ## What your recipients see Recipients open the link to a page with the transfer title above the Loom recording. The player hides the Loom owner name and the share buttons. The page uses your workspace colours and favicon. If you set a password, the recording stays hidden until the correct password is entered. ## Download options Download options are offered only for uploaded videos. ## Which links work Only Loom share links are recognised. A link to another Loom address, such as an embed link, is not recognised as Loom, and the dialog shows "Unsupported link" instead of **Detected: Loom**. In that case, copy the share link from Loom and paste it again. ## Related articles - [What are transfers in Tarkle?](/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle) covers the three transfer types and the access settings. - [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer) shows how to pause a link. Source: https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-loom-video ### How to create a branded video page with a Vimeo video Paste a Vimeo video link into a video transfer and share the page at your Workspace URL or Custom domain. If your video is already on Vimeo, you can share it on a branded Tarkle video page instead of sending the Vimeo link. This article shows how to create that transfer and what your client sees when they open it. ## When this is useful Use this when your video is already hosted on Vimeo and you want clients to open it on a page with your title. The video itself stays on Vimeo and plays inside the Tarkle page. To share a video stored in Tarkle, read [How to create a video transfer](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-video-transfer). ## How to create the page 1. Open [Transfers](/dashboard/transfers) and click **New transfer**. 2. In the dialog, choose **Videos**. 3. Open the **Link** tab. 4. Paste the Vimeo video link into the field. When Tarkle recognizes it, **Detected: Vimeo** appears under the field. 5. Click the button to go to the next step. 6. On the second step, enter a title. Tarkle asks for a title before you can go on. 7. On the third step, set who can open the page. You can add a password, or set an expiry date after which the page stops opening. 8. Click the button at the bottom of the dialog that creates the transfer. Use a link to one video, in the form `https://vimeo.com/` followed by the video's number, such as `https://vimeo.com/123456789`. The page reads the number from the link and builds the player from it. A link to an album, a channel, a group, or the `vimeo.com/video/` form does not play on the page. ## What your client sees The client opens the page at your Custom domain when one is active, and at your Workspace URL otherwise. The video plays in Vimeo's player, which is embedded in the page under your title. Tarkle passes only the autoplay setting to that player. If you added a password, the page asks for it before the video plays. After the expiry date, the page shows a not-found page. Each time someone opens the page, Tarkle counts a view on the transfer. To see who opened it, read [How to see if a recipient opened your transfer](/help/tracking/how-to-see-if-a-recipient-opened-your-transfer). > **Note:** Tarkle keeps the link to the Vimeo video and does not copy the video into Tarkle. If the video is deleted from Vimeo, the page can no longer play it. ## Custom domain The Free plan includes a custom domain, so the page can open on an address you own. Custom domains are set per workspace on [Domains](/dashboard/settings/domains). To connect one, read [How to set up a custom domain](/help/branding/how-to-set-up-a-custom-domain). You can compare the plans on [pricing](/pricing). ## What happens next After you create the transfer, share its page link with your client. The page opens at your Custom domain or Workspace URL, and each view is counted on the transfer. ## Related articles - [How to create a video transfer](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-video-transfer) - [What is a video transfer page?](/help/video-transfer/what-is-a-video-transfer-page) - [How to create a branded video page with a Loom video](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-loom-video) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-vimeo-video ### How to create a branded video page with a Wistia video Paste a Wistia video link into a Tarkle video transfer and share the video on a branded page. This article covers how to put a video hosted on Wistia on a Tarkle video page. The page carries your [custom branding](/features/custom-branding), and the video plays inside it. ## Wistia links Tarkle accepts Tarkle accepts these three forms of Wistia link: - `https://yourcompany.wistia.com/medias/MEDIAID` - `https://yourcompany.wistia.com/m/MEDIAID` - `https://fast.wistia.net/embed/iframe/MEDIAID` You can also paste a Wistia embed code. Tarkle reads the media ID from it. Note: Wistia `/s/` share links do not play on the Tarkle video page. Tarkle still shows **Detected: Wistia** for them, so use the `/medias/` or `/m/` link instead. ## Create the video page 1. Open the **Share** dialog in your workspace. 2. Click **Videos**, then click **Link**. 3. Paste the Wistia link into the field. When Tarkle recognizes it, it shows **Detected: Wistia** under the field. 4. When the link is in place, go on to the second step. 5. On the second step, enter a **Title**. The title is required. The **Summary** can be up to 150 characters. 6. Go on to the third step to set the access choices. 7. For a Wistia link, the third step offers **Gated** and a password option. 8. Press the button that creates the transfer. For a Wistia link, the download, watermark, autoplay, casting, Picture-in-Picture and public embedding settings are not offered. Those settings are for uploaded or library videos. ## What happens next When you press the button that creates the transfer, Tarkle creates the video transfer. The video plays inside the Tarkle page through Wistia's embed, and the people you send the page to can watch it there. For a video hosted on YouTube or Loom, follow [How to create a branded video page with a YouTube video](https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-youtube-video) or [How to create a branded video page with a Loom video](https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-loom-video). ## Related articles - [How to create a video transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-video-transfer) - [What is a video transfer page?](https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/what-is-a-video-transfer-page) - [How to create a branded video page with a YouTube video](https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-youtube-video) - [How to create a branded video page with a Loom video](https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-loom-video) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-wistia-video ### How to create a branded video page with a YouTube video Paste a YouTube video link into a video transfer and share the branded page under your own address. If your video is already on YouTube, you can wrap it in a Tarkle video transfer. Your client opens a branded page with the video on it, and you paste the YouTube link instead of uploading the file again. ## When this is useful Use this when a YouTube video is your final deliverable and you want to share it on a branded page instead of sending a youtube.com link. For a video stored in Tarkle, read [How to create a video transfer](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-video-transfer). ## How to create the page 1. Open **New transfer** and choose **Videos**. The type choices are **Files**, **Videos** and **Audio**. 2. Open the **Link** tab. Paste the YouTube video link into the link field. Tarkle recognises the link and shows **Detected: YouTube**. 3. Go to the next step. Enter a **Title**, which names the page. You can add a **Summary** of up to 150 characters. 4. On the last step, choose who can open the page. To ask for a password, turn on password protection. 5. Click the button at the bottom of the dialog that creates the transfer. Tarkle also reads Vimeo, Loom, Wistia, Bunny and Gumlet links the same way. For Loom, read [How to create a branded video page with a Loom video](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-loom-video). For Gumlet, read [How to create a branded video page with a Gumlet video](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-gumlet-video). ## What your client sees Share the link Tarkle creates. The page opens on your custom domain when one is set, and on your workspace address otherwise. The video plays inside the branded page. ## Track views Transfer status shows whether a transfer was delivered, viewed or downloaded. To see exactly what the recipient sees and can download on the page, read [What is a video transfer page?](/help/video-transfer/what-is-a-video-transfer-page). ## Related articles - [How to create a video transfer](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-video-transfer) - [What is a video transfer page?](/help/video-transfer/what-is-a-video-transfer-page) - [How to create a branded video page with a Loom video](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-loom-video) - [How to create a branded video page with a Gumlet video](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-gumlet-video) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-youtube-video ### How to create an audio transfer Add audio files to a listening page, then choose listen only, free download or paid download for your listeners. An audio transfer gives your listeners a page with a player for your audio files. You choose whether they can only listen, download the tracks for free, or pay before they download. This page shows how to create one and what listeners see. ## Create an audio transfer 1. Open the transfer dialog and choose the audio transfer type. Tarkle creates file, video and audio transfers in the same dialog. [What are transfers in Tarkle?](/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle) explains the three types. 2. Add your audio files. Each file becomes a track in the player. Only audio files are accepted: mp3, wav, ogg, m4a, aac, flac, aif, aiff, opus and wma. Any other file is refused with the message "Only audio files can be added to an audio transfer." 3. Enter a title for the transfer. A summary and a cover image are optional. 4. Choose how listeners get the tracks. Tick **Allow download** to let anyone who opens the page download all tracks for free. Tick **Charge for download** to have listeners pay first. If you tick neither box, listeners can play the tracks but cannot download them. 5. If you tick **Charge for download**, set the price, the currency, the preview length and an optional sales limit. The section below explains each one. 6. Finish the transfer and share its link. Listeners open the transfer on its own audio page. ## What listeners see Each track appears in the player with its waveform, its name, its file type and its size. The main play button reads **Play**. The buttons beside it skip back or forward 15 seconds and cycle the speed through 0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.5 and 2 times normal speed. Listeners can also mute the sound and click the waveform to jump to another point in the track. When downloads are allowed, the top right of the player shows a **Download all** button. On a free transfer it saves all tracks as one ZIP file. Each track also has a menu with a download option. A listen-only transfer shows no download button, and Tarkle refuses download requests for it. ## Charge for download Charging for downloads needs three things. First, the organization needs a Pro plan, because paid transfers are a Pro feature and Agency includes everything in Pro. Compare the plans on [the pricing page](/pricing). Second, connect Stripe to your workspace under **Settings**, then **Integrations**, on [Integrations](/dashboard/settings/integrations). Third, go to **Settings**, then **General**, then **File settings**, and turn on **Enable paid transfers**. The switch is off by default. If you see a message when you try to charge, [Why can't I turn on paid transfers?](/help/troubleshooting/why-cant-i-turn-on-paid-transfers) explains each one. Once charging is on, set the paid fields: - **Price** and **currency**. Tarkle accepts the currencies Stripe supports. When a listener pays, Tarkle creates a Stripe payment for that price and currency. - **Preview length**. This is the number of seconds of each track a listener can play before the payment prompt opens. The dialog starts at 30 seconds. - **Sales limit**. This is optional. Leave it empty for no limit. Tarkle counts completed purchases and refuses a download once the limit is reached. A paid transfer cannot use a password, burn after read, an email check before download, view only or an expiry date. Tarkle refuses to create a paid transfer that has one of them, and the message names the setting. On a paid transfer the play button reads **Preview**. Playback stops at the preview length and the payment prompt opens. The main button then reads **Buy for** the price and currency, or **Buy now** when there is no price to show. A listener who has paid can download the tracks. ## What happens next Share the transfer link with your listeners. On a free transfer they can play and download the tracks straight away. On a paid transfer they listen to the preview, pay on the page, and then download. [What is an audio transfer page?](/help/video-transfer/what-is-an-audio-transfer-page) describes the page in more detail. ## Related articles - [How to charge for access to a transfer](/help/selling-files/charge-for-access-create-paid-transfers) - [Share files and get paid with Stripe](/help/integrations/share-files-and-get-paid-with-stripe) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-an-audio-transfer ### How to create a video transfer Add a video from the Upload video window or New Transfer, then set download and playback options for its page. A video transfer gives your recipient a video page with the video player, the title, and a line with the creator's name, the video length, the size and the date. You can create one in two ways. The **Upload video** window on the Videos page creates the transfer in one step. The **New Transfer** window lets you paste a link or pick a video from your library, and it has more settings. To learn more about the types of transfer, read [What are transfers in Tarkle?](/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle). ## Video size and storage The largest video you can upload depends on your plan. Free supports uploads and transfers up to 1 GB each. Pro and Agency support files up to 200 GB. Compare the plans on [plans and pricing](/pricing). Each video you upload is saved to your workspace Files and counts toward your storage. ## Create a video transfer from the Upload video window 1. On the Videos page, click **Upload video**. 2. Drop a video file on the window, or click **browse** and choose one. Accepted formats are MP4, WebM, MOV, AVI, MKV, M4V, FLV, WMV, 3GP and MPEG. A file that is not a video is refused with the message "That file doesn't look like a video we can process." 3. The upload starts as soon as you pick the file. The status line shows "Video file uploading..." with a progress bar, then "Video is uploaded and ready". If the upload fails, the window shows "Upload failed. Please try again." Click **Try Again** to start over. 4. When the status shows "Video is uploaded and ready", click **Done**. Tarkle creates the transfer with the file name as its title, without the file extension, and a public link. This window does not ask for a summary or download options. The page then reloads and the video appears in your library. Tarkle makes an MP4 copy of each uploaded video. While that copy is still being made, the video page plays the file you uploaded. To add a summary or choose download options, create the transfer in **New Transfer** instead. ## Create a video transfer in New Transfer 1. Open **New Transfer**. The window offers **Files**, **Videos** and **Audio**. Choose **Videos**. 2. Choose how to add the video on the tabs. **Upload** lets you drop or browse for a file. **Link** lets you paste a link. **Library** lets you pick a video that is already in your workspace. Only video files can be added to a video transfer. 3. For a link, paste a YouTube, Vimeo, Loom or Wistia link. When the video is ready, go on to the second step. 4. On the second step, enter a **Title** and a **Summary**. The wand button next to the **Title** field fills in both with AI. The AI assistant (Beta) is included in Pro. 5. Go on to the third step to set the options listed below. 6. Press the button that creates the transfer. The window then shows the transfer link, and you can copy it. ### Options on the third step For an uploaded video, the third step offers these options: - **Show watermark during playback** overlays your workspace name on the video while it plays. Turning it on turns downloads off. - **Allow download** lets anyone download the video for free. Turning it on turns the watermark off. - **Charge for download** lets viewers watch a free preview and pay to download the video. This option appears only when paid transfers are switched on and Stripe is connected. Paid transfers are a Pro feature. Turn on the **Enable paid transfers** switch in Settings. When you choose this option, you set a **Price**, a currency, and the free preview length in seconds, with 30 as the default. Casting, Picture-in-Picture and public embedding are turned off for a paid transfer. To connect Stripe, read [Share files and get paid with Stripe](/help/integrations/share-files-and-get-paid-with-stripe). - **Autoplay** starts the video muted when a viewer opens the page. If the browser blocks it, the viewer presses Play. - **Allow casting** and **Allow Picture-in-Picture** are on by default. They let viewers cast the video or pop it out into a floating window. - **Allow public embedding** is off by default. It lets viewers embed the video on their own site with the Embed action. Use the expiration date option to set a date with the calendar. After that date, the video page shows a not-found page. For more on expiry dates, read [File transfer expiration dates in Tarkle](/help/access-control/file-transfer-expiration-dates-in-tarkle). For a link video, the third step offers **Gated** and a password option. To learn how viewers open a password protected transfer, read [How recipients open a password protected transfer](/help/access-control/password-protected-file-sharing-with-tarkle). ## What viewers see The video page shows the video player, the title and a line with the creator's name, the video length, the size and the date. The player uses your workspace name and logo. If you allowed downloads, the page offers the video for download. Each time someone opens the page, the view is counted on the transfer. A password or email gate applies to viewers. People signed in to the workspace are not asked for it. After the expiration date, or when the transfer is disabled, the page shows a not-found page. ## Related articles - [What is a video transfer page?](/help/video-transfer/what-is-a-video-transfer-page) - [How to create a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer) - [How to password protect and set an expiry on a file transfer](/help/getting-started/password-protect-expire-and-pause-a-transfer) - [Why can't I turn on paid transfers?](/help/troubleshooting/why-cant-i-turn-on-paid-transfers) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-video-transfer ### How to embed an audio transfer on your website Copy the embed code for a public audio transfer and paste it on your website to show a listen-only player. Show an audio transfer on your own web page with its player. Visitors can listen without leaving your page. The embedded player is listen only, so it has no download button. ## Before you start - The transfer must be an audio transfer with at least one audio track. To add tracks, see [How to create an audio transfer](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-an-audio-transfer). - The transfer must be public. The Embed audio option only appears for public transfers, and a private transfer shows a "not found" page in the embed. - Your organization must be on a plan that includes embeds. Embeds are included on Pro, and Agency includes everything in Pro. On the Free plan, the Embed audio option does not appear. Compare the plans on [pricing](/pricing). A password or an email gate can stay on the transfer. Viewers enter the password or email inside the embed, and the player loads after that. See [How recipients open a password protected transfer](/help/access-control/password-protected-file-sharing-with-tarkle). ## Copy the embed code 1. Open the [Transfers](/dashboard/transfers) list and click the three-dot menu on the audio transfer's row, or open the transfer's detail page and click its three-dot menu. 2. Click **Embed audio**. Tarkle copies the embed code to your clipboard and shows the message "Embed code copied". ## Paste the code on your page 1. Add a custom HTML block or an embed section where the player should appear. 2. Paste the code into it and save the page. The player appears on the page inside a frame that is at least 500px tall. The embedded player reports its height, and the frame changes its height to fit the player. ## What viewers see The player lists the tracks in the transfer, shows a waveform, and has play and pause, skip back and forward 15 seconds, mute, and playback speed from 0.75x to 2x. There is no download button. If the transfer has a password or an email gate, viewers see a form first, and the player loads after they pass it. ## When the embed shows "not found" The embed shows a "not found" page when the transfer is private, disabled or expired, when it is not an audio transfer, or when the organization's plan does not include embeds. If the transfer is disabled, [enable it again](/help/file-sharing/how-to-pause-or-disable-a-transfer-in-tarkle). ## Width and address The embed is at most 768px wide and centered on the page. In a narrower space, it fills the width of its container. The address in the code uses your workspace's custom domain when one is set. Otherwise it uses your workspace address on tarkle.com. ## What happens next Open the page where you pasted the code and check that the player shows. Viewers can then listen on your page without a download step. ## Related articles - [What is an audio transfer page?](/help/video-transfer/what-is-an-audio-transfer-page) - [How to embed a file transfer](/help/file-sharing/how-to-embed-a-file-transfer) - [Embed audio on your website](/features/embed-audio) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-embed-an-audio-transfer-on-your-website ### How to embed a video transfer on your website Copy the embed code for a public video transfer from the Transfers list and paste it on your website. You can show a video transfer on any page of your website. The embed code places your branded video player on the page, so visitors can watch the video without leaving your site. This article covers which plans include embedding, how to copy the code, and what visitors see. For the page a video transfer opens on its own, read [What is a video transfer page?](/help/video-transfer/what-is-a-video-transfer-page). ## Before you start Embedding is available on Pro and Agency. Free does not include it, and on Free the **Embed video** item does not appear in the transfer menu. Agency includes everything in Pro. Compare the plans on [plans and pricing](/pricing). The transfer must be public. The **Embed video** item only appears for public transfers, and the embed does not play for a transfer that is not public. The video transfer also needs public embedding turned on. Until it is on, the embed does not play for visitors. A video transfer set to paid download cannot be embedded. If the video transfer is disabled or its expiry date has passed, visitors see a not-found page inside the embed. To create a video transfer, read [How to create a video transfer](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-video-transfer). ## How to get the embed code 1. Open [Transfers](/dashboard/transfers) in the workspace that holds the video. 2. Click the three-dot menu at the end of the video transfer's row. 3. Click **Embed video**. If the transfer holds more than one video, the **Choose a video to embed** window opens. Click the video you want. An embed plays one video at a time, and the code for that video is copied. A transfer with one video copies its code straight away. Tarkle then shows **Embed code copied**. If the copy fails, it shows **Could not copy embed code to clipboard**. ## Paste it into your site Paste the code into your page where your website accepts HTML, such as a custom HTML block. The code is one frame with a short script that keeps the frame in step with the player. The frame fills the width of the space it sits in. Then publish the page the way your website normally does. The address in the code uses your custom domain if your workspace has one. Otherwise it uses your Workspace URL. ## What visitors see The frame starts at a minimum height of 600 px and changes its height to fit the player once the page loads. The player uses your workspace's accent color, text color and logo, and the transfer's cover image as its poster. If watermarking is on for the transfer, the player shows your workspace name as a watermark. Download is always off in the embed, so visitors cannot download the video from it. Casting, picture-in-picture and autoplay follow the transfer's own settings. If the transfer has a password or an email check, visitors complete that form inside the embed before the video plays. A video transfer made from a YouTube, Vimeo, Loom or Wistia link shows that service's player in the embed instead. ## What happens next Open the page where you pasted the code and check that the video plays. Each view of the embed is logged in the [activity log](/dashboard/activity). ## Related articles - [What is a video transfer page?](/help/video-transfer/what-is-a-video-transfer-page) - [How to create a video transfer](/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-video-transfer) - [Embed video on your website](/features/embed-video) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-embed-a-video-transfer-on-your-website ### What is an audio transfer page? The audio transfer page is the public player where listeners play, preview, download or buy your tracks. The audio transfer page is the page your listeners open when you share an audio transfer. It holds a player for your tracks, your workspace branding, and any description, body text or button you added to the transfer. This article explains what the page shows, what listeners can do on it, and how the download setting you choose changes it. ## What the page shows The player is at the top of the page. If the transfer has a cover image, it appears beside the player. Without one, a gradient panel with the workspace name shows instead. The player and its buttons use the workspace's accent color. Below the player you see the transfer title, the creator's name, the created and updated dates, and the share and report buttons. The description comes next, if one was added, followed by the body text and the call-to-action button when the transfer has them. The call-to-action button opens its link in a new tab. ## Playing the tracks Each track plays in the browser. The waveform shows the track you have selected, and clicking it moves playback to that point. Above the waveform, the page shows the track number and the total size, for example Track 1 of 3. Below the waveform are the Play or Pause button, the back and forward 15 seconds buttons, a mute button, and a speed button that cycles through 0.75×, 1×, 1.25×, 1.5× and 2×. When a transfer has more than one track, a list below the player shows each track with its play button, its name, its format and size, and its duration. The list starts with the first 10 tracks. If there are more, a button labeled Show all, followed by the number of tracks, shows the rest. When a track ends, the next one starts, and after the last track playback returns to the first. ## Download setting The download setting is chosen when you create the transfer, and listen only is the default. For the steps, see [How to create an audio transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-an-audio-transfer). - **Listen only**: the page has no download button, and download requests are refused. - **Free download**: the page shows a **FREE Downloads** badge and a **Download all** button that saves every track as one ZIP file. Each track's menu also has **Download track**. - **Paid download**: the button reads **Buy for** followed by the currency and price, or **Buy now** when the price is zero. Choosing it opens checkout, where the buyer pays through Stripe. On a paid download, a file is delivered only after a completed purchase. If you set a maximum number of sales when you create the transfer, download requests are refused once the number of completed purchases reaches that number. ## Preview before purchase On a paid download, the play button reads **Preview**. When the transfer has a preview length, playback stops at that point on every track and checkout opens. Without a preview length, there is no cutoff. The preview length is set when you charge for the transfer, as described in [How to charge for an audio transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/selling-files/paid-audio-transfer-sell-audio-files-with-tarkle). Charging for access is a Pro feature. It also needs Stripe connected and paid transfers turned on. The [pricing page](/pricing) lists the plans, and if a message stops you, [Why can't I turn on paid transfers?](https://tarkle.com/help/troubleshooting/why-cant-i-turn-on-paid-transfers) explains each one. ## Who can open the page A transfer can require a password, an email address, or both. Each gate appears before the player. - With a password, the page reads **This audio is password protected** and asks for the **Password**, with an **Unlock** button. - With an email gate, the page asks for **Your name (optional)** and **Your email address**, and the **Access files** button opens the player. The same gates protect the audio files, so a track is not served until they are passed. Signed-in owners and team members of the workspace skip both gates. A transfer that is disabled shows a not-found page, and so does a transfer past its expiry date. ## Views and activity Each visit to the page adds one to the transfer's view count and updates its last viewed time. The visit is also written to your workspace's activity log, with the visitor's country and city when the request includes them. If Slack is connected and view alerts are turned on, each visit also posts to Slack. ## Related articles - [How to create an audio transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-an-audio-transfer) - [How to charge for an audio transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/selling-files/paid-audio-transfer-sell-audio-files-with-tarkle) - [How to embed an audio transfer on your website](https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-embed-an-audio-transfer-on-your-website) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/what-is-an-audio-transfer-page ### What is a video transfer page? The video transfer page is the branded page where a recipient watches your video, and what they can download. A video transfer page is the page a recipient opens from a link with /v/ in its address. It plays your video on a branded page, with the title and description you wrote. Depending on how the transfer was set up, the page can also show a Download button, ask for a password, or ask for an email address before the video plays. To create a video transfer, read [What are transfers in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle). This article covers what the recipient sees. ## What the page shows The video plays in a centered card at the top of the page. Below the player come the transfer title, the creator's name, and a line with the number of videos or the length of a single video, the file size, the date the transfer was created and, when it has changed, the date it was updated. The description comes next, then the body text if you wrote one, then a button with the label and link you set. The button opens its link in a new tab. The cover image, if the transfer has one, is the picture shown on the player before the video plays. It is also the preview image when someone shares the link, for a transfer that anyone with the link can open. The Download button and the button you set use your workspace's accent color. The page background is a light tint of your brand color. ## Playing the video A video uploaded to Tarkle plays in the browser, so the recipient does not need to download it. A video added from a link plays from its source. Supported sources are YouTube, Vimeo, Loom, Wistia, Bunny and Gumlet. Wistia share links, with /s/ in the address, do not play. Use the direct or embed link of the Wistia video instead. For a Loom video, see [How to create a branded video page with a Loom video](https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-loom-video). A video added from a link has no Download button. When a transfer holds several videos, the viewer chooses which one plays. ## Downloads Whether the recipient can download depends on the setting the transfer was created with. - A view-only transfer plays the video with no Download button. - A transfer that allows downloads shows a Download button beside the title. If the transfer holds several videos, the button reads Download all and downloads every video in the transfer. - A paid transfer does not show the Download button on this page. When a transfer has a watermark turned on, the video shows your workspace name over it. ## Passwords and email gates A transfer can ask for a password, an email address, or both, before the video plays. Members of your workspace who open the page while signed in skip both. For a password, the recipient types it in the Password field and clicks Unlock. A wrong password shows Incorrect password. After a correct password, the browser keeps the page unlocked for 30 days. For an email gate, the recipient enters Your email address and, if they want, Your name (optional), then clicks Access files. Tarkle saves the address as a contact in your workspace, and the browser keeps the page unlocked for 24 hours. [Email gated file transfers](https://tarkle.com/help/access-control/email-gated-file-transfers-collect-leads-before-sharing-file) explains how the gate works. ## Views and links that stop working Each time the page loads, Tarkle counts a view on the transfer and records the time of the last view. The view is also written to the [activity log](/dashboard/activity) of your workspace, without the viewer's email address. If you disable the transfer, or its expiry date has passed, the link opens a page-not-found page. A link to a transfer that is not a video opens the same page. ## Related articles - [How to create a branded video page with a Gumlet video](https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/how-to-create-a-branded-video-page-with-a-gumlet-video) - [Video hosting for businesses with Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/storage/video-hosting-for-businesses-with-tarkle) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/video-transfer/what-is-a-video-transfer-page --- # Help: Feedback Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/feedback ### Feedback plans and limits Free allows 5 active feedback boards in each workspace, and Pro and Agency have no board limit. Feedback boards collect comments and approvals on PDFs and images. This page lists how many active boards each plan allows and the limits that apply to boards, comments and reviewers. To make your first board, read [How do I create a feedback board?](https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-create-a-board). ## Active boards by plan A board stays active until you archive it. On Free, each workspace can have 5 active boards. Pro and Agency have no limit on active boards. For the plans themselves, see [plans and prices](/pricing). | Plan | Active boards | | --- | --- | | Free | 5 in each workspace | | Pro and Agency | No limit | ## Archived boards Archived boards do not count toward the limit. To make room, open the [Feedback](/dashboard/feedback) page, open **More actions** on the board and click **Archive board**. Restoring an archived board counts it as active again, so the limit applies when you restore it. Restore a board from the archived boards on the Feedback page. Any team member can archive or restore a board. ## Reviewers and passwords Reviewers do not need an account to [leave feedback](https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-leave-feedback) or to approve a board. A board can require a password or an email address before a reviewer can open it. The [share a board](https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-share-a-board) article explains how to set one. ## Other limits - A board holds PDF files or image files, not both. The dialog that adds files accepts only the type you chose. - A comment can be up to 4,000 characters. - A comment can include one attachment: an image up to 10 MB (PNG, JPEG, WebP or GIF), an SVG up to 2 MB, or a PDF up to 25 MB. - A comment can tag up to 10 people. Only people already on the board can be tagged: teammates and reviewers who have commented before. Tags past the tenth are ignored. A reply that only the team can see cannot tag a reviewer. - The note on an Approve or Request changes review is cut to 4,000 characters. - On Pro and Agency, the **More actions** menu of a board has **Customize URL**, which sets a custom address for that board. Free does not show it. ## Who can do what - **Create a board:** team members with the permission to create and share files. - **Archive a board or restore it:** any team member. - **Delete board:** the owner or an admin. Only they see **Delete board** in the board's menu. ## If you reach the limit On Free, when a workspace already has 5 active boards, Tarkle refuses to create another board or to restore an archived one. The message tells you to archive one board or upgrade to Pro to create more. To archive a finished board, follow the steps under Archived boards. To upgrade, see [Billing](/dashboard/settings/billing) for your organization's plan. ## Related articles - [What is Feedback in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-what-is-feedback) - [How do deadlines, reminders and closing feedback work?](https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-deadlines-and-closing) - [How do I let viewers download a board?](https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-allow-downloads) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-plans-and-limits ### How do contacts see boards in the client portal? A contact with portal access sees the feedback boards shared with them under Feedback, each with a status. A contact with portal access signs in to the client portal and finds the feedback boards shared with them in the portal sidebar. This page covers which boards appear, what the contact sees on each one, and how each board's status is worked out. ## Which boards appear The Feedback item appears in the portal sidebar only while the contact has at least one live board. A board is live when it is not disabled, has not passed its expiry date and has not been burned. The list includes the boards shared with the contact and the boards shared with the organization they belong to. When a board stops being live, it leaves the list, and when no live board is left, the Feedback item is hidden. ## What the contact sees Each board in the list shows its title, the number of open comment threads or **No open comments**, a timestamp and its status. Clicking a board opens it. Above the list, three cards show Feedback, Page views and Downloads. Each card shows a count, and the counts cover only the contact's boards. ## The statuses Each board shows one of four statuses. The status comes from the comments on the board. Approve or request-changes decisions are not counted as comments, and replies count toward the thread they belong to. - **Action required:** a comment thread is open and its latest message was written by someone other than the contact, such as your team or another reviewer. - **Waiting for reply:** some threads are open and the contact wrote the latest message on every open thread. - **No feedback yet:** no comment thread has been started on the board. - **Resolved:** every comment thread is resolved. **Action required** takes priority over **Waiting for reply**. The boards are listed in the order Action required, Waiting for reply, No feedback yet and Resolved. Within each status, the board created most recently comes first. To set a comment's status, read [How do I manage comments: statuses, assignees and filters?](https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-statuses-assignees-filters) ## Share a board with a contact Portal access is set for each contact, and the first time it is turned on, the invite email goes out. Contacts are kept per workspace in [Contacts](/dashboard/contacts). The contact then signs in with a link sent to their email. If they have set up an authenticator or a passkey, they are sent to that second sign-in step before they reach the portal. For how a board is shared and who can open it, read [How do I share a board, and who can see it?](https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-share-a-board) ## What they do not see A board shared only with other contacts stays out of this contact's list. Internal comments are left out when the list and the statuses are worked out, so they do not change any status. Boards also stay out of Shared and out of Files in the portal. ## Limits The [client portal](/features/client-portal) is included on Pro and Agency, and Agency includes everything in Pro. To compare plans and prices, open [pricing](/pricing). ## Related articles - [How do I share a board, and who can see it?](https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-share-a-board) - [How do I manage comments: statuses, assignees and filters?](https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-statuses-assignees-filters) - [How do reviewers leave feedback?](https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-leave-feedback) - [Which plan includes the client portal?](https://tarkle.com/help/client-portal/which-plan-includes-the-client-portal) **Next:** share a board with a contact who has portal access, then check the statuses in their list. Source: https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-in-the-client-portal ### How do deadlines, reminders and closing feedback work? A deadline closes feedback on its own, or you can close it yourself with Disable comments. A deadline closes feedback automatically. You can also close it yourself with **Disable comments**. A closed board stays open to read. ## Set a deadline Open the board from [Feedback](/dashboard/feedback) in your workspace. A deadline is set from the board's actions menu. 1. Click **Board actions**, the three-dot button. 2. Click **Add deadline**. If the board already has a deadline, the item reads **Edit deadline**. 3. Pick a date and a time in the future. The time is read in your workspace's time zone. 4. Click **Save deadline**. When a deadline already exists, the button reads **Update deadline**. Tarkle confirms with **Deadline saved**. The date picker does not allow past days, and times that have already passed today are not offered. If the time has passed by the time you click the button, Tarkle shows **Deadline must be in the future.** and saves nothing. To remove a deadline, click **Edit deadline**, then click **Remove deadline**. Tarkle confirms with **Deadline removed**. While the board is open, reviewers see one line under the comment box. It reads **Feedback closes in 3 days (Oct 22, 2026)** when a day or more is left, and the number of days is rounded up. In the last 24 hours it reads **Feedback closes today (Oct 22, 2026)**. Dates in this line are in UTC. Once the deadline has passed, the comment box is replaced by **Feedback closed on Oct 22, 2026**. ## Reminders If a board has a deadline and comments are on, Tarkle emails reminders 24 hours and 1 hour before the deadline. A reminder job runs every 15 minutes, and each reminder goes out on the first run inside its window. If you set a deadline less than 24 hours away, the 24-hour reminder goes out on the next run. If it is less than an hour away, only the 1-hour reminder goes out. The owner always gets these reminders. Reviewers who left a comment with an email address get them too, until they give a verdict. Team members who commented still get them after a verdict. Viewers who never commented, and comments without an email address, get no reminder. Anyone who has stopped Feedback emails is skipped. See [Which emails does Feedback send, and how do I stop them?](/help/feedback/feedback-emails). When the deadline passes, the owner and the team members who commented on the board get an email that the board has closed. It goes out within 30 minutes after the deadline. Reviewers and viewers do not get it. A board with **Disable comments** on gets no reminders, and that includes the closed email. Changing a deadline sends the reminders again. ## Close feedback yourself Open the board, click **Board actions**, then click **Disable comments**. The item changes to **Enable comments**. Click it to open the board again. Enable comments does not reopen a board whose deadline has passed, because the board stays closed while its deadline is in the past. To open it, click **Edit deadline**, then **Remove deadline**, or pick a later date and time and click **Update deadline**. ## What closing does When a board is closed, by its deadline or by **Disable comments**: - Nobody can add comments, replies or attachments, the owner and team members included. - Team members can still change a comment's status and assign it. See [How do I manage comments: statuses, assignees and filters?](/help/feedback/feedback-statuses-assignees-filters). - Reviewers cannot submit a review. A verdict already given stays on its comment as an **Approved** or **Requested changes** label. - The board can still be opened and read. If **Allow downloads** is on, viewers can still download it. See [How do I let viewers download a board?](/help/feedback/feedback-allow-downloads). ## Limits Only the owner, and team members with permission to edit files, can set, change or remove a deadline, or click **Disable comments** or **Enable comments**. A deadline must be in the future. The dialog refuses a time that has already passed. ## Related articles - [How do reviewers approve or request changes?](/help/feedback/feedback-approve-or-request-changes) - [Which emails does Feedback send, and how do I stop them?](/help/feedback/feedback-emails) - [How do I let viewers download a board?](/help/feedback/feedback-allow-downloads) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-deadlines-and-closing ### How do I create a feedback board? Add PDFs or images in the Create board dialog, then create a board and share its link with reviewers. A feedback board holds PDFs or images that reviewers comment on. Each board holds one kind of file, so you choose **PDF** or **Image** before you add anything. This article shows how to create a board from the Feedback page. ## Create a board 1. Open the [Feedback page](/dashboard/feedback) from the sidebar. It lists your boards. 2. Click **Create board**. The create dialog opens. 3. Choose **PDF** or **Image**. 4. Add your files. Click **Upload** to pick files from your device, or **Library** to pick files already in your workspace. The Dropbox and Google Drive tabs also appear once you have connected them. Each file uploads as soon as you add it. 5. When every file has uploaded, click **Create board**. Before you click **Create board**, you can also tick **Add password**, **Add deadline** or **Allow downloads**. When you tick **Add password**, type the password in the field that appears. A deadline is a date and time in your workspace's time zone, and a deadline in the past is refused. After the deadline, nobody can comment, but the board stays open to view. With **Allow downloads** ticked, viewers get a Download button. To learn more, read [deadlines and closing feedback](/help/feedback/feedback-deadlines-and-closing). ## Share the board To send the board to reviewers, read how to [share a board](/help/feedback/feedback-share-a-board). It explains who can open the board and how to share it by link or by email. ## Change a board later Click **Board actions** (the three-dot button) on the board to change it. These items show for people who can manage the board: **Add file**, **Add password** or **Disable password**, **Add deadline** or **Edit deadline**, **Allow downloads** or **Disable downloads**, and **Disable comments** or **Enable comments**. **Disable comments** stops new comments even without a deadline, and **Enable comments** turns them back on. To archive a board, click **More actions** on its card in the Feedback list, then click **Archive board**. An archived board moves to the Archived tab. ## If you cannot create a board - **Free plan limit.** On the Free plan you can have 5 active boards. When you try to create a sixth, Tarkle asks you to archive a board or upgrade to Pro. Archive a board you no longer need, or move to [Pro or Agency](/pricing). Archived boards do not count toward the limit. - **Wrong file type.** Tarkle shows "Only PDF files can be added here." or "Only image files can be added here." Remove the file that does not match the type you chose. - **Board too large.** If the board is larger than your plan allows, Tarkle does not create it. ## Limits Creating a board needs the permission to create and share files in the workspace. Without it, Tarkle shows "You do not have permission to create transfers." Pro and Agency have no board limit. Free supports uploads and transfers up to 1 GB each, and Pro and Agency support files up to 200 GB. See [feedback plans and limits](/help/feedback/feedback-plans-and-limits) for the full picture. ## Related articles - [What is Feedback in Tarkle?](/help/feedback/feedback-what-is-feedback) - [Share a board](/help/feedback/feedback-share-a-board) - [Deadlines and closing feedback](/help/feedback/feedback-deadlines-and-closing) - [Feedback plans and limits](/help/feedback/feedback-plans-and-limits) **Next:** share the board with your reviewers. Source: https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-create-a-board ### How do I let viewers download a board? Turn on Allow downloads in the board's three-dot menu, and viewers get a Download button for a zip of its files. Open the board's three-dot menu, labelled **Board actions**, and click **Allow downloads**. Viewers then get a **Download** button that saves the board's files as one zip. ## Turn downloads on or off Until you turn it on, viewers cannot download the board. Each board has its own setting. The owner, and team members with the edit files permission, can change it. 1. Open the board on [Feedback](/dashboard/feedback). 2. Click the three-dot menu, labelled **Board actions**, beside the **Share** button. 3. Click **Allow downloads**. A message reads "Downloads allowed. Viewers get a Download button." 4. To turn downloads off again, open the same menu and click **Disable downloads**. Team members without the edit files permission see only the notifications item in that menu. ## What viewers get On the board's public page, viewers see a **Download** button in the sidebar, above the attribution line at the bottom. The button is hidden while the sidebar is collapsed. When a viewer clicks it, the button reads **Preparing...** while the zip is built, and then the file saves to their computer. The zip is named after the board: its title, then its link code in capitals, ending in .zip. It holds every live file on the board, all at once. Viewers cannot pick single files. If no file on the board has earlier versions, the files sit at the top of the zip. If any file has earlier versions, each version number gets its own folder, such as Version 1 and Version 2, so the folders line up across files. If the board has a password or asks for an email address, a viewer must pass that first, as they do to open the board. Signed-in team members of the workspace can always download, whatever the setting. ## Earlier versions in the zip The zip includes the earlier versions of a file that are still kept. A replaced version is kept for 30 days on Free and 90 days on Pro, counted from the day it was replaced. A later plan change does not shorten that time. Making new versions is a Pro feature. Read [File versioning: what it is and how it works](/help/storage/file-versioning-what-it-is-and-how-it-works) to see how versions are kept, and compare plans on [Pricing](/pricing). ## Download counts Each download of a board is counted, and team downloads count too. Plan and board limits are covered in [Feedback plans and limits](/help/feedback/feedback-plans-and-limits). ## Related articles - [How do reviewers approve or request changes?](/help/feedback/feedback-approve-or-request-changes) - [How do I create a feedback board?](/help/feedback/feedback-create-a-board) When the work is approved, turn on **Allow downloads** so viewers can take the files with them. Source: https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-allow-downloads ### How do I manage comments: statuses, assignees and filters? Set a comment's status, assign it to a teammate and filter the list to see what is still open. Open a comment on a feedback board to set its status, assign it to a teammate and reply. This page also covers the filters above the comment list and the Activity list. Feedback boards belong to a workspace, so open [Feedback](/dashboard/feedback) and choose the board first. ## Set a comment's status Click a comment in the list to open it. Team members change its status with the **Status** menu, which has four choices: - **Active** - **In Progress** - **In Review** - **Resolved** Choosing **Resolved** also marks the comment as resolved. Everyone else sees the status as plain text. When a team member changes a comment to a different status, the person who left the comment is emailed. That email is not sent when the comment has no email address on file, or when that person has stopped [feedback emails](/help/feedback/feedback-emails). The email names who made the change and shows an excerpt of the comment. Choosing the status a comment already has sends nothing. ## Assign a comment Open the comment and choose a person in the **Assignee** menu. The menu lists **Unassigned** and each member of your team, and only team members can be chosen. The person you assign is emailed, unless you assign the comment to yourself or the comment is already assigned to that person. Choosing **Unassigned** sends no email. ## Reply to the team only When a team member writes a reply, the box shows **Seen by:** with **Everyone** and **Team**. **Everyone** is selected by default. Choose **Team** to post a reply that only your team can see. It is labelled **Team only** once posted. The choice does not appear on a top-level comment, which everyone who can open the board can see. A reply posted under a team-only reply is team-only too, and the box does not offer the choice. Team-only replies are hidden from anyone who is not on your team, and they can tag teammates but not guests. ## Filter, sort and search The filter bar above the comment list narrows the list. It appears once the board has a top-level comment. - **Status**: **All statuses**, or one status. - **Assignee**: **Anyone**, **Unassigned**, or one teammate. - **Mine**: comments you wrote or that are assigned to you. It appears once the page knows your email address. - **Hide resolved**: hides the resolved comments. - **Oldest first** or **Newest first**. **Oldest first** is the default. The counter shows **N open**. It counts top-level comments that are not resolved, so replies and review answers are not counted. Use the search box, **Search N comments**, to find a comment by its text or its author's name. **Reset** appears once a filter or sort is changed, and clears them all. It does not clear the search box. Pin numbers stay the same when you search or filter. When someone has commented since your last visit, a banner shows the number of new items and **See new activity**. That view narrows the list to threads with new activity. **Mark all as read** appears in that view. ## See the activity in Finish review Open **Finish review** on the board. The dialog holds a review form and, below it, the **Activity** list, which shows what people did on the board, newest first. It lists comments, replies, approvals and requests for changes, status changes, assignments, unassignments, resolves, and when the board was created. Team-only replies and the events about them show only to your team. For how a reviewer gives a verdict, see [how reviewers approve or request changes](/help/feedback/feedback-approve-or-request-changes). ## Limits Any member of your team can change a comment's status or assignee. Comments and replies cannot be edited or deleted from the board. Only a comment's status and assignee can be changed. ## What happens next Turn on **Hide resolved** to work through the open comments. For how reviewers leave their comments, see [How do reviewers leave feedback?](/help/feedback/feedback-leave-feedback). ## Related articles - [How do I share a board, and who can see it?](/help/feedback/feedback-share-a-board) - [How do deadlines, reminders and closing feedback work?](/help/feedback/feedback-deadlines-and-closing) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-statuses-assignees-filters ### How do I share a board, and who can see it? Copy a board's link or send it by email, and learn who can review it and how to add a password. A feedback board has one link. Anyone with the link can open the board and review it, unless you add a password. This page covers how to share the link, send it by email, protect the board with a password, and who can see what. ## Share the link Open the board, click **Share** in the title row, and copy the link in the **Link** section. Send that link to the reviewer. On the [Feedback](/dashboard/feedback) page, the **Share** button on a board's card opens the same link. ## Share by email Share by email is for signed-in team members. In the **Share** popover, add email addresses under **Share by email** and click **Send**. Tarkle emails each address and saves it as a contact in your workspace, on the [Contacts](/dashboard/contacts) page. One send uses up to 100 addresses, and sending needs permission to create and share files. Reviewers who are not on your team do not see this section, so they use the link. ## Protect the board with a password Only the board's owner and team members with permission to edit files see the password item. Open the three-dot menu in the board's title row, then click **Add password**. Type the password in the box and click **Save**. From then on, a visitor who opens the link enters the password once and stays in for 30 days. Team members are never asked for it. To remove the password, open the same menu and click **Disable password**. It takes effect at once, with no confirmation. To change it, disable the password and add a new one. Visitors who had entered the old password must enter the new one. ## Custom address On plans that include custom links, the menu of a board's card on the Feedback page has a **Customize URL** item. Click the **More actions** button on the card, then click **Customize URL**. Pro and Agency include it, and Free does not. See [pricing](/pricing) for each plan. ## In the client portal A contact with a portal login sees each board linked to them under **Portal → Feedback**, with one status for each: **Action required**, **Waiting for reply**, **No feedback yet** or **Resolved**. Archived boards and boards past their expiry date are not listed. Team-only replies are never shown to a contact. For how contacts use the portal, read [Feedback in the client portal](/help/feedback/feedback-in-the-client-portal). ## Who can see a board - Anyone with the link can open a board without a password and see its files and comments. - Everyone who can open the board sees the name and email address of each person who commented. Team-only replies are shown to team members only. - Search engines do not index the board page. - In a chat app, the link preview shows the board's title and "Feedback". A board with a password shows "Feedback requested" and your workspace name instead. Note: the link is the only key to the board. For sensitive work, add a password before you share it. **Next:** if a reviewer needs help leaving comments, send them [How do reviewers leave feedback?](/help/feedback/feedback-leave-feedback). ## Related articles - [Create a feedback board](/help/feedback/feedback-create-a-board) - [Feedback emails](/help/feedback/feedback-emails) - [Feedback plans and limits](/help/feedback/feedback-plans-and-limits) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-share-a-board ### How do reviewers approve or request changes? Click Finish review, choose Approve this work or Request changes, add an optional note and click Submit review. A reviewer gives a board its answer: approve the work or request changes. This page covers the reviewer's steps, what the board owner sees, and what happens when a reviewer changes an answer. To see how a reviewer opens a board, read [How do reviewers leave feedback?](/help/feedback/feedback-leave-feedback) first. ## Steps (reviewer) 1. Open the board link. If the board asks for your name and email, enter both. You do not need an account. 2. Click **Finish review** at the top right of the board. 3. In **Finish reviewing this board**, click 👍 **Approve this work** or 👎 **Request changes**. 4. Optionally, write a note in **Additional comments (optional)**. A note longer than 4,000 characters is cut off. 5. Click **Submit review**. After you submit, the button shows **Approved** in green or **Changes requested** in red. Note: if you click **Finish review** before you have entered your name and email, the board shows "Please tell us who you are first." and asks for them again. ## Change your answer Click the **Approved** or **Changes requested** button again to open the dialog and send a new answer. The new answer becomes the board's current answer, and every answer you send is kept as its own entry. The owner is emailed each time. ## What the owner sees Each answer emails the board owner the reviewer's name, the answer and the note. The email shows the first 240 characters of a long note. On the [Feedback](/dashboard/feedback) page of the workspace, a board with an answer shows a small round icon in the bottom-right corner of its preview: a white tick on green for **Approved**, or a white edit icon on red for **Changes requested**. Hover over the icon to read the words. ## Activity Reviewers see **Activity** under **Submit review**, in the same dialog. It lists what happened on the board, newest first: the board created, each comment, reply, review, status change, assignment and resolve, with who and when. Hover over a time to see the exact date and time. ## When you cannot review When the owner turns comments off, or the feedback deadline has passed, the button is hidden. If the reviewer answered before, the board shows that answer as a plain **Approved** or **Changes requested** label. [Deadlines and closing feedback](/help/feedback/feedback-deadlines-and-closing) explains how a board closes. Team members of the workspace cannot submit reviews on its boards. The button is hidden from them, and a review from a signed-in team member is refused. A reviewer who enters a team member's email is refused too, and must use their own email. ## After changes are requested Read the note in the owner's email, then open the board and click **Add version** in the top bar. Choose the updated file. The button shows **Uploading...** while the file is sent, and the file is uploaded as a new version of the open file. Only the owner and team members who can edit files see **Add version**, and it needs an open file. To see how versions work, read [file versions](/features/file-versions). ## Related articles - [How do I share a board, and who can see it?](/help/feedback/feedback-share-a-board) - [How do I manage comments: statuses, assignees and filters?](/help/feedback/feedback-statuses-assignees-filters) - [Which emails does Feedback send, and how do I stop them?](/help/feedback/feedback-emails) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-approve-or-request-changes ### How do reviewers leave feedback? Open the board link, leave comments on a spot or on the whole file, reply, and finish with Finish review. When someone shares a feedback board with you, you can pin comments on an image or a PDF page, comment on the whole file, reply to comments, and finish with an approval or a request for changes. You do not need a Tarkle account. To learn what a board is, read [What is Feedback in Tarkle?](/help/feedback/feedback-what-is-feedback). ## Steps 1. Open the link. If asked, enter the password or your email. 2. If the window **Let us know who you are** opens, enter your name and email, then click **Continue**. Both fields are required, and the email must look valid. Your details are saved in that browser, so the window does not show again there. 3. Click the spot on the image or the PDF page where your comment belongs. A pin appears there, and a box with **Leave a comment...** opens. 4. Write your comment and click **Post comment**. You can also press Ctrl or Cmd + Enter. 5. To comment on the whole file, write in the box under the comment list (**Leave general feedback...**) and click **Comment**. 6. To reply, click a comment to open it, write in the **Add a reply...** box, and click **Post reply**. 7. When you are done, click **Finish review**. Choose **Approve this work** or **Request changes**, add a note in **Additional comments (optional)** if you want, and click **Submit review**. **Finish review** is for reviewers, so team members do not see it. It is removed when the board stops accepting comments, and a review you already gave stays as a label. If you closed the name and email window, clicking **Finish review** asks you to tell us who you are first. After you submit, the button shows **Approved** or **Changes requested**. The [approve or request changes](/help/feedback/feedback-approve-or-request-changes) article covers the review itself. ## Tag someone Type @ in a comment box and pick a team member or a person who has already commented on the board. The person you tag gets an email that says you mentioned them on the board. In a reply marked **Team only**, you can tag teammates only. ## Attach a file Each comment can carry one file. Click the button labelled **Attach a file** in the comment box, or paste or drop an image or PDF into it. Images (PNG, JPEG, WebP and GIF) can be up to 10 MB, SVG files up to 2 MB, and PDF files up to 25 MB. ## Use the keyboard On an image, press Tab to focus it, then use the arrow keys to move the pin marker. Hold Shift for smaller steps. Press Enter or Space to place the pin, or Esc to remove the marker. On a PDF, each page has a **Comment on page** button. It appears when you reach it with the keyboard, and it places a pin in the centre of that page. ## What you see - The comment list has a search box and filters, including **Hide resolved**. - Your own comments and replies show **Sent** or **Seen**. - New comments and replies appear without a reload. - Team members can mark a reply **Team only**. Reviewers never see those replies. - A board that has been disabled, or whose link has expired, cannot be opened. A note below the comment box shows when feedback closes: **Feedback closes in** the days left, or **Feedback closes today**, each with the date. After the deadline, the comment box is replaced by **Feedback closed on** and the date. If the team turns comments off, the box shows **Commenting disabled**. Reviewers can still read the board. [Deadlines and closing](/help/feedback/feedback-deadlines-and-closing) explains how a team sets a deadline. ## Stop the emails Most emails from a board end with a **Stop these emails** link, including the emails about new comments and replies, mentions and status changes. The email about a submitted review has no such link. [Which emails a board sends](/help/feedback/feedback-emails) explains who gets each one and how to stop them. ## Limits A comment can be up to 4,000 characters. A longer comment is refused with "That comment is too long." Shorten it and send again. If a comment is refused, what you typed stays in the box. ## What happens next Your comments appear on the board for the team and the other reviewers. Your review shows on the board as **Approved** or **Changes requested**. ## Related articles - [How do I share a board, and who can see it?](/help/feedback/feedback-share-a-board) - [How do I manage comments: statuses, assignees and filters?](/help/feedback/feedback-statuses-assignees-filters) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-leave-feedback ### What is Feedback in Tarkle? Send a PDF or images as one link and collect pinned comments and an approve or request-changes answer. Feedback lets you send a PDF or a set of images to a client as one link. The reviewer pins comments to the exact spot they mean, replies to each other, and finishes with an approve or request-changes answer. Reviewers do not need an account. ## What you can review - **PDF:** one document, with comments pinned per page. - **Images:** PNG, JPG, JPEG, GIF, WebP, BMP, SVG, HEIC and HEIF. A board holds one kind of file. Once a board has files, Tarkle refuses a file of the other kind when you add one. Websites, video and audio are not supported. ## How it works 1. Open [Feedback](/dashboard/feedback), click **Create board** and add your files. [How do I create a feedback board?](/help/feedback/feedback-create-a-board) covers each step. Then copy the board's link to share it. 2. The reviewer opens the link. If the board has a password, the reviewer enters it first. The board asks for a name and an email, and both are required. It keeps them in that browser, so the reviewer is not asked again there. [How do reviewers leave feedback?](/help/feedback/feedback-leave-feedback) shows the screens. 3. The reviewer clicks the file to pin a comment and writes it. A comment can carry one attachment, an image or a PDF. 4. Your team sees every comment in the sidebar. A team member can set a status, assign the comment to a teammate and reply. A reply can be marked team-only, and reviewers never see it. 5. The reviewer finishes by choosing **Approve this work** or **Request changes**, adding an optional comment and clicking **Submit review**. A reviewer can finish again: the latest answer replaces the one before, and the Activity list shows the board's history. [How do reviewers approve or request changes?](/help/feedback/feedback-approve-or-request-changes) explains this step. ## Who can do what - **Any team member** can archive and restore a board, set a comment's status, resolve it and assign it. - **The workspace owner and team members with permission to edit files** can change the board's settings and add a new version of a file. - **Only the owner and admins** can delete a board. Other team members can archive it instead. - **Reviewers** need no account. They comment, reply and finish a review. A team member cannot submit a review of their own board. ## Controls on a board The board's menu holds these settings. [Which emails does Feedback send, and how do I stop them?](/help/feedback/feedback-emails) covers the notification emails. - **Password:** the board opens only after the reviewer enters the password. Team members are not asked for it. - **Deadline:** when the deadline passes, nobody can comment or review, and the board stays viewable. [How do deadlines, reminders and closing feedback work?](/help/feedback/feedback-deadlines-and-closing) explains the reminders. - **Disable comments:** stops new comments, replies and reviews until comments are turned back on. - **Allow downloads:** lets viewers download the board's files. [How do I let viewers download a board?](/help/feedback/feedback-allow-downloads) explains it. ## Limits On the Free plan, you can have 5 active boards. Pro and Agency have no limit. Archived boards do not count, and restoring a board counts against the limit. [Feedback plans and limits](/help/feedback/feedback-plans-and-limits) lists the rest. Compare the plans on [Tarkle plans](/pricing). ## Related articles - [How do I share a board, and who can see it?](/help/feedback/feedback-share-a-board) - [How do I manage comments: statuses, assignees and filters?](/help/feedback/feedback-statuses-assignees-filters) - [How do contacts see boards in the client portal?](/help/feedback/feedback-in-the-client-portal) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-what-is-feedback ### Which emails does Feedback send, and how do I stop them? Which emails a feedback board sends, who gets each one, and how to stop them. A feedback board sends emails to the people who take part in it when something happens on it: a new comment, a status change, a review or a deadline. New comment, reply, digest, status change, tag and deadline reminder emails carry a **Stop these emails** link at the bottom. Assignment and review emails have no such link. ## What is sent | Email | Who gets it | When | | --- | --- | --- | | New comment or reply | The workspace owner and everyone who has commented on the board. The author and anyone tagged in the same comment are left out. | Right away. A person gets at most one of these emails per board every 5 minutes. Comments held back in that window go into the digest. | | Digest | The same people | Once the board has been quiet for 5 minutes, or 30 minutes after the oldest held-back comment, whichever comes first. It lists up to 3 comments. | | You were tagged | The person tagged in a comment | Right away. | | Assigned to you | The team member the comment is assigned to | Right away, unless you assigned the comment to yourself or the same person is set again. | | Status changed | The person who wrote the comment, when an email address is on file | When the status really changes. | | Review submitted | The workspace owner | Right away. | | Deadline reminder | The workspace owner and everyone who has commented, except reviewers who already gave a verdict | 24 hours and 1 hour before the deadline. | | Deadline closed | The workspace owner and team members who have commented | When the deadline passes. | Team-only replies go to team members only. Deadlines and reminders are explained in [How do deadlines, reminders and closing feedback work?](/help/feedback/feedback-deadlines-and-closing), and assignments in [How do I manage comments: statuses, assignees and filters?](/help/feedback/feedback-statuses-assignees-filters). ## Stop emails from the link in an email Open the email and click **Stop these emails** at the bottom. The page asks **Stop feedback emails?** and offers two buttons: - **Stop emails for this board** stops the emails about this board only. - **Stop all feedback emails from** the workspace name stops the emails for every board of that workspace. Once emails are stopped, the same link shows **Emails are stopped** with a **Turn emails back on** button. That button lifts both kinds of stop. ## Turn off notifications for one board Team members can switch off the emails for a single board in [Feedback](/dashboard/feedback). Open the board's **Board actions** menu (the three-dot button) and click **Disable notifications**. The item reads **Enable notifications** when you want them back. The screen then confirms that tags and assignments still reach you: "Emails off for this board. You are still told when you are tagged or assigned." ## Limits Assignment and review emails have no **Stop these emails** link, and a stop on a board or a workspace does not block them. A team member is still emailed when tagged, even after turning notifications off. ## Related articles - [How do I manage comments: statuses, assignees and filters?](/help/feedback/feedback-statuses-assignees-filters) - [How do deadlines, reminders and closing feedback work?](/help/feedback/feedback-deadlines-and-closing) - [How do reviewers leave feedback?](/help/feedback/feedback-leave-feedback) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/feedback/feedback-emails --- # Help: Troubleshooting Category address: https://tarkle.com/help/troubleshooting ### Why can't I turn on paid transfers? Each message you see when you charge for a transfer names one step: upgrade, turn paid transfers on, or connect Stripe. When you try to charge for access to a transfer, Tarkle can show one of three messages. Find the one on your screen below and take the step it names. ## "Paid transfers are a Pro feature. Upgrade to charge for access." Paid transfers are a Pro feature, so upgrade to charge for access. You can see the plans on the [pricing page](https://tarkle.com/pricing). ## "Turn on paid transfers in Settings to charge for access." Paid transfers are not turned on, so turn them on in **Settings** to charge for access. ## "Connect Stripe in Settings > Integrations to charge for access." Stripe is not connected, so connect it in **Settings** > **Integrations** to charge for access. ## Related articles - [Charge for access: create paid transfers](https://tarkle.com/help/selling-files/charge-for-access-create-paid-transfers) - [Share files and get paid with Stripe](https://tarkle.com/help/integrations/share-files-and-get-paid-with-stripe) - [Tarkle plans and pricing](https://tarkle.com/help/billing-subscription/tarkle-plans-and-pricing) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/troubleshooting/why-cant-i-turn-on-paid-transfers ### Why Tarkle may be temporarily unavailable When Tarkle has a problem, pages can fail or uploads can stop, and this shows how to check the status. This page explains what the error page and the upload messages mean, where to check the current status, and what to do next. ## What you may see When a page fails, you may see a page titled **Something went wrong**, with an error code and two buttons, **Try again** and **Contact support**. **Try again** reloads the page. During an upload, Tarkle can show a message instead of finishing. Two of them are "The upload failed. Please try again." and "The upload is taking longer than expected to finish. Please check your files shortly." ## Check the current status Tarkle shows its status in two places. - The footer of tarkle.com shows a status line. It reads All systems operational, Degraded performance, Partial outage, Major outage or Maintenance in progress, and it refreshes every 60 seconds. Clicking it opens [status.tarkle.com](https://status.tarkle.com/) in a new tab. - In the dashboard, open the account menu and choose **Service status**. It opens the same status page. The status page lists ongoing incidents and maintenance in progress. ## What to do 1. Check the status line in the footer of tarkle.com, or open **Service status** from the account menu. 2. Wait until the status shows All systems operational. 3. Reload the page, or click **Try again** on the **Something went wrong** page. 4. Once the service is back, start the upload again. To share the files, follow [How to create a file transfer](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/how-to-create-a-file-transfer). 5. If the problem continues after the status shows All systems operational, contact support. Use the Support link in your [dashboard](/dashboard), or email support@tarkle.com. [How to contact Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/about-tarkle/how-to-contact-tarkle) explains each way. On the **Something went wrong** page, **Contact support** opens an email to support@tarkle.com with the error code filled in. ## Related articles - [How to contact Tarkle](https://tarkle.com/help/about-tarkle/how-to-contact-tarkle) - [What are transfers in Tarkle?](https://tarkle.com/help/file-sharing/what-are-transfers-in-tarkle) Source: https://tarkle.com/help/troubleshooting/why-tarkle-may-be-temporarily-unavailable